user`s manual - Encore Support

Transcription

USER’S MANUAL
The Print Shop® User’s Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Installing The Print Shop® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Registering The Print Shop®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Uninstalling The Print Shop® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Running The Print Shop® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
What’s New in this Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
More Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Customer and Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
RIVERDEEP SOFTWARE LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
CONDITIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
YOU ARE NOT PERMITTED TO: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Projects You Can Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Galleries Available to You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Other Resources, Tools, and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Using The Print Shop® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting at the Project Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Using The Print Shop® Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Creating a Project in The Print Shop® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Creating Projects in Four Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Using the Help Center Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Using the Learn-By-Doing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
2
3
The Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Opening a Project from the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Opening a Project from a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Viewing the Contents Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Opening Recent Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Searching for a Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Opening Matching Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Using the Back Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Opening a Project with Missing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Using the Help Center Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Learn-By-Doing Example: Creating a Greeting Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Exporting a Project to a New File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Selecting a QuickStart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Exporting a Project to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Navigating Your Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Saving a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Changing the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Saving as PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Moving a Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Project File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Sizing a Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Organizing Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Adding a New Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Accessing the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Checking Your Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Creating a New Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Adding a Graphic to Your Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Saving Your Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Copying and Moving Projects into Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Printing Your Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Troubleshooting The Print Shop® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Creating a QuickStart Layout Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Creating a Project from Scratch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Creating an Animated Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Creating Stationery Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Creating a Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Creating CD, DVD, and More Media Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Using The Print Shop® Form Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Renaming a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Deleting a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Renaming a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Sending Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Sending a Project via Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Sharing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Sending a Project via E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Modifying Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Finishing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Types of Projects You Can Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Creating an Oversized Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
4
5
Designing and Modifying Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Using the Design Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Touring the Design Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Using the Hot Shots Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Navigating a Project on the Design Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Viewing Projects on the Design Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Important Design Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Shortcut Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Adding Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Adding Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Adding a Word Processing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Adding Headlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Adding a Sentiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Adding Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Adding Multimedia Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Adding a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Adding a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Adding a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Adding a Freehand Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Adding a Drawing You Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Adding Frames and Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Adding Custom Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Modifying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Navigating to the Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Modifying Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Modifying a Headline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Modifying a Sentiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Modifying Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Modifying Object Color and Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Modifying the Tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Adding or Modifying Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Modifying Multimedia Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Modifying Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Modifying a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Modifying a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Modifying a Frame for a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Modifying a Freestanding Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Modifying a Border Using BorderPlus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Modifying Custom Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Duplicating an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Deleting an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Modifying a Form Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Arranging and Sizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Grouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Ungrouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Sizing an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Positioning Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Rotating an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Rotating by Specific Degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Flipping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Layering Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Using Rulers and Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Modifying Project Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Navigating a Project on the Design Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Adding Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Deleting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
6
7
Adding Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Printing a Preview Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Displaying and Hiding Master Page Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Printing Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Adding or Modifying Panel Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Printing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Adding or Modifying a Color Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Printing Business Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Adding a Background Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Printing Postcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Modifying the Background Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Printing Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Modifying Certain Project Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Printing Transfer Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Converting Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Setting the Print Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Modifying a Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Printing to the Page Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Modifying a Web Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Printing Photobook Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Using Additional Design Tools and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Printing Projects Using the Online Photofinishing Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Checking Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Printing a Project Professionally Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Finding and/or Replacing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Previewing Web Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Publishing Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Using Address Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Using Resources, Tools, and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Adding or Modifying Your Personal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Using the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Using Advanced Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Accessing the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Using The Photo Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Modifying the View of Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Using Advanced Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Viewing Projects with Matching Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Printing or Publishing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Search Features in the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Before Printing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Searching for Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Checking the Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Selecting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Printing a Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Opening a Project from the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Previewing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Opening a Project from a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
8
Setting up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Opening Matching Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Printing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Organizing Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Printing Oversized Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Copying and Moving Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Printing a Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Renaming a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Double-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Modifying Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Printing a Coloring Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
9
Exporting a Project to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Opening an Existing Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Sending Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Using the Event Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Using the Small Business Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Printing a Project from the Project Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Using the Custom Paper Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Using the Art Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Creating a Custom Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Accessing the Art Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Modifying a Custom Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Modifying the View of Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Deleting a Custom Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Searching Features in the Art Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Using Broderbund on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Searching for Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Visiting Broderbund.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Selecting a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Finding Out What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Previewing Animated Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Organizing Your Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Setting the Default Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Copying and Moving Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Showing or Hiding Missing Font Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Renaming a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Setting the Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Modifying Graphic Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Setting the Unit Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Modifying a Graphic Using Photo Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Showing or Hiding Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Using Advanced Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Restoring Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Printing a Graphic from the Art Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Resizing Images for Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Importing a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Resizing tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Scanning in a Graphic or Digital Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Selecting the Image Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Deleting a Graphic from the Art Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Exporting a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Using the Sentiment Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Adding a Sentiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Modifying a Sentiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Creating a New Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Adding Address Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Modifying Address Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
10
11
REGISTERING THE PRINT SHOP®
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
The following is information that you should review before you begin using The
Print Shop®.
1.
If you did not register during installation, the first time you start The Print
Shop you are prompted to register.
INSTALLING THE PRINT SHOP® 22
2.
You can return to the registration at any time — just click the Windows® Start
menu, then choose Programs, The Print Shop®, and Register Your Software.
3.
To get started, click the appropriate age button, 13 or Older or 12 or Younger. The
Broderbund® Product Registration page displays.
1.
Close all applications and dialog boxes, then begin at the active
Windows desktop.
2.
Insert The Print Shop® 22 Install CD-ROM or DVD into the CD/DVD-ROM drive.
The InstallShield Wizard progress dialog box opens.
Note: If the installation process does not begin automatically, click the Windows
Start button, choose Run, then in the Open list box type D:\setup.exe,
substituting D with your CD/DVD-ROM drive letter.
3.
When The Print Shop® dialog box opens, click Next and follow the
onscreen instructions.
4.
Select an Installation setup type:
Typical–Installs the typical files you need to run The Print Shop 22. When
running the program, however, you will need to insert The Print Shop® 22 CD/DVD
to access certain features of the program.
Note: If you select 12 or Younger, you will be prompted to have a parent or
guardian complete the registration for you.
4.
Fill in the fields on the Registration page and click the Submit and Continue
button.
5.
Fill out the survey questions and select Continue. If you choose to bypass the
survey, click the Continue button until you reach the end of the registration
process.
6.
A Thank You message will display confirming your registration is complete.
®
Custom–Installs all files needed to run the program and all Print Shop®
Gallery art.
If you would like to install all the discs without having to insert them again,
please select custom install and all content will be installed on the local
hard drive.
To complete a custom install:
1. Insert the CD/DVD into the CD/DVD-ROM drive.
UNINSTALLING THE PROGRAM
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Start, Settings, and choose the Control Panel.
Double-click on Add/Remove Programs.
Select the name of the program you want to uninstall and click on the Add or
Remove button.
Click Yes to confirm file deletion.
RUNNING THE PROGRAM
To run The Print Shop®, double click on the title’s desktop icon. You can also run the
program from the start menu. Click on Start, Programs, and select The Print Shop® 22
folder. Click on The Print Shop® 22 menu item to start the program.
2. When the installation window open, click Next.
3. Please select Custom from the installation setup type options and click Next.
4. Click the button to the left of The Print Shop® Projects heading and select “This
feature, and all its subfeatures, will be installed on the local hard drive.”
5. Repeat Step 4 for each component that appears.
6. Click Next.
7. Click Install to continue the installation.
Note: When prompted to insert another CD/DVD, remove the current disc from the
CD/DVD-ROM drive and insert the requested CD/DVD.
12
13
WHAT’S NEW IN THIS VERSION
If you contact us using our web form, please remember to include the basic hardware
details and we would also ask that you attach your “dxdiag” file.
New Features
To do this please:
•
Improved Search: The Print Shop 22 includes improved search capabilities that
allow you to quickly find the perfect project or graphic. See Using the Project
Gallery and Using the Art Gallery.
•
Additional Filter Effects: The Print Shop’s Photo Workshop now includes additional
image filters to enhance photos and graphics in your projects. See Applying Photo
Effects in The Photo Workshop.
•
Oversized Pages: If your printer can handle 8.5" x 14" (legal) or 11" x 17" paper,
you can create projects for those paper sizes. See Creating an Oversized Project.
•
Scrapbook Pages: With The Print Shop you can now create scrapbook pages of
various sizes, including the popular 12" x 12" format. To access QuickStart
Scrapbook projects, see Using the Project Gallery.
•
Additional new project types for The Print Shop include Family Trees and Label
Sheets. To access these new QuickStart projects, see Using the Project Gallery.
•
You can use The Print Shop to create projects you can then upload to online
photo services for printing photo books. See Printing Photo Book Pages and
Printing Projects Using Online Photo Finishing Services.
Note: Some features may not be available in your edition of The Print Shop .
®
More Projects:
•
Multiple page brochures, Avery® Specialty Paper Templates, and more! To access
thousands of QuickStart Layout projects, see Using the Project Gallery
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
If you purchased this product directly from Broderbund® via www.broderbund.com,
phone, or mail order, please visit http://support.broderbund.com.
If you purchased this product at a retail store, please visit Encore’s technical
support knowledgebase at http://support.encoreusa.com and have the following
information available:
•
Product name
•
Type of computer, amount of RAM, video card, and system information
•
A description of the problem, including any error messages
•
A list of steps that lead to the problem
1.
Click Start
2.
Click Run
3.
Type dxdiag and click OK
4.
The DirectX diagnosis program should now start up. (This may take a
few minutes)
5.
Click below on save all information and a file by the name of dxdiag.txt will
be created.
You should save this to your desktop. While using our web form, you will be prompted to
attach the file to your request. This will allow us to provide the best posible support
regarding your system.
We also offer live technical support (excludes TPS 22 Standard and TPS 22 Esentials
versions) at (310) 719-2881. Our technicians are available Monday through Friday 9am to
5pm PST. Please keep in mind that this is NOT A TOLL FREE CALL. This service is
subject to change without prior notice at any time.
Unfortunately, we do not provide game play or “how-to” support on the products we
distribute. Our tech support is limited to ensure that your software runs on your computer
as designed. Many of our products have built-in readme files or help files that accompany
them. There is often helpful information and tips in these files. Beyond that, the Internet is
a great resource for information.
CUSTOMER SERVICE
If you purchased this product directly from Broderbund via www.broderbund.com, phone,
or mail order, please visit http://support.broderbund.com or call (319) 247-3325*, Monday
– Friday 8am to 5pm CST, excluding holidays.
If you purchased this product at a retail store, Encore’s customer service
repressentatives can be reached at (310) 719-2894* Monday-Friday 9am to 5pm PST.
Customer service has the ability to handle refunds, exchanges, and replacements. You
may also use our web form and send your request via the Internet by visiting
http://support.encoreusa.com, typing the product name in the search field, and clicking to
submit an Online Customer Service Request.
*This is a toll call. Customer Service does not provide product functionality or
technical support.
If you are unable to resolve your issue using the knowledgebase articles, you may
contact us through email via our web form support section by clicking on the link to
submit an Online Support Request.
14
15
LICENSE AGREEMENT
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR AN
ENTITY) AND RIVERDEEP INC., A LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY, AND ITS
SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES ("RIVERDEEP"). THIS AGREEMENT IS GOVERNED
BY THE INTERNAL SUBSTANTIVE LAWS OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA (AND NOT
BY THE 1980 UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE
INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS, AS AMENDED). BY INSTALLING OR USING THE
SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, REMOVE THE
PRODUCT FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL COPIES OF
THE PRODUCT. IF YOU ARE THE ORIGINAL INSTALLER OF THE SOFTWARE YOU
MAY PROMPTLY AFTER PURCHASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING
PRINTED MATERIALS) WITH PROOF OF PURCHASE TO THE PLACE WHERE IT
WAS PURCHASED FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID.
RIVERDEEP SOFTWARE LICENSE
GRANT OF LICENSE. This License Agreement permits you to use one copy of
RIVERDEEP software (the "Software"), which may include electronic documentation, on
a single computer/workstation. The Software is "in use" on a computer when it is loaded
into the temporary memory (i.e., RAM or Cache) or installed into permanent memory
(e.g., hard disk, CD-ROM drive, or other storage device) of that computer. This License
does not constitute a sale and does not authorize a sale of the Software or anything
created thereby. All intellectual property (including copyright, trademark and patent) in the
Software, including all animations, audio, images, maps, music, photographs, video, and
text incorporated into the Software, are owned by RIVERDEEP and its affiliates,
suppliers and licensors, and are protected by United States laws and international treaty
provisions. RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors retain all rights not
expressly granted herein. You must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material,
except that you may make one copy of the Software solely for backup or archival
purposes. You may transfer your rights under this Agreement on a permanent basis
provided you transfer the license granted by this Agreement, and the Software and all
asociated printed materials, and you retain no copies, and the recipient agrees to all of
the terms of this Agreement.
16
•
You may not use the software on or over a network or any other transfer
device (including the Internet) except in a manner using the network and
online functions included in the Software, if any. Use of the Software on more
than one computer constitutes copyright infringement and may be punishable
by civil fines, criminal penalties, or both.
•
You may not rent or lease the Software, but schools and libraries may lend the
Software to third parties provided the Software is in CD/DVD format and each end
user is given a copy of this License Agreement which will govern the use of such
Software.
•
You may not modify, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, or disasemble the
Software, except to the extent that this restriction is expressly prohibited by
applicable law.
•
You may not remove any proprietary notices or labels in the Software.
•
You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software or distribute
printed copies of any user documentation provided in electronic format.
•
You may not publicly perform or publicly display the Software.
The restrictions contained herein apply equally to hybrid CD/DVD-ROMs which may
contain multiple versions of the Software for use on different operating systems.
Regardless of the type of media you receive, you may use only the portion appropriate
for your single-user computer/workstation. In the event you fail to comply with any of the
terms or conditions of this license, your rights to use the Software will end, you shall stop
using the Software, remove the Software from your computer, and permanently erase all
copies of the Software. You may not export or re-export the Software or any underlying
information or technology except in full compliance with all United States and other
applicable laws and regulations.
LIMITED WARRANTY
If you purchased this product direct from Riverdeep via phone, website, or email
(www.broderbund.com), Riverdeep and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors warrant to
the original installer of the Software, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of
purchase, that the media on which the Software is distributed is substantially free from
defects in materials and workmanship.
ANY AND ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has
resulted from accident, abuse, neglect or misapplication. Any replacement Software will
be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Except as set forth above, the Software is sold "as-is", without any
express or implied warranties of any kind.
If you purchased this product at a retail store, excluding the internet website link(s),
Encore Software, Inc. (“Encore”) warrants, for your benefit alone, for a period of 90
days from the date of commencement of this License Agreement (referred to as
“Warranty Period”) that the Software CD-ROM in which the Software is contained is
free from defects in material and workmanship. If during the Warranty Period, a defect
in the Software appears, you may return the Software to Encore for either
replacement, or, if so elected by Encore, refund of amounts paid by you under this
License Agreement. You agree that the foregoing constitutes your sole and exclusive
remedy for breach by Encore of any warranties made under this Agreement. EXCEPT
FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE, AND THE
SOFTWARE CONTAINED THEREIN, ARE LICENSED “AS IS”, AND ENCORE
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
This product may contain hyperlinks to web sites on the World Wide Web (the “Linked
Sites”). You acknowledge and agree that (i) the Linked Sites are not under the control
of Encore; (ii) Encore is not responsible or liable for the content, advertising,
expiration, availability, changes or updates related to any Linked Sites or hyperlink
contained in a Linked Site, or any goods or services made available on such Linked
Sites; and (iii) Encore is not responsible for webcasting, software, download or any
other form of transmission or media received from any Linked Site. Linked Sites are
provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any Linked Sites does
not imply endorsement by Encore of any such Linked Sites. You acknowledge and
agree that Encore shall not be responsible or liable, either directly or indirectly, for
any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by or in connection with use of
or reliance upon any content, goods or services available on or through any such
Linked Site.
17
YOU ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL USE OF OR ACCESS TO LINKED
SITES, AND ACCESS THE SAME AT YOUR OWN RISK. ENCORE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR LINKED SITES. LINKED SITES ARE
MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
TITLE, NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION GIVEN BY ENCORE, ITS
AFFILIATES OR ITS CONTRACTORS OR THEIR RESPECTIVE EMPLOYEES
SHALL CREATE ANY WARRANTY.
REMEDIES. If you purchased this product direct from Riverdeep via phone, website, or
email (www.broderbund.com), your exclusive remedy shall be, at RIVERDEEP's sole
option, (a) the refund of the amount you paid for the Software or (b) repair or
replacement of the Software, provided that the defective Software is returned to
RIVERDEEP (at Riverdeep, Dock Door #9, 120 Hidden Lake Circle, Duncan, SC 29334.
Telephone: (319) 378-7319) along with proof of the date of purchase within ninety (90)
days from the date of purchase. If you purchased this product at a retail store, your
exclusive remedy shall be, at Encore’s sole option, (i) the refund of the amount you paid
for the Software; or (ii) repair or replacement of the Software, provided that the defective
Software is returned to Encore (at Encore Software, Inc., Attn: Customer Service, 999
N.Sepulveda Blvd., Suite 700, El Segundo, CA 90245) along with proof of the date of
purchase within ninety (90) days from the date of purchase, as such remedy is set forth
in the accompanying product manual.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES. IN NO EVENT WILL RIVERDEEP OR ITS AFFILIATES,
SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, ECONOMIC, COVER, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE,
USER DOCUMENTATION, OR RELATED TECHNICAL SUPPORT, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES OR COSTS RELATING TO THE LOS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS, GOODWILL, DATA, TIME OR COMPUTER PROGRAMS, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL
RIVERDEEP'S AND ITS AFFILIATES', SUPPLIERS' AND LICENSORS' LIABILITY
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE REGARDLESS OF THE
FORM OF THE CLAIM (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CONTRACT,
PRODUCT LIABILITY, OR TORT CLAIM). BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software and user documentation is
provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS AND LIMITED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph
(c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS
Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Riverdeep Inc., A Limited Liability
Company, 100 Pine Street, Suite 1900, San Francisco, California 94111, United States
of America.
CONDITIONS FOR USE
These are Conditions For Use of the Properties contained in the Software. If you
do not accept these conditions and you are the original installer of the Software,
you may promptly return the Software (including all printed materials) with proof
of purchase to the place it was purchased for a full refund of the amount paid or
store credit (as applicable). Riverdeep hereby reserves the right to change or
modify these Conditions For Use without notice in its sole discretion or to grant
any permisions consistent therewith in its sole discretion.
All content contained in the Software, including, but not limited to characters, designs,
text, photos, clip art, fonts, graphics, templates, sounds, videos and projects contained in
the Software (the “Properties”) are either owned by or used under license by Riverdeep
and are protected under trademark, copyright, and other applicable laws. Any and all
unauthorized use of the Properties is strictly prohibited. You may not sell any Property or
any item containing or carrying a copy of any Property.
Subject to the restrictions described below, you may make copies of the Properties for
use in home entertainment and projects, for educational purposes, in multimedia
presentations, and other similar uses. For example, subject to the restrictions described
below, you may use the Properties to create posters, stationery, greeting cards, signs,
invitations, calendars, reports, catalogs, brochures and newsletters.
All rights in derivative works created by the use of a Property shall vest exclusively in
Riverdeep or its licensors.
Each authorized use of a Property must be accompanied by the following notice: “©
<year> Riverdeep Interactive Learning Limited, and its licensors. All rights reserved.”
MISCELLANEOUS
RIVERDEEP may cancel, change, modify, discontinue, terminate or charge a fee at any
time for any reason for the online services advertised as part of this product. The links in
the Software will allow third-party sites to be accessed. These linked sites are not under
the control of RIVERDEEP, and RIVERDEEP is not responsible for the contents of any
linked site, and any such inclusion of any link does not imply endorsement by
RIVERDEEP of the site.
No change or modification of the License will be valid unless it is in writing and is
signed by RIVERDEEP. The provisions of this Agreement are severable; if any provision
is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of
any other provision. If the Software was acquired outside the United States, then local
law may apply.
18
19
YOU ARE NOT PERMITTED TO:
•
Use any images included in this product containing trademarks or logos of any
third-party in any print or electronic media of an editorial, commercial,
promotional, or corporate nature.
•
Resell or sublicense or distribute collections of the Properties including, for
example, clip art collections, photo collections or stock collections.
•
Sell any item on which any Property is copied or otherwise printed.
•
Use any of the Properties as a logo, trademark or similar designation of
your business.
•
Use any individual’s or entity’s name, likeness, and/or image in any manner which
suggests the endorsement or association of any product or service. For example,
you may use a photo of an animal in an advertisement, but you may not use the
image of a person.
•
Use any Property in or to create any immoral, obscene or scandalous works.
•
Use any Property in electronic format, including on-line use, and multimedia
applications, unless all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Properties are incorporated for viewing purposes only.
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
© 2002-2006 Riverdeep Interactive Learning Limited, and its licensors. All rights
reserved. The Print Shop and Broderbund are registered trademarks of Riverdeep
Interactive Learning Limited. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
© 1998 John McPherson/Distributed by Universal Press Syndicate. Close to Home is a
trademark of John McPherson, used under license.
Comic Characters; Copyright 1995 ARTimage, S.A., Llorenç Amer Catà, graphic author.
Portion of images © 1998 Janet Carder.
A portion of the images © Christie’s Images Ltd. A portion of the images © The
Bridgeman Art Library/Christie’s Images. A portion of the images © The Luis A. Ferre
Foundation, Ponce, Puerto Rico/Christie’s Images Ltd.
Portions of content © 2001 Corbis Images.
Digital image content © 1994-1990 Hemera Technologies Inc, a wholly-owned subsidiary
of JupiterImages Corporation <http://www.jupiterimages.com> , a wholly-owned
subsidiary of Jupitermedia Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
2. The Properties do not comprise a significant portion of the content of the
proposed use.
Some of the Clip art images contained herein were obtained from IMSI’s
MasterClips/MasterPhotos® Collection, 1895 Francisco Blvd. East, San Rafael, CA
94901-5506 USA.
3. A notice is included specifying that the Properties may not be saved or
downloaded and are only to be used for viewing purposes.
The PhotosToGo™ Images in this product are copyrighted by Index Stock
Photography Inc.
4. The Properties are embedded at no higher than a base resolution of
512x768.
Digital typeface data copyright 1993-1997 Weatherly Systems, Inc.
Portion of the fonts provided by FontBank, Inc.
DIRECTOR® COPYRIGHT © 1984-2000 Macromedia, Inc. This product contains
Shockwave™ Player and Macromedia Flash™ Player software by Macromedia, Inc.,
Copyright © 1995-2000 Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved. Made with Macromedia,
Macromedia, Shockwave, and Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Macromedia, Inc.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright © 1993 Wintertree Software Inc.
Licensed under U.S. Patent No. 4,558,302 and foreign counterparts.
Portions hereof © LEAD Technologies, Inc. 1991-2000, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
zlib software Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
This program incorporates C-INDEX.
Microsoft, Windows and the Windows logo are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Pentium is either a registered trademark or trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
Portions of content © 2005 Getty Images.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
20
21
This product may contain links to the Internet. By purchasing and using the product you
acknowledge and agree that Encore Software, Inc. is not responsible for, and will not
have any liability arising from the use of the Internet or hyperlinks to Internet sites, none
of which are under the control of Encore Software, Inc.
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IS SUBJECT TO CERTAIN RESTRICTIONS AND
LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTY UNDER THE LICENSE AGREEMENT
CONTAINED HEREIN. YOUR USE OF THIS PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR
AGREEMENT TO ITS TERMS.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Windows® 2000 SP4/XP (Home and Pro) SP13
Pentium® III 500MHz processor or faster
128MB RAM
Minimum 900MB hard disk space1 (950MB for DVD version)
(Recommended: 250MB of hard disk space free after installation.)
8x CD-ROM drive or faster (DVD-ROM drive for DVD version)
800x600 display 16-bit color
Microsoft® .NET Framework v1.1 (included on CD, DVD)
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
Macromedia® Shockwave v.10.1 or higher
Macromedia® Flash v.7 or higher
Instant Expressions requires Microsoft® Windows Messenger version 4.6 or higher or
MSN Instant Messenger version 4.7 or higher
CD Burning requires a CD-R/RW or a DVD-R/RW drive
Windows compatible sound card and speakers
Printer support: Works with most popular printers (monochrome and color) supported by
Windows., 56 Kbps modem or faster and Internet service provider account required for
Internet access.2
1 System Configuration: The amount of hard-disk space required can vary if you
already have one or more required components (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer®)
installed on your system. If needed, Internet Explorer requires an additional 50MB
hard-disk space.
May require minor adjustments to the configuration of your system and/or updates to the
hardware component drivers.
2 User is responsible for all Internet access fees and phone charges.
3 Administrator privileges are required to properly install the program on Windows 2000
and Windows XP.
GETTING STARTED
Use this section of the online Help to get you up and running on The Print Shop®
quickly and easily.
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the exciting world of print creativity. The Print Shop® makes it easy
to produce beautiful projects that can enhance your business, such as forms,
brochures, newsletters, calendars, cards, envelopes, and much more. You can
also send a greeting card project to others via e-mail or Instant Messaging.
Projects You Can Create
Every adventure into The Print Shop® — from a business card to a Web page —
is called a project. There are two ways to start a project:
•
Create a project from a QuickStart Layout. A QuickStart Layout is an already
completed project that you can choose from The Print Shop’s® extensive gallery of
projects. You only need to customize the project to fit your needs by adding your
personal information, modifying text and graphics, and adding special effects, as
you want.
•
Create a project from Scratch. You can also create a project from Scratch by first
selecting a blank project layout, and then designing and modifying it according to
your needs.
In addition, The Print Shop’s® Stationery Set Wizard allows you to quickly create
matching stationery projects, including letterhead, business cards, envelopes,
and fax cover sheets. You can also use Calendar Creator™ Express to create
customized calendars.
Note: Calendar Creator™ Express is not available in all version of The Print Shop®.
The Print Shop® includes a Help Center that contains step-by-step printable
tutorials and multimedia demonstrations on creating specific types of projects,
such as business cards and labels. See Using the Help Center Tutorials.
For a list and examples of the types of projects you can create in The Print
Shop®, see Types of Projects You Can Create.
Galleries Available to You
The Print Shop® includes three galleries that provide you with thousands of
QuickStart Layouts for projects, thousands of original art images, and
appropriate sentiments or sayings that you can use in your project.
In the interest of product improvement, information and specifications here
are subject to change without notice.
22
23
Other Resources, Tools, and Features
In addition to the many tools and features available to you to create the
ideal project, The Print Shop® also includes a number of additional tools
and resources.
The Address Book
Use the Address Book to print personalized labels, invitations to customers, or
certificates for students. Once you have created an Address Book, you can
quickly and easily draw information from it to add to a project in The Print Shop®.
For more information, see Using the Address Book.
Address Merge
Whether you’re creating a form letter, mailing labels, envelopes, or greeting
cards, The Print Shop’s® Address Merge feature makes it easy to personalize
your project for every person to whom you plan to send it. When you print your
project, The Print Shop® replaces the Address Merge placeholders in the text
with information from your Address Book. For more information, see Using
Address Merge.
The Project Gallery
The Project Gallery contains thousands of QuickStart Layouts for projects that
you can modify or print as is. The Project Gallery displays when you want to
create a project from a QuickStart Layout. You can also save your own modified
projects and open projects in the Project Gallery.
The Art Gallery
The Art Gallery contains thousands of drawings, art images, photos, borders,
animated graphics, Web art, and much more. The Art Gallery displays when
you want to add a graphic to a project. You can import your own graphics and
organize your own collection of photos and images within the Art Gallery.
The Sentiment Gallery
The Sentiment Gallery contains hundreds of sayings, phrases, and messages
that you can add to your project. Each sentiment has two parts: a phrase for
the front of your project and a phrase for the inside of your project. After you
select the appropriate sentiment, each phrase automatically appears as text
in your project.
24
Event Reminder
The Event Reminder works with your Address Book and allows you to set
reminders for important dates, such as birthdays, meetings, and other events
that you won’t want to forget.
The Print Shop® then automatically notifies you in advance. For more
information, see Using the Event Reminder.
Broderbund on the Internet
®
The Print Shop® extends its capabilities and features on Broderbund.com, a Web
site on the Internet. On Broderbund.com, you can download additional art
graphics, projects, and more.
BorderPlus
You can use BorderPlus to create a unique border around your project or around
a specific graphic in your project. For more information, see Adding a Border and
Modifying a Border.
Advanced Drawing
Advanced Drawing is an easy-to-use, full-featured drawing tool that lets you
draw your own design. You can also use it to modify The Print Shop® graphics.
See Using Advanced Drawing.
25
The Photo Workshop
The Photo Workshop allows you to repair and transform photos as well as
images that you add to your project. You can adjust the color and brightness, fix
flaws, and add a number of special effects. For more information, see Using The
Photo Workshop.
Advanced Photo Editor
Advanced Photo Editor allows you to repair and transform photos using
advanced tools and effects. For more information, see Using Advanced
Photo Editor.
Custom Paper Wizard
When you are about to print a project, such as labels or envelopes, the Custom
Paper Wizard can help. It allows you to define a new or customized type of
paper stock for your project in case it does not already exist in The Print Shop®.
For more information, see Using the Custom Paper Wizard.
USING THE PRINT SHOP®
You can begin to use The Print Shop® by starting at the Project Picker. Once you
begin to use The Print Shop®, it is a good idea to review some of the options and
commands available to you.
Starting at the Project Picker
The Project Picker is your starting point for working with The Print Shop®. The
Project Picker displays whenever you start The Print Shop®. You can also return
to it from the Design Desk by clicking the New button
toolbar.
on the Standard
From the Project Picker, you can quickly and easily create projects for business
or for the home and community. You create all projects from either a QuickStart
Layout or from Scratch. For more information, see Creating a New Project.
The Edit a Photo option allows you to open a photo from disk or from the Art
Gallery directly into The Photo Workshop for editing.
26
27
By clicking Search Projects you can directly access and choose projects from
thousands of QuickStart Layouts in the Project Gallery. You can also click Open
My Projects to access your own projects that you have created and saved in the
Project Gallery.
Some menu options display a submenu when you click them. Click a submenu
option to select it and execute its command.
The Small Business Center option displays a wealth of information for the small
business owner to browse through and utilize.
Note: The Small Business Center is not available in all versions of
The Print Shop®.
The Help Center button gives you access to step-by-step tutorials for design tips,
product features, and creating certain types of projects, such as greeting cards,
business cards, and labels. The Getting Started button gives you access to a
basic introduction to The Print Shop®. Finally, you can click Get More to access
Broderbund® on the Internet.
Using The Print Shop® Commands
After you have started creating a project, it displays on the Design Desk, ready
for you to modify or design to fit your needs.
The Design Desk is the place where you create and modify all your projects,
taking advantage of The Print Shop’s® many value-added tools and features
along the way. You can also save and print projects, or share them with others
via the Internet, all from the Design Desk.
Accessing the Galleries
•
When you are selecting a project to create or open from the Design Desk, choose
Search Projects from the File menu to display the Project Gallery in a separate
window.
•
When you are selecting a graphic for your project, click the Art & Photos button
, then choose Insert Art & Photos to display the Art Gallery in
a separate window.
•
A toolbar contains buttons that act as commands. When you click a button, an
action is performed. For example, if you click the Save button
, the Save
dialog box displays so that you can save your project. For more information
about the toolbars on the Design Desk, see Touring the Design Desk.
When you are selecting a sentiment for your project, choose Sentiment from the
Insert menu to display the Sentiment Gallery
Using Menus
Menus display on the top of a window, either on the Design Desk or in one of
the galleries.
Menus contain commands. Click a menu to display its options. Then click an
option to select a command.
28
Toolbar Buttons
Toolbars appear in program windows to give you quick-and-easy access to the
most commonly used commands. The Design Desk has three toolbars, the
Project Gallery has one toolbar, and the Art Gallery has another toolbar. The
following is the Standard toolbar found on the Design Desk.
Tip: To find out what a toolbar button does, position your pointer over the
button. A tool tip displays, defining that button’s function.
Shortcut Menus
When you right-click something (when you click the right mouse button), on the
Design Desk or in one of the galleries, a shortcut menu may display. A shortcut
menu gives you quick access to the most common commands for the item on
which you right-clicked.
29
Creating a Project in The Print Shop®
You can create projects in The Print Shop® quickly and easily.
Creating Projects in Four Steps
You can create a project in The Print Shop® quickly and easily by following these
four main steps:
1.
Create the project.
You can open an existing project from thousands of QuickStart Layout designs
and quickly customize it to fit your needs. Or create a project from Scratch. The
Print Shop® also includes a Stationery Set Wizard that lets you quickly create
stationery-related projects, and Calendar Creator™ Express that lets you quickly
create calendars.
2.
Dialog Boxes
A dialog box may display when you click a command (that is, a menu option or
toolbar button). For example, if you choose Print from the File menu, the Print
dialog box displays. Select options from the dialog box, then click OK. The OK
button may be called Print, Close, Open, or something else, depending on the
dialog box.
Design and modify the project to fit your needs.
You can add objects to your project — such as text, graphics, and animated art —
and modify them by adding color, shadowing, and other special effects. You can
easily move, resize, and rotate objects. The Print Shop® includes additional tools
and features to help you create the ideal project.
3.
Save the project.
When finished, you can save your project to the Project Gallery, where it is easily
accessible.
4.
Print the project or send it to others.
You can print business cards, invitations, posters, cards, and more. You can also
send a project to others as an e-mail attachment or via Instant Messaging.
Using the Help Center Tutorials
The Help Center contains printable tutorials and multimedia demonstrations that
help you get the most out of The Print Shop®. The tutorials guide you step-bystep through the process of creating a project from a QuickStart Layout or
creating a project from Scratch. They also help you learn how to use the newest
features of The Print Shop® and much more. To access the Help Center tutorials,
follow these steps:
1.
To access the Help Center tutorials, do one of the following:
• In the Project Picker, click the Help Center button.
• On the Design Desk, click the Help Center button
30
on the Standard toolbar.
31
The Print Shop® Help Center dialog box displays.
The Getting Started Guide
Introduction
2.
Click The Print Shop® Tutorials button
.
The Print Shop® Design Center Tutorials dialog box displays.
3.
Choose a category from the Choose a Category list box, then select a topic from
the Choose a Topic list box to display the tutorial.
Welcome to the exciting world of print creativity. The Print Shop®® makes it easy
to produce beautiful projects that can enhance your business, such as forms,
brochures, newsletters, calendars, cards, envelopes, and much more.
• The Show Text button displays an HTML tutorial.
Once you’ve created a project in The Print Shop®, you can share it with others
by printing it or by sending it to others via e-mail or Instant Messaging.
• The Show Movie button displays the multimedia tutorial.
Projects You Can Create
• The Print Tutorial button prints the HTML tutorial.
4.
When finished with a tutorial, you can select another one to view by repeating
step 3 above.
5.
Click Cancel in the Help Center to close it.
Every adventure into The Print Shop® — from a business card to a Web page —
is called a project. There are two ways to start a project:
•
Create a project from a QuickStart Layout. A QuickStart Layout project is a
completed project that you can choose from The Print Shop’s® extensive gallery of
projects. You only need to customize the project to fit your needs by adding your
personal information, modifying text and graphics, and adding special effects, as
you want.
•
Create a project from Scratch. You can also create a project from Scratch by first
selecting a blank project layout, and then designing and modifying it according to
your needs.
Note: The Show Movie button appears grayed-out if the HTML tutorial topic has
no corresponding movie.
Using the Learn-By-Doing Example
The Print Shop® includes a Learn-By-Doing Example that provides step-by-step
instructions for creating a greeting card. To access the Learn-By-Doing Example,
follow these steps.
1.
In the Project Picker, click Close (in the upper-right corner of the window) to go
directly to the Design Desk.
2.
On the Design Desk, choose Contents from the Help menu.
3.
Click the Contents tab, then double-click the Getting Help folder to open it.
4.
Double-click the Learn-By-Doing Example: Creating a Greeting Card topic to
display it.
In addition, The Print Shop’s® Stationery Set Creator allows you to quickly create
matching stationery projects, including business cards, envelopes, and fax cover
sheets. You can also use Calendar Creator™ Express to create calendars.
Note: Calendar Creator™ Express is not available in all versions of The
Print Shop®.
The Print Shop® also includes a Help Center that contains step-by-step printable
tutorials and multimedia demonstrations on creating specific types of projects,
such as a calendar, Web pages, and much more. See the Using the Help Center
Tutorials section later in this Getting Started Guide
The steps for creating that project display on the right side of the Help window.
5.
32
Follow its directions, clicking Next at the bottom to go to the next set of steps.
33
GETTING HELP
Project Types
The types of projects you can create include the following:
Banners
Menus
Booklets
Newsletters
Brochures
Newsletters, 4-Panel
Business Cards
Photo Albums
Calendars
Photo Collages
Certificates
Photo Greeting Cards
Envelopes
Photo Novelties
Fax Sheets
Postcards
Forms
Presentations
Greeting Cards, Half-fold
Quick Prints
Greeting Cards, Quarter-fold
Report Covers
Greeting Cards, Notecards
Résumés
Hand Finished Greetings
Signs
Labels
Transfers
Letterheads
Web Pages
There are many ways you can get help on using The Print Shop®.
Using Help
The Print Shop® includes help so you can get the step-by-step information
you need onscreen while you work. Here are some tips for using The Print
Shop® Help.
Accessing Help
•
To access The Print Shop® Help from the Design Desk, choose Help Contents
from the Help menu.
The Help window displays.
Viewing the Contents Page
1.
To view the Contents page of The Print Shop® Help, click the Contents tab in the
Help window, and then double-click a folder whose contents you want to view.
The contents display.
2.
Click a topic, repressented by a page icon, to see its contents.
Searching for a Topic
Do one of the following:
•
Click the Index tab in the Help window, then type a topic for which you need help
in the Type in the keyword to find box and press Enter to find topics about what
you typed.
•
Click the Search tab in the Help window, then type a topic for which you need
help in the Type the keyword to find box and press the Enter to locate all the
topics that contain the words you typed.
Using the Back Button
When you are inside of a topic, it may contain a hyperlink to another topic
for more information or for another set of step-by-step instructions you need
to follow.
• To return to the original topic, click the Back button
34
.
35
Note: You can access Help resources on the Internet. To do so, choose
Technical Support from the Help menu on the Design Desk. Make sure
that you have an Internet connection available.
Using the Help Center Tutorials
The Help Center contains printable tutorials and multimedia demonstrations that
help you get the most out of The Print Shop®. The tutorials guide you step-bystep through the process of creating a project from a QuickStart Layout or
creating a project from Scratch. They also help you learn how to use the newest
features of The Print Shop® and much more. To access the Help Center tutorials,
follow these steps:
1.
To access the Help Center tutorials, do one of the following:
Learn-By-Doing Example: Creating a Greeting Card
This Learn-By-Doing Example provides step-by-step instructions for creating a
specific type of project in The Print Shop®: a greeting card. In this Learn-ByDoing Example, you will start with a card that has already been designed for
you, complete with art and sentiments — a QuickStart Layout. You will then add
your own ideas to personalize the card.
Click Next below to go to the next set of steps in this example.
Selecting a QuickStart Card
When you first start The Print Shop®, the Project Picker displays. From
the Project Picker, you can create a project from a QuickStart Layout or
from Scratch.
• In the Project Picker, click the Help Center button.
1.
• On the Design Desk, click the Help Center button
toolbar.
on the Standard
Note: If you are on the Design Desk, click the New button
Project Picker.
The Print Shop® Help Center dialog box displays.
2.
Click The Print Shop® Tutorials button
3.
Choose a category from the Choose a Category list box, then select a topic from
the Choose a Topic list box to display the tutorial.
to display the
A list of project types display.
2.
Select Greetings from the list, choose Printed Greeting Cards, and then click
Next.
3.
Choose Half-fold with Customize a QuickStart Layout, then click Next.
.
The Print Shop® Design Center Tutorials dialog box displays.
In the Project Picker, click Create a Project to view a list of projects.
A large selection of half-fold cards displays in the Preview area.
4.
Scroll through the list and select the card called Candlelit Cupcake by clicking it.
• The Show Text button displays an HTML tutorial.
• The Show Movie button displays the multimedia tutorial.
• The Print Tutorial button prints the HTML tutorial.
4.
5.
When finished with a tutorial, you can select another one to view by repeating
step 3 above.
Click Cancel in the Help Center to close it.
Note: The Show Movie button appears grayed-out if the HTML tutorial topic has
no corresponding movie.
5.
36
Click Finish.
37
Navigating Your Card
The card that you selected has a front page, inside, and back. Currently, the
front page is displayed.
1.
To view the inside page, click the right arrow of the Page Turner
2.
Click the right arrow of the Page Turner again to view the back page.
3.
Click the left arrow of the Page Turner twice to return to the front page and leave
the card on that page.
in the status bar.
Moving a Text Box
1.
Changing the Text
With the inside of the card still displayed, click the text box to select it.
The pointer turns into a four-way arrow when it is over the text box.
To make your card better suit the person receiving it, you may want to change
the text. All text (except for headlines and tables) is contained in text boxes. With
the front of the Candlelit Cupcake card displayed, do the following:
1.
Double-click the text box that reads To a Great Co-Worker to select it.
2.
Click and drag the text insertion point across the word Co-Worker to select it. Type
Friend. The text is updated.
to view the inside of
2.
Click and drag the text box over to touch the center fold of the card.
Tip: To move a text box to a different page, select the text box, and
then click the Cut button
on the Standard toolbar. Click the
appropriate arrow button on the Page Turner to move to a different
page, and then click the Paste button
3.
Click the right arrow of the Page Turner
the card.
4.
Double-click the text box at the top of the card that reads Happy Birthday!
1.
5.
Selection handles display around the text box and the text insertion point (that is,
an I-beam) appears inside the text box, ready for you to enter or modify text.
Select the text box on the inside of the card by clicking it once. Handles display
around the text box.
2.
6.
Click once after the word Birthday to place the I-beam there.
Click and drag the middle, right handle toward the left side of the card about onethird of the way, then release the mouse button.
7.
Type a space then the word Sally.
8.
Select all of the text by positioning the I-beam in front of the word Happy, then
clicking and dragging to after the exclamation point. Release the mouse button.
9.
With the text selected, select the Engaged font from the Font Style drop-down list,
then select 60 points from the Font Size drop-down list.
Sizing a Text Box
The words, Happy Birthday Sally!, now display underneath each other. However,
the word Sally! may be partially hidden from view.
3.
Click and drag the middle, bottom handle of the text box down toward the bottom
of the card until the word Sally! displays.
The text should appear as follows:
Click the white, blank portion, of the card on the left to deselect the text box.
The text displays like this:
38
39
Note: You may want to reposition the text in the top center of the right side of the
card again by positioning the pointer inside the selected text box, and then
clicking and dragging the text box.
Adding a New Text Box
1.
Click the right arrow button on the Page Turner
of the card.
2.
Click the Text Tools button
on the Object toolbar, and then
choose Insert Text Box from the submenu. The text box displays in your project.
3.
Click the text box to select it, then click and drag it to the location you want.
4.
Double-click the text box to move the I-beam inside it, and then type the words
Love Mom.
4.
To change the spelling of a word, either click a suggested spelling or type the
correct spelling, and then click Change.
5.
To keep the same spelling of a word, click Ignore (for one instance of this spelling)
or Ignore All (for every time you used this spelling in this project).
6.
If a word is spelled correctly, but is not in The Print Shop®® dictionary, click Add.
This accepts the spelling this time and every time you use it in this project or in
any other projects.
to go to the back
Adding a Graphic to Your Card
1.
Click the right arrow button on the Page Turner
back of the card.
2.
Click the Art & Photos button
on the Object toolbar, and
then choose Insert Art & Photos from the submenu.
The Art Gallery displays. On the left side of the Art Gallery you can search for the
graphic that you are looking for.
Checking Your Spelling
Don’t forget to check the spelling in your card.
1.
Click the left arrow button on the Page Turner
front of the card.
2.
To check the spelling in your whole project, make sure that none of the text boxes
are selected. (Click anywhere off the edge of the project page.)
twice to go to the
3.
In the Art Gallery, make sure the All Art & Photos tab is selected by clicking it.
4.
In the Choose Category for Graphic list box, click the plus (+) symbol next to the
Celebrations folder to display its options, and then select Parties.
As you make your selections, thumbnail sketches of the graphics appear in the
Preview browser on the right.
Tip: To refine your selection further, you can type search words in the Enter
Search Words box, then click Go.
Tip: To check the spelling in only one text box, click that text box.
3.
once to go to the
Choose Spell Check from the Tools menu.
If you have a mispelled word, the Check Spelling dialog box displays.
Note: There are no mispelled words in this example project. The remaining steps
are for your information.
5.
6.
Type Bright Balloons in the Enter Search Words box, then click Go.
The Bright Balloons graphic is selected in the Preview browser. Click Select.
The graphic displays in your project.
Tip: You can also add your own graphics and photos to your project that you
have scanned in or gotten from another source. From the Art Gallery toolbar,
select Open from Disk from the File menu. In the Open Picture from Disk
dialog box, locate the graphic file you want, and then click Open. For more
information, see Adding Graphics.
40
41
Saving Your Card
Troubleshooting The Print Shop®
It is a good idea to save your card, in case you ever want to use it again or come
back to make some last minute changes.
If The Print Shop® does not seem to be running properly, try the following
procedures before accessing our online technical support:
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Save from the File menu.
2.
Type a name in the File name box.
3.
Select the Add to Project Gallery checkbox by clicking it.
•
This saves and stores the card in the Project Gallery under the My Projects tab.
Note: On 2000 and XP systems, double-click My Computer. Right-click
Properties, select the Tools tab, and then click Check Now in the Error
check-in group box.
Printing Your Card
1.
Make sure your printer is on and loaded with a sheet of the paper you want to use.
2.
On the Design Desk, click the Print button
3.
In the Print dialog box, make sure you see the name of your printer (for example,
“HP DeskJet”). If not, click Setup to tell The Print Shop® about your printer. Also
set the Print Quality to the highest posible resolution for your printer.
4.
Check the Double-sided checkbox in the Print dialog box, and then click Print.
in the Standard toolbar.
The first time you print a double-sided project, the Double-sided Printing Wizard
displays. If you have not yet set your double-sided print configuration and the
wizard does not appear, choose Printing from the File menu, and then select
Double-sided Printing.
5.
The Double-sided Printing Wizard asks you to print a two-paged test project. After
the two pages are printed, follow the wizard’s directions.
6.
Once you answer the questions in the wizard, click Finish. The Print Shop® is now
set up for double-sided printing. You can now print your greeting card, newsletter,
or other project.
Run Scandisk and Disk Defragmenter on the C drive (and the drive where The
Print Shop® is installed if different from drive C). To run these applications, choose
Start, Programs, Accessory, System Tools, and Scandisk. Follow the onscreen
directions. When Scandisk is completed, click the same menu options and choose
Disk Defragmenter.
•
Restart your computer. When the Windows ® logo appears, hold down the Left
Shift key until Windows fully loads. This helps prevent some memory-resident
programs from loading into Windows.
•
Press CTRL+ ALT+DEL just once to open the Close Program dialog box. Highlight
each item except Explorer and Systray, and then click End Task to close these
programs.
•
Double-click My Computer on the Windows desktop. Right-click the hard-drive
icon (usually the C drive, or the drive where Windows is installed). Click
Properties. Make sure there is at least 50 MB of free hard-drive space.
•
Check the video display. Choose Start, Settings, Control Panel, and Display. Click
the Settings tab. Check that you are using at least 16-bit high color. Resolution
needs to be at least 800 x 600.
Note: On XP systems, click Start, Control Panel, Appearance and Themes,
and Change the screen resolution.
•
After completing the above, launch The Print Shop® to see if your problem is
resolved.
Note: See Double-sided Printing for more information.
7.
Click Print in the Print dialog box again.
Your card is printed.
Congratulations! You have completed the Greeting Card Learn-By-Doing
Example.
42
43
Note: You can click Preview to view an enlarged version of the
QuickStart Layout project in a separate window.
CREATING A NEW PROJECT
There are two easy ways to start a project in The Print Shop®:
•
Personalize a QuickStart Layout. This method allows you to select from thousands
of professionally designed sample projects — such as cards, brochures, labels,
and much more — that you can use immediately as is, or that you can
personalize to suit your needs.
•
Start from Scratch. This method allows you to design your own project from
scratch, selecting a blank layout for the type of project you want to create, then
adding graphics, text, and special effects as you want.
Either way, you take advantage of The Print Shop’s® powerful tools, features, and
resources to design the project you want.
In addition, The Print Shop® includes a Stationery Set Wizard that allows you to
create matching letterhead, business cards, envelopes, and fax cover sheets, all
at once. Also, you can quickly and easily create a customized calendar with The
Print Shop’s® Calendar Creator™ Express.
Tip: For some layouts, you can click Show Matching Projects after
selecting a QuickStart Layout in order to create other types of
projects — such as envelopes, letterhead, and newsletters — that
match the current project’s layout design.
6.
Creating a Project from Scratch
You can start a project by selecting a blank layout from one of The Print Shop’s®
many project types, and then add and modify graphics and text to create the
project you want.
1.
Note: For the Quick Prints project type, The Print Shop creates a blank layout,
meaning that there is no QuickStart Layout available for Quick Prints.
Creating a QuickStart Layout Project
You can start a project by selecting from thousands of The Print Shop’s®
QuickStart Layouts, then customizing it to fit your needs.
1.
on the
Standard toolbar on the Design Desk.
2.
toolbar on the Design Desk.
2.
Select a type of project from the list box.
For a list of project types, see Types of Projects You Can Create.
3.
When the option appears, choose Customize a QuickStart Layout, and then click
Next.
4.
Select a format and other options as they are pressented to you, clicking Next
after each set of options.
Select a type of project from the list box.
For a list of project types, see Types of Projects You Can Create.
3.
When the option appears, choose Start from Scratch, and then click Next.
4.
Select the format and other options pressented, clicking Next after each set
of options.
Note: The options pressented vary according to the type of project you
In the Project Picker, click Create a Project to view a list of all projects.
Note: To display the Project Picker, click the New button
In the Project Picker, click Create a Project to view a list of project types.
Note: To display the Project Picker, click the New button in the Standard
Once you have created a project, you can save it, print it, or send it to someone
online. You can also modify its design at any time.
®
When finished, click Finish.
The QuickStart Layout project you selected displays on the Design Desk, ready
for you to customize.
have chosen from the project list.
5.
When no other Next button appears, click Finish.
A blank project displays on the Design Desk, ready for you to add objects, such
as graphics and text.
Note: The blank project page repressents your project’s work space. To
view how the project will lay out, first add objects, and then use
Print Previewing to see how it will appear.
Note: The options pressented vary according to the type of project you have
chosen from the project list.
5.
44
When QuickStart Layouts display in the Preview browser, select one by clicking it.
45
Creating an Animated Greeting
Creating Stationery Sets
The Print Shop offers a collection of ReadyMade Animated Greetings that you
can customize with your own text, and then send to friends, family, or business
asociates via Instant Messaging or e-mail. These greetings play independently of
The Print Shop® on the recipient’s computer, displaying your customized
message each time they are played.
You can use the Stationery Set Wizard to create all types of projects for a full
stationery set.
®
1.
Note: You can also choose Create Stationery Set from the File menu on the
Design Desk.
Note: Animated greetings are not available in some versions of The Print Shop®.
1.
From the Project Picker, click Greetings in the Create a Project list, select
Animated Greetings, and then click Next.
The Print Shop® Animated Greetings Gallery displays.
2.
The Create Stationery Set wizard displays.
2.
Click Next.
3.
In the Choose Your Personal Information dialog box, select a profile that contains
the information you want to use in your stationery set.
Scroll through the gallery browser until you find a greeting you like. Click the
greeting, and then click Select.
Note: If you have not filled in any profile information, you can select a profile and
fill out the form that displays here. For more information, see Adding or
Modifying Your Personal Information.
The selected Animated Greeting displays in the Animated Greetings Module.
3.
Click and drag to highlight the text in the Customize your message here area, and
then type your own personal message.
4.
Click Preview to play the Animated Greeting with your message incorporated.
Click Replay if you want to play it again.
5.
Click Choose another Greeting to open the Animated Greetings Gallery and
choose a new greeting.
6.
Select the desired Sending and Export options as follows:
• Send via Instant Messaging — Name your project and send via Instant
Messenger to anyone on your “buddy” list.
• Send via E-mail — Name your project and attach it to an e-mail message to
send to family, friends, or business asociates.
• Export As — Give your project a file name and save as an Executable File or
as a Flash file in your My Documents folder on your hard drive.
In the Project Picker, choose either Business Cards or Letterhead from the project
list, and then click Stationery Set.
4.
Click Next.
5.
In the Choose a Theme and Layout dialog box, select the types of projects you
want to create for your stationery set by selecting the appropriate checkboxes in
the Projects to Create area.
6.
In the Apply Theme and Layout area, select an option.
Note: The selected theme and layout are displayed in the Preview area. You can
select a different project type to preview from the Preview drop-down list.
7.
Click Finish.
The projects selected display on the Design Desk ready for you to
customize. If you want to view all projects at once, see Viewing More
than One Project at a Time.
• Burn to CD — This option is only available if your computer has a CD burner.
Follow the onscreen instructions for burning to CD.
46
47
Creating a Calendar
A Calendar Wizard Tutorial in Calendar Creator™ Express
You can use Calendar Creator™ to create a customized calendar.
Note: Calendar Creator™ is not available in some versions of The Print Shop .
®
•
In the Project Picker, select Calendars from the project list, and then click
Calendar Creator™ at the bottom of the right panel.
•
From the Design Desk, choose Calendar Creator™ from the Tools menu.
To give you a better idea how the process of calendar making actually works,
we’re going to walk you through our favorite startup choice, the Calendar Wizard.
Calendar Wizard is a powerful tool in Calendar Creator™ that is designed to
help you quickly create custom calendars.
To create a calendar using Calendar Wizard:
1.
Choose a layout template for your calendar. The choices range from Horizontal
Calendar to Transparent Image Calendar (and many others in between). The style
you select in the list on the left displays in the Preview area on the right.
2.
Choose a view for your calendar. Select from any of the views in the Calendar
View list box. Year, multi-week, month are some of the choices offered. When you
have made your choice, click the Next button.
Creating a Calendar Using Calendar Creator™ Express
You can use Calendar Creator™ to create a customized calendar.
•
In the Project Picker, select Calendars from the project list, then click the
Calendar Creator™ button at the bottom of the right panel.
•
From the Design Desk, choose Calendar Creator™ from the Tools menu.
Note: If you want to exit Calendar Wizard at any time, click Cancel. The window
will close and you will be at the Calendar Creator™ application window.
3.
Overview: Adding Events to Your Calendar
Now that you’ve created a calendar using one of the startup methods, you can
actually begin using it. After all, the whole purpose of a calendar is to have a
place in which to note your special events! Calendar Creator™ defines Events
as the personal information you want to include on your.
When you start Calendar Creator™, you are asked if you want to:
•
48
The Preview window only shows the font and color schemes you have selected
(i.e., your QuickStyles). The Preview does not show your chosen layout. To see an
actual repressentation of your layout and QuickStyles, click the Back button.
4.
Use a Ready-Made Calendar
•
Create a calendar using Calendar Wizard
•
Create a Basic Calendar
•
Open the last calendar file used (This option in not available the first time you
start the program.)
1.
To open an existing calendar (i.e., one you’ve already created) click Browse.
2.
Make your calendar selection and click OK to continue.
3.
To bypass the startup screen select the Don’t show again checkbox. If you later
change your mind for whatever reason, just choose Preferences from the File
menu, then click Startup Settings, and de-select Don’t show again.
4.
To create a new calendar after you’ve already been working with another (OR if
you’ve clicked Cancel in the Startup Settings dialog), choose New Calendar
Collection from the File menu and select Ready-Made Calendar, Calendar
Wizard, or Basic Calendar.
Choose a QuickStyle for your calendar. QuickStyles are font and color stylings
that you can apply to the layout template you selected in Step 1. The style you
select in the list on the left displays in the Preview area on the right. When you
find one you like, click Next.
Choose an image set. An image set is a set of images grouped by theme. These
appear in place of the place holders in your finished calendar. A sample image
from the image set you select in the list on the left displays in the Preview area on
the right. Click the Preview Another Sample button to see another image from the
selected set. When you find an image set you like, click Next.
To return to a previous step and change any of your prior selections, click Back.
5.
Importing event categories. When the Import Event Categories box displays,
select the event categories you want included in your calendar. To select more
than one category, make your first selection, then hold down the Ctrl key while
selecting any additional ones.
Be sure not to select too many categories. We suggest you not exceed 3 because
you’ll want to leave room in the calendar cells for your own events!
6.
Click Finish. Depending on the speed of your system, it may take a few moments
for the Calendar Wizard to create a new calendar with your specifications.
Note: As you work with your file remember to save frequently using the Save
toolbar button or the Save Collection option on the File menu.
49
The calendar you’ve just created with Calendar Wizard is ready to use “as is”
or it can be customized further using the features described in the Customizing
Your Calendar section. Either way, when your friends and colleagues see the
results you’ve achieved with Calendar Wizard they just might believe you resorted
to magic!
Adding Events Directly into a Calendar Cell in Calendar Creator™ Express
To add an event into a calendar cell:
1.
Click on a calendar cell to select it. Then click the cell again and a text entry box
displays. That is where you enter your event information.
Adding Events Using the Event List in Calendar Creator™ Express
2.
An event list is a file containing the events in your calendar(s). A new event list is
created with each new calendar collection. It allows you to group various types
of business and social events.
To change the appearance of the event text, use the buttons on the Format
toolbar.
3.
Events added directly into calendar cells are placed in the General category and
don’t have time settings. To enter time settings or to set additional options for the
event, double-click (or right-click) the event text and select Properties. Then make
changes in the Modify Event dialog box.
To access the event list:
•
Click (Events list button goes here) to open the event list (or select Show Event
List from the View menu).
To remove an event from the calendar without removing it from the event list:
•
De-select the Display Event check box to the left of the event description. To add
the event back to your calendar, select the check box.
To add events directly into the event list:
•
Click to select a blank line in the event list. Then click again in one of the event
information fields (such as Description) and enter your text.
Adding Events With Details in Calendar Creator™ Express
Rather than adding an event directly into a calendar cell or the event list, you
may choose to use the Add Event dialog box to add an event that contains more
extensive information. You may also choose to use the Modify Event dialog box
to add comprehensive information to any event that was entered directly into a
calendar cell or the event list.
To add an event using the Add Event dialog box:
•
Event Information fields are used to enter event related information. Each event
information field is described below:
•
Description allows you to enter brief information about the event.
•
Category allows you indicate the type of the event (meeting, birthday, etc.).
•
Priority allows you to indicate the importance of the event in relation to others.
•
Start Date allows you to indicate the date the event begins.
•
Start Time allows you to indicate the time the event begins.
•
End Time allows you to indicate the time the event ends.
•
Attributes allows you to select a note or an alarm to be asociated with the event.
•
Participants lists any address book contacts linked to the event.
Events can also be entered via the Add Event dialog box.
Note: As you work with your file remember to save frequently using (CC Save
Image goes here) or the Save Collection option on the File menu.
50
Double-click a calendar cell, or select the cell and click (Add events list button
goes here). Alternatively, from the Event menu, choose Add Event. Enter the
event information into the Add Event dialog box that displays.
To modify an event using the Modify Event dialog box:
•
Double-click an event in a calendar cell or the event list, or right-click an event
and select Properties or, select an event and choose Modify Event from the Event
menu.
•
The Add Event and Modify Event dialog boxes appear with the Event tab active.
Use this tab to add or change your event information. The following list describes
each field on the Event tab:
•
Description is used to enter as much event related detail as you wish. This
information will appear on the calendar and in abbreviated form on the event list.
The overflow information can be printed as an additional page accompanying your
calendar and/or event list.
•
Note is used to enter additional event related information. Events with notes
appear in calendar cells with flags. Click the flag and the note text displays.
•
Category allows you to indicate the category of the event. The drop-down
category list includes the categories provided with Calendar Creator™, plus any
categories you have created.
•
Priority indicates the importance of this event in relation to others on your event list.
•
The Event Effects section offers several formatting controls, which affect the
51
appearance of the event on your calendar. Events can be formatted in two ways:
as box events or as banner events. A box event (the default) is any single event in
a cell. If a repeated event is formatted as a box event, each occurrence will
appear individually in its own cell. A banner event is an event that spans two or
more cells. The extent of the span is controlled by the Repeat Rule settings. (See
the descriptions of Repeat Until, Repeat For, and Repeat Rule below.) Click
Functions to set different formats for displaying dates and birthday information.
•
•
52
The Start Time and End Time fields are used to indicate the starting and ending
times of the event. To specify start and stop times, you may first have to click to
de-select the Do not use time check box. This will make the Start Time/End Time
fields active. For all new events, the Start Time/End Time fields are initially blank.
Enter event times in the Start Time and End Time fields, use the arrows beside
the fields, or click the Clock icon and set times using your mouse. (See Displaying
Start and End Times below for details.)
The Duration field displays the difference between the starting and ending times.
You can set the times using the arrows beside the field. Or you change the
Duration field by entering numbers into the Days, Hours, or Minutes areas. If, for
example, you have an event that starts at 5:00 PM and ends at 6:00 PM, the
duration field will now automatically say: “1 hour.” If you click in the Duration field
and change the time from 1 hour to 1 hour and 30 minutes, the End time field
automatically displays the change and now reads: 6:30 PM.
•
Start Date allows you to indicate the starting date of the event. This field
automatically displays the date currently selected on your calendar (or today’s
date). Enter the starting date of your event in the Start Date field, or click the box
to the right of the field to access the Quick Date box.
•
The fields labeled Repeat Until, Repeat For, and Repeat Rule are used to specify
the dates and times of any recurring event. To use this feature, you must first
select an interval from the Repeat Rule drop-down menu to make the other two
fields active. Then select either Repeat Until and enter a date, or Repeat For and
specify a number of intervals the event is to be repeated. More detailed settings
can be entered by clicking Advanced Repeat Rule.
Displaying Start and End Times in Calendar Creator™ Express
Before the start and end times for any single event or event category can appear
on your calendar, the Show Start Time and Show End Time check boxes must
be selected for that event or category.
To display start and end times for an event category:
1.
Select Categories from the Events menu.
2.
Select a category from the list, and click Properties.
3.
Click to de-select the No Time check box, then click to select the Show Start Time
and/or Show End Time check boxes as desired.
4.
Click OK.
To display start and end times for a single event:
1.
Double-click the event to open the Modify Event dialog box.
2.
Click to de-select the No Time check box, then click to select the Show Start Time
and/or Show End Time check boxes as desired.
3.
Click OK.
Using Advanced Repeat Rules in Calendar Creator™ Express
Sometimes we need to manage events that are repeated in a complex manner.
These might be events that repeat for extended years, have certain timely
exceptions, or need to be moved for weekend occurrences. You can control the
settings for these special circumstance events with the Advanced Repeat Rule
button in the Add Event or Modify Event dialog boxes.
To set a Repeat Occurrence Rule:
1.
In the Add Event or Modify Event dialog box, click the Advanced Repeat Rule
button. The Repeats dialog box displays.
2.
Enter the Start Date (the first date the event occurs) and the Repeat Until date
(the last day the event is to occur). You may either enter the dates directly into
these fields, or click the button to the right of each field and select a date from the
Quick Date pop-up calendar.
3.
Select one of the three buttons underneath the date fields to define the Repeat
Occurrence Rule. The fields below these buttons will change according to the
option selected:
4.
Year, Month, Day displays three columns listing years, month names, and dates
(1–31). This allows you to set your event to repeat on a specified day, in one or
more specified months, during one or more specified years.
5.
Year, Month, Week, Weekday displays four columns listing years, month names,
week numbers (1–5), and day names (Monday through Sunday). This allows you
to set your event to repeat on a specified day of the week, in a specified month,
during a specified year.
53
6.
Every displays two basic fields plus others depending on what you enter in each
of these two fields, as follows:
The first field allows you to indicate the interval in which an event reoccurs. If, for
example, you entered a 2, then your event occurs every 2 days or 2 weeks
depending on what you’ve specified in the second field.
The second field offers these options:
•
Day(s) repeats the event on a daily basis. This allows you to indicate the period of
time (in days) between event occurrences.
•
Week(s) repeats the event on a weekly basis. When you select this option another
field displays which lists the days of the week. Here you can specify on which
days of the week you want your event to repeat. If, for example, your event
repeats on Monday and Wednesday of every other week, you would select
Monday and Wednesday in this list of days.
•
Month(s)(Weeks) allows you to specify which weeks of the month and which days
of the week your event should repeat. For example, this is where you can specify
that you want your event to repeat on the second Thursday of every month.
•
Month(s)(Days) allows you to specify by date when your event should repeat. For
example, this is where you can indicate that you want your event to repeat on the
15th and the 30th of every month.
•
Year(s)(Days) allows you to indicate the month of the year and the day of the
month your event should repeats. For example, this is where you can specify that
you want your event to repeat every April 12th. (It’s a good one for birthdays,
anniversaries, etc.)
•
Year(s)(Weeks) offers these three fields: Months, Weeks, Days of the week. They
allow you to set an event that repeats on a certain day(s) of a certain month(s). If,
for example, you have a meeting scheduled for the first Monday of May, June and
July only, this is how to get it on your calendar.
•
Hebrew Birth /Death dates allows you to set your event to repeat annually
according to the Jewish calendar.
In the upper right corner of the dialog box, a month calendar displays the repeat
dates according to your selected dates and repeat rules. You may use the arrow
buttons to change the month or year displayed in this calendar. Repeat dates are
displayed in green. This calendar is also used to indicate any exceptions to the
Repeat Occurrence Rule.
•
Click on a date in the calendar. The exception dates will display a red background,
and will be listed in the drop-down menu of the Exceptions field. If there are no
exceptions to the rule, this field remains set to the default value, No Exceptions.
You may use the Weekend Occurrences field to determine what happens to
recurring events when they fall on a weekend. The default setting, Do Not
Move, maintains the event on its normal schedule. Other options are: Move to
Friday, Move to Monday, Move to Closest Weekday, Delete Occurrence and
Weekends Only.
7.
Following the instructions above, set the event to repeat as needed. Then click the
OK button to save your changes.
If you entered any dates or repeat rules in the Event tab, that information will be
carried over to this dialog box.
Adding Styles to Events in Calendar Creator™ Express
Once you have defined your event, you can apply formatting styles to the event
text and enhance its appearance on your calendar. Text style is initially
determined for an event by its category. The category style, however, can be
overridden using the controls on the Event tab of the Add Event or Modify Event
dialog box. These are the dialog boxes that are accessed when you add a new
event or modify an existing event.
The text style options for events are located along the top of the Event tab and
include font selection, size, style, color and justification. These controls are
similar to those found in other Windows-based applications:
•
Font and Size (from the drop-down menus) allow you to select a font style
and size.
•
Bold, Italic and Underline applies style formatting to the text.
•
The multi-colored Palette button allows you to select a color for your text.
•
Justification is used to position text to the left, right, or center within the borders of
the text object.
•
A preview of the text formatting displays in the Description area as you make
changes.
•
The Event Effects portion of the Event tab lets you indicate whether the text
should be placed on your calendar as a box event or a banner event, and lets you
make further styling effects.
•
Add shading and color to the event display with the Shading and Shade
Color fields.
•
Control the outline the surrounds your event text on the calendar using the Border
Style and Border Color fields.
•
The Show Shadow field allows you to add a shadow effect around your event text.
Select the desired settings. When these and other settings on this tab are
complete, click OK to save changes and return to your calendar.
54
55
Attaching Notes to Events in Calendar Creator™ Express
Associating Pictures with Your Events in Calendar Creator™ Express
The Note section of the Add Event dialog box is used to attach additional
information to an event. This additional information is indicated on your event list
by a note icon that displays in the Attributes column. On your calendar, notes
appear as a red triangle icon. Moving the cursor over the icon displays the noted
information in a pop-up box.
Pictures that have been asigned to events appear next to the event description
in the calendar view, and in the icon column on the event list.
Note: Notes appear on the calendar only if the Show Notes with Events option is
selected and the Fit Event Cell Size to Description option is disabled on
the Miscellaneous tab of the Layout Object Properties box.
To asociate a picture with an event:
1.
Select the Picture tab in the Add Event or Modify Event dialog box.
2.
If the picture you want is not listed in the Pictures in this calendar field, click the
Art Gallery or Browse button to select the desired picture.
3.
Click OK to add the picture to the event.
To attach a note to an event:
1.
Click in the Note field in the Add event or Modify Event dialog box.
Setting Event Alarms in Calendar Creator™ Express
2.
Type your note in the area provided. If you like, use the formatting controls (font
style and size, bold, italicize, underline, color and justification) to add style to the
note text.
The Alarm tab of the Add Event and Modify Event dialog boxes is used to play a
sound, launch an application, or display a message indicating the occurrence of
a specific event.
3.
When you are finished, click OK to save the information.
To set an event alarm:
Applying Functions to Events in Calendar Creator™ Express
Text functions are variables that allow you to create text that changes
automatically. For instance, if you add the anniversary function to a text object
that says “Bob and Anne’s Anniversary,” and set the object to repeat every year,
Calendar Creator™ will add one year to each occurrence of the object. In this
example, “Bob and Anne’s 3rd Anniversary” will be followed the next year by
“Bob and Anne’s 4th Anniversary.”
To apply a function to an event:
1.
Click the Functions button in the Add Event or Modify Event dialog box. The
Functions dialog displays.
2.
Select a text topic in the Topic field. The Explanation field displays a description of
the selected topic as it applies to the selected function.
3.
Select a function in the Function field. This field lists the available functions that
can be applied to each topic. View the Explanation field for descriptions of each
function and topic.
4.
Click the Paste Function button to apply the function to the event.
5.
Click OK.
1.
In the Add Event dialog box (if you’re adding a new event) or the Modify Event
dialog box (if you’re working with an existing event), click the Alarm tab.
2.
By default, the alarm settings are disabled. Select the Enable Alarm check box to
enable the alarm settings.
3.
Enter the hours and minutes in the Hrs and Mins fields to indicate when the alarm
is to occur. Use these fields in conjunction with the Before Event or After Event
options to set the actual alarm time.
4.
Select one or more alarms. Three different types of alarms can be set: Sound,
Launch, and Message.
• Alarm Sound produces a noise at the time of the event. Click to select the
check box. Then use the Browse button to select the sound file to be used.
You can then test the alarm sound by clicking Test.
• Alarm Launch causes a specified program to be launched at the time of the
event. For example, if you have a scheduled meeting at 3:00 PM that requires
your having an Excel spreadsheet, the launch alarm will open Excel for you in
a timely fashion. Click to select the check box. Then use the Browse button to
select the program to be launched when the event occurs. You can then test
the alarm launch by clicking Test.
• Alarm Message displays a message of your choice at the time of the event.
Click to select the check box. Then, in the field provided, enter the text you
want to appear on your screen when the alarm goes off.
Be sure to paste the function at the appropriate place in event description. In the
example above, the text description should read: Bob and Anne’s & Anniversary.
5.
56
Click OK to save your alarm settings.
57
Adding Contacts to Events in Calendar Creator™ Express
The Contact tab allows you to asociate contacts with events. The Contact tab
obtains its information from your address book.
To add contacts to an event:
1.
In the Add Event dialog box (if you’re adding a new event) or the Modify Event
dialog box (if you’re working with an existing event), click the Contact tab.
2.
Click the Select button to open the Participant Selection dialog box.
3.
Select one or more names in the Available Contacts column. To select more than
one contact at a time, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking each name.
4.
Click the right arrow button (located between the two lists) to add contacts to the
Selected Contacts column.
5. Click OK to return to the Add Event or Modify Event dialog box.
Note: You may also click the right double-arrows button to move an entire group
Selected Contacts. Likewise, the left double-arrows button can be used to
remove an entire group from Selected Contacts. You can also use the Remove
button on the Add Event dialog box to remove selected names.
As you work with your file remember to save frequently using the Save toolbar
button or the Save Collection option on the File menu.
Note: Alarms will only sound when Calendar Creator™ is running and the
calendar file to which the alarm is attached is open.
Keep in mind that Task and Event lists share the same categories. Adding,
deleting, or hiding categories will effect both.
Rescheduling Events using Drag and Drop in Calendar Creator™ Express
A quick and easy way to reschedule non-repeating events is to use the drag and
drop feature. In order to use this feature, the new event date must be shown in
the same calendar view as the existing event date. If this is not the case, you
may change the calendar view so that both dates are shown. For example, if the
calendar currently shows the month view and you want to reschedule an event
on the 29th for one week later, you may switch to the multi-week or multi-month
view to drag and drop the event into its new time slot.
•
In the calendar view, click on an event and drag it to another cell in the same view.
Drag and drop rescheduling is best used on simple events. To reschedule
repeated events, you are better off using the Modify Event dialog box. For
example, suppose you and a friend have a standing dinner date every Tuesday
night. You would generally enter that event and using the Repeat Rules specify:
“Repeat every Tuesday.” That event will now appear on every Tuesday of every
week of your calendar. Let’s say, however, that your friend can’t make it on
Tuesday one week, and you need to switch the event to Wednesday. If you drag
that event to its new (Wednesday) time slot, it’s no longer tied to the repeat
event. It has, in fact, become an event of its own.
Instead of using Drag and Drop to reschedule do the following:
Overview: More About Working with Events in Calendar Creator™ Express
1.
Because not all events are equal, Calendar Creator™ provides lots of ways to
differentiate between them and keep them sorted in an organized fashion. You
can organize your events by category or with your event list. You can also keep
on top of events by Rescheduling using Drag and Drop, and using the Event
Report View.
2.
Click the Advanced Repeat Rule button.
3.
Using the small calendar on the right, click on a highlighted occurrence of that
event to de-select it, which means on that Tuesday, that event will not occur.
4.
Then click on the new event date to specify the new, rescheduled occurrence of
the event.
To display or hide categories in the active calendar:
1.
Select Categories from the Events menu to access the Categories dialog box.
2.
To hide a category from the active calendar, click to de-select the check box next
to that category. (This does not remove the category; it only hides it from view in
the calendar.)
3.
To display a category that is not currently showing in the active calendar, click to
select the check box next to the desired category.
4.
Click OK to save your changes.
Note: Remember that organizing events by categories allows you to quickly hide
a category when exporting or sharing files. (If, for example, you don’t want
your father-in-law to know about the surprise party that’s planned for him,
you can hide that event before posting it on the family home page!)
58
Double-click on an event to open the Modify Event dialog box.
The result is that your calendar will have a negative exception (i.e., your
regularly scheduled event will not occur) and you’ll add a positive exception (to
indicate an occurrence of an event that’s outside of the repeat rule).
You can have an event that repeats on consecutive days. For example, Sue’s
work schedule is Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday of one week. You can
choose to make this a banner event that crosses all three cells with a single
label that reads: “Sue’s Work Schedule.” Let’s say Sue can’t work Monday
through Wednesday of this week, though she is available Monday through
Wednesday of next week. You, the scheduler, cannot drag and drop the whole
banner. Instead, you should modify the event properties. To do that, double-click
the event to open the Modify Event dialog box, modify the Start Date and
Repeat Until fields as appropriate, and click OK. The banner event will appear in
the new cells.
59
Event Report Views in Calendar Creator™ Express
An Event Report is a view of events that can be customized in a variety of ways,
like the other views (month, week, day, etc.). This view allows you to show any
information asociated with an event such as titles, start/end times, dates, and
notes. Using this view, you can customize the information displayed. With this
feature you can also select specific information to print out on the Event Report.
To use the Event Report view:
•
Open the View menu and select Event Report on the Show Calendar sub-menu.
You can also select Report from the View Indicator on the Navigation toolbar.
To format your Event Report:
•
Right-click the event grid to access the Layout Object Properties dialog box.
Select the Miscellaneous tab. Now you can specify a date range for the report and
format your report with columns. You can also choose to display start/end times,
notes, or small calendars.
from chronological order to reverse chronological order).
4.
Filtering your Event List in Calendar Creator™ Express
You may use the Filter drop-down menu to filter specific categories of events,
such as Birthday, Meeting, or To Do. To filter an event list, you must first open it:
•
To create a custom category:
1.
Select Categories from the Events menu and the Categories dialog box displays.
2.
Click Add and type a category name.
3.
Click OK to close the Categories dialog box or click Properties to customize the
category features and enable an alarm, or add pictures to events you place in
this category.
To delete a category type, select it in the Categories list, then click Delete.
Sorting Your Event List in Calendar Creator™ Express
To sort the event list you must first open it:
•
1.
Click on the triangle that displays at the top left of the event list. (Next to this
triangle is a label that indicates which categories are currently displayed. The
default display is “All.”
2.
Select a category from the list that displays. The event list will display only the
events in the selected category, and the category name will appear as the label
next to the triangle.
1.
One way to sort the event list is to click on a column heading:
2.
Single click an event field heading, such as Description, Category, or Start Date,
to sort events by that field.
3.
60
Note: To filter events using criteria other than, or in addition to, Category.
The Event Filter feature helps you locate a specific event or a group of events in
your list using more than one criterion or a criterion other than Category. When
you filter events by one or more criteria, the results will be displayed in the event
list until you switch the view back to “All” or another view.
The Event Filter box can be used to filter events by:
•
Date Range
•
Text in the Description Field
•
Priority
•
Category
To filter your event list:
1.
Select Filter from the Event menu, or click the triangle in the top left corner of the
Event List and select Filter from the drop-down menu that displays. This opens the
Event Filter dialog box.
2.
Select one or more check boxes to filter your events. Enter the information that
defines your advanced filter criteria.
3.
Click OK to continue and your event list displays with the filtered results.
Select Show Event List from the Events menu.
Once you’ve opened the Event List there are two methods of sorting it:
Click the same field heading again to re-sort events in reverse order (for example,
Select Show Event List from the Events menu.
To filter the event list:
Organizing Your Events by Category in Calendar Creator™ Express
Calendar Creator™ provides you with basic event categories such as: Birthday,
Anniversary, To Do, and Meeting. But as your event list grows, you may want to
set up a few custom event categories to suit your needs. All categories help you
organize your events so you can view them in lists by category and sort them by
category as well. We provide you with the option of applying styles to your
categories so you can spot them easily on your calendar.
Another way to sort your events is by selecting Sort Events from the Events
menu. This option enables you to sort by start date, description, priority, category,
or start time. When you select one of these options, a down arrow displays at the
top of the column you are sorting. The down arrow indicates that the list is sorted
in ascending order. Clicking this arrow reverses the order of listing, i.e., puts it in
descending order.
Note: To filter by multiple priorities enter a number between 1 and 5 in the area to
the right of the Priority check box. If you enter “0” in this area, the priority
61
criterion will not be included in the filtering.
To select two criteria (such as birthdays that occur during a specific time period):
1.
In the Event Filter dialog box, select the Category check box, and select Birthday
from the category list.
2.
Select the Date Range check box and enter a range of dates (for example, June 1
-August 31).
3.
Click OK. The event list displays with the filtered results and the category name
will appear as the label next to the triangle. (For example, only summer birthdays
will be displayed in your event list.)
Importing Events from Microsoft® Outlook® in Calendar Creator™ Express
Changing Templates in Calendar Creator™ Express
When working with a calendar, you can change its layout by selecting a different
template. Applying a template to an existing calendar only affects objects
currently in the layout; this process does not add new objects to the calendar.
For example, if you have deleted the title text object, applying a template will not
replace it. Use the options on the Add menu to replace deleted objects before
applying the template.
To apply a template to a calendar:
1.
From the calendar view, select Change Calendar Template from the Layout menu.
The Apply Template dialog box displays.
2.
Select a Template Collection from the drop-down menu in the upper left. Then
select the type of Template File from the list in the lower left, and a Calendar View
from the upper right. As you select different combinations, a preview of your
calendar will be displayed. Preview as many combinations as you like.
Now you can import events from your daily calendar in Microsoft Outlook
directly into your Calendar Creator™ layout.
1.
With an open Calendar Creator™ layout, choose Import from the File menu, then
select Events from Microsoft Outlook.
3.
The events from Microsoft Outlook are automatically added to Calendar
Creator™’s Event List database and to your current calendar collection.
2.
Choose Show Event List from the Events menu to view a list of the imported
Microsoft Outlook events.
Note: This feature is best used as a one time import of your Microsoft Outlook
events. Additional events may be added directly into your Calendar
Creator™ template.
Once you’ve chosen your Template Collection and Template File, click OK.
Note: When you apply a template with pictures to a calendar that already contains
pictures, only the pictures from the previous template will be removed. Any
pictures you have placed yourself will remain in your calendar layout.
Applying QuickStyles in Calendar Creator™ Express
You can use QuickStyles to change the fonts and colors of existing objects in
your calendar.
To apply a QuickStyle:
1.
In the calendar view, select Apply QuickStyle from the Layout menu, to open the
QuickStyles dialog box.
Available in a variety of layout styles and designs, templates are pre-formatted
layouts that include artwork and text styles. You can create new calendars from
templates or apply a template to an existing calendar.
2.
Select a QuickStyle from the list of names in the box. A preview of the calendar
style is displayed in the right. Use the drop-down menu in the upper right of the
box to see how the calendar looks in different views.
QuickStyles are pre-formatted font and color schemes that can be applied to any
calendar, even one that was created using a template. The QuickStyle you select
simply replaces all existing font and color options in the active calendar. Once
you’ve applied a QuickStyle, you can further customize the objects on your
calendar to create dramatic effects. You can even create and save your own
QuickStyles.
3.
To select the QuickStyle you want, click Apply.
About Templates and QuickStyles in Calendar Creator™ Express
4.
Click Close to return to the workspace.
The QuickStyle preview is provided to repressent colors and font formatting only.
The placement of the objects on your calendar will not be affected by the
QuickStyle you apply.
Defining Your Own QuickStyles in Calendar Creator™ Express
Once you become familiar with the calendar formatting controls, and discover
some calendar styles that really work for you, you can create your own
QuickStyles so they can be used time after time.
62
63
To add a QuickStyle of your own:
1.
Format a calendar to your specifications, and make sure it’s displayed in the
active window.
2.
Select Apply QuickStyle from the Layout menu.
3.
Click the Add button in the QuickStyles dialog box and the New QuickStyle dialog
box displays.
4.
Enter the name of your new QuickStyle in the New QuickStyle Name field (for
example, “Nancy’s Style”) then click Save. The New QuickStyle dialog box closes,
and the name is added to the QuickStyle list. It remains in this list until it is
deleted.
5.
You can delete a QuickStyle at any time. Just select that item in the QuickStyles
dialog box, then click the Delete button.
Note: QuickStyles include formatting for every view in your calendar. Be sure to
format every view the way you want it before creating your QuickStyles.
About Calendar Objects in Calendar Creator™ Express
Virtually every aspect of your calendar can be customized by using the drawing
tools, adding pictures, formatting text, applying borders, selecting colors and
patterns, and more. This is especially true of objects, of which all calendars are
composed.
Each object repressents a specific area of the calendar to which formatting can
be applied. Calendar cells, the basic units of the calendar, are also considered
objects. When objects are selected, they are surrounded by dotted lines. You can
select and modify most objects already on a calendar, as well as adding objects
of your own, using the picture and text object features.
Working With Pictures and Drawing Objects in Calendar Creator™ Express
Pictures, text objects, and drawing objects (rectangles, round rectangles,
ellipses, and lines) can be placed anywhere on your calendar. This includes the
background of your calendar, within calendar cells, and elsewhere.
To access the Art Gallery:
•
•
Select an object from the Add menu. Move your mouse pointer to the calendar
area, and the cursor becomes a (+) sign. Click and drag the object in the area of
the calendar where you want it to appear, to form the drawing object you have
selected.
You can also copy and paste pictures onto your calendar from other applications
using the Windows clipboard.
Using the Art Gallery
The Art Gallery is a mini application with its own window and set of menu
commands. When you insert a picture into your calendar, the Art Gallery
automatically displays.
The Select Featured Art and Photos drop-down menu on the All Art & Photos
tab lets you select a collection of images. When you make your selection, the
images in that collection are displayed in the preview area on the right. The All
option displays all the pictures included in the product regardles of collection.
The My Art & Photos tab displays pictures you have scanned in or imported.
The Choose Category for Graphic drop-down menu lets you select a subject
category of images, such as “Animals” or “People.” Selecting a category displays
those images in the preview area on the right.
The Enter Search Words field lets you search for pictures by search word such
as “birthday” or “vacation.”
To find a picture:
1.
Type the subject in the Enter Search Words field
2.
You can narrow your search to a specific collection and/or category using the
drop-down menus. If you want to search the entire contents of the Calendar
Creator™ image library, be sure the Select Featured Art & Photos and Choose
Category for Graphic fields say All.
Calendar Creator™ includes more than 100,000 quality images. This extensive
collection can be searched and viewed using the Art Gallery.
Note: If you chose the Full Install option of Calendar Creator™, you won’t need the
disc to place art or select ready-made templates. If you chose the Typical
Install option, the Program CD (DVD) needs to be in the CD (DVD)-ROM drive
whenever you wish to browse and select art in the Art Gallery, use a ReadyMade calendar, or use the Calendar Wizard.
Select Picture from the Add menu, and the Art Gallery displays.
To add a picture using a drawing object:
Your recent searches are kept in the drop-down list next to the Enter Search Words
field. To return to a previous search, select a word from the list and click Go. Your
search results will appear in the preview area on the right.
Note: When you have finished your search, click Reset to clear the search function
and display the unfiltered contents.
3.
Select the image you want to insert it into your calendar, then click Select.
The Art Gallery closes and the image is placed in your calendar layout.
64
65
To position and resize your picture:
1.
2.
When the picture is placed in your calendar, you can click and drag it to a new
position.
To resize your picture, single click to select it, then click and drag one of the
corners until the picture is the desired size.
Note: To learn even more ways to use the Art Gallery click the button on the Art
Gallery toolbar to access the Help File.
Adding Non-Art Gallery Pictures to the Calendar
1.
Select a Picture from the Add menu to access the Art Gallery.
2.
Select a picture and click Select (or simply double-click the picture).
3.
In the calendar window, resize the picture and position it as you like.
4.
With the picture still selected, select Layer Order/Send to Back from the
Layout menu.
5.
Right-click anywhere on the calendar grid and select Properties.
6.
Set the Background Shading to None for all grid sections (Grid, Cell, Week Day,
and Small Calendars).
You can also add pictures directly into the calendar without using the Art Gallery.
You may also wish to change the font and grid line colors in the calendar grid’s
Layout Properties dialog box so they are clearly visible against the picture you’ve
selected as your background.
1.
Double-click on a calendar object (such as a background or drawing object) to
access the Layout Object Properties box.
2.
Select the Picture tab, then click Browse.
Inserting External Objects
3.
Browse your hard disk, a CD (DVD)-ROM, or a floppy disk to locate your picture.
Select the picture then click Open.
Another method of inserting pictures and other media into your calendar is
through the Add External Objects feature.
4.
Back in the Layout Object Properties box, click OK. The picture will appear on
your calendar.
To insert an external object into your calendar:
1.
Select External Object from the Add menu and the Insert Object dialog box
displays.
2.
Choose an object type from the list.
3.
Click OK then browse your hard drive, a CD (DVD)-ROM, or a floppy disk to
locate the object’s file on your computer. Select the object, click Open and the
object displays on your calendar.
Inserting a Picture into a Calendar Cell
You can insert a picture into a calendar cell by doing the following:
1.
Click to select a date cell in your calendar, then select Properties from the Edit
menu, and the Layout Object Properties dialog box will appear with Style tab
selected.
2.
Make sure the Set Properties of drop-down menu indicates Current Cell.
Formatting Pictures and Other Graphics
3.
Click the Picture tab.
4.
Formatting pictures (and drawing objects such as rectangles) is done using the
Layout Object Properties dialog box. Depending on the calendar view and the
objects selected, different formatting tabs appear in this dialog box.
5.
If you want to insert a picture from the Art Gallery, click Art Gallery then select an
image as described in Using the Art Gallery. Click Select to close the Art Gallery
and return to the Layout Object Properties dialog box. Click OK to continue. The
picture will be inserted into the cell.
6.
If you want to insert a picture not asociated with the Art Gallery, click Browse and
locate the image on your computer. Select the image, click Open, then click OK.
The picture will appear on your calendar.
To access the Layout Objects Properties:
•
Double-click a picture or click a picture to select it and then select Properties from
the Edit menu. You can also right click the object and select Properties from the
pop-up menu. The Layout Object Properties dialog box displays with the Style tab
active.
•
If you want to move the object, select the Moveable box option. Click to de-select
this option if you want to prevent the object from being moved inadvertently.
•
Click Show Shadow to place a drop shadow behind the object border.
•
The Background section lets you select the shading, color and shape of the
object’s background. The Borders section lets you select the color and style of the
inner and outer border. Experiment with different color and shading combination
to get the desired results.
Placing a Picture in the Calendar Background
You can place a picture on your calendar’s background and make the calendar
grid transparent to create a stunning full image calendar. To create that effect:
66
67
•
The Start Date and Repeat Until fields let you indicate the period of time a picture
is to remain in that location. This allows you to change pictures or objects
whenever you like. The length of time automatically entered is determined by the
calendar period. If you wish to have the picture or object remain in that position
permanently, set the Repeat Until field to a date far into the future (but less than
the year 9900), and set the Repeat Rule to every day. Click Advanced Repeat
Rules and up pops a dialog box that allows you to make more detailed settings.
(See Using Advanced Repeat Rules for more information.)
borders of the text box.
•
All Caps displays the text in all capital letters.
•
Show Shadow adds a shadow effect to the text box.
Many of these text formatting options can be applied directly from the
main toolbar.
2.
In the Background and Borders section, you may select the Shading, Color,
Shape and Border characteristics of the text box.
A text object is similar to a picture, only it contains text—a reminder or
message—instead of an image. Text objects differ from event text in that they
may be positioned anywhere on your calendar, within cells or elsewhere.
3.
Shading allows you to choose a pattern or a solid shade of the color indicated in
the Color field.
4.
Color lets you specify the color of the text object.
You can add text to your calendar using the Add Text Objects feature.
5.
Shape lets you specify the shape of the text object.
To add a text box:
Adding Text to Your Calendar in Calendar Creator™ Express
•
•
6.
Select Text from the Add menu. The cursor changes from an arrow to a cros (+).
Click and drag to define the text object area. Release the mouse button and the
Text Object Properties dialog box displays immediately.
The Border options control the object’s borders. Each object can have up to two
borders, one Inside and one Outside.
7.
Border Style is used to select the thickness and appearance of the border line.
8.
Color is used to select the line’s color.
You can also access the Text Object Properties dialog box for an existing text box
by selecting it then selecting Properties from the Edit menu.
9.
When you have adjusted the text formatting, borders, colors, and shading to your
liking, click OK.
The Text Object Properties box has four tabs: Style, Special Effects,
Shadow/Highlight, and Picture.
Formatting your Text with Style in Calendar Creator™ Express
The Style tab of the Text Objects Properties dialog box is used to enter text, and
select text style, color, and font. It’s also used to apply borders and shading, as
well as to make your text box Moveable or Unmovable.
1.
Enter your text into the white field in the upper part of the Style tab. As you type,
your text is displayed in the larger preview window below. Once you have entered
your text, you can apply a variety of styling options to it using the Style tab and
other tabs in this dialog box.
These instructions can also be used to modify the font of pre-defined text objects
such as titles and subtitles.
•
68
The Moveable check box allows you to specify whether you want to be able to
move the text object freely (check box selected) or lock it in place (check box deselected).
•
Font and Size (from the drop-down menus) allow you to select a font style and size.
•
Bold, Italic and Underline are used to apply those styles to the text.
•
The multi-colored Palette button allows you to specify a color for the text.
•
Justification is used to position your text to the left, right, or center within the
Start Date and Repeat Rules in Calendar Creator™ Express
As we explained in Formatting Pictures and Other Graphics, Start Date and
Repeat Until let you indicate the period of time a picture is to remain in its
location. This allows you to change pictures or objects whenever you like. The
length of time automatically entered is determined by the calendar period. If you
wish to have the picture or object remain in that position permanently, set the
Repeat Until field to a date far into the future (but less than the year 9900), and
set the Repeat Rule to every day. Clicking Advanced Repeat Rules brings up a
dialog box that allows you to make more detailed settings.
•
Click on the icon beside the date fields to access the Quick Date dialog box
Applying Text Functions in Calendar Creator™ Express
Text functions are variables that allow you to create text that changes
automatically. For instance, if you add the anniversary function to a text object
that says “Bob and Anne’s Anniversary,” and set the object to repeat every year,
Calendar Creator™ will add one year to each occurrence of the object. In this
example, “Bob and Anne’s 3rd Anniversary” will be followed the next year by
“Bob and Anne’s 4th Anniversary.”
To set text function options:
1.
Access the Text Object Properties dialog box by Adding Text to Your Calendar .
69
2.
On the Style tab, click the Functions button to bring up the Functions dialog box.
Adding Shadows and Highlights to Text in Calendar Creator™ Express
3.
Select the text topic from the Topic drop-down menu.
To add shadows and highlights to text:
4.
Select a function from the Functions list. This field lists the available functions that
can be applied to the specific topic.
1.
2.
Select the Shadow/Highlight tab.
As you select a topic and function, you may view a complete description of the
action in the Explanation field. Use these explanations as a guide to help you
select the function you need.
3.
Use the fields provided to add the desired shadows or highlights to the text:
4.
Style indicates the style of the shadow or highlight such as Normal, Real, or
Graduated.
5.
Depth indicates how deep you want the shadow and highlight to appear.
6.
The Direction boxes specify the angle of the shadow or highlight.
7.
Selecting the Do Not Extrude box creates a separate shadow instead of filling in
the area between the text and its shadow.
8.
The rectangle area located to the right of the Style fields is for selecting the color
of the shadow or highlight. Simply click within the field to display the color palette,
then choose your color.
9.
As you make your selections, the preview area is updated. View your changes,
and click OK when done.
5.
6.
Click the Paste Function button to apply the topic and function.
7.
Click OK.
Creating Special Text Effects in Calendar Creator™ Express
The Special Effects tab of the Text Object Properties dialog box is used to apply
visual effects to your text. For example, you can select a thick font style, and fill it
with a woven pattern or a picture.
To create special text effects:
1.
2.
Select the Special Effects tab.
3.
Use one or more of the fields provided to configure a special effect:
Adding Notes to Your Calendar in Calendar Creator™ Express
4.
Fit to Shape indicates the shape the text needs to fill.
5.
Fill with Picture adds a picture to the text.
Using the Notes feature, you may add notes to your calendar to display
important information. Similar to text boxes, notes can be added anywhere on
the calendar.
6.
Fill with Pattern adds a pattern to the text.
7.
Visual Effect adds style (such as raised, sunken, shadow, flying, or a custom
effect) to the text.
8.
Color Scheme adds patterns (such as custom, embossed, gold, steel) to the text.
9.
Auto Size automatically adjusts the text size to the text box.
10. Wrap Words automatically wraps the text to the next line when the sentence
length is too long for the text box.
To add a note:
1.
In the calendar view, select Note from the Add menu. When you do, the cursor
changes from an arrow to cros (+).
2.
Click and drag to define the area for the note object. The Note object displays on
your calendar.
3.
Enter text directly into the note area on your calendar.
4.
If desired, select or highlight the text, then change the font, size, and other text
styles directly from the format toolbar.
5.
To customize the text and other characteristics of your note, right-click on it and
select Properties, or select Properties from the Edit menu. The Layout Object
Properties dialog box displays. Click Show Shadow to place a shaded box behind
the note. Click to de-select Moveable if you want to lock the position of the note
on your calendar.
6.
You can reposition your note in the calendar by selecting the note object and
dragging it to the new position
11. Tile Picture applies a picture as a repeated pattern in the letters.
12. Text Angle slants the text at a specified angle.
13. Color used for pattern applies a color to either the shadowed area, the highlighted
area of the text, or both areas.
14. Click OK.
70
71
Adding a Mini Calendar to Your Calendar
To add or remove pages from your layout:
Mini calendars are reference calendars that can be added to a calendar view.
The availability of each mini calendar is dependent on the active calendar view.
Mini calendars are used for display only and events cannot be entered into them.
•
Click the Add button to add a calendar page. The preview window closes and a
blank calendar page displays on the screen. This gives you the ability to create
and manage multiple-page layouts.
To add a mini calendar to a calendar:
•
The Delete button removes the selected page.
1.
Select Mini Calendar from the Add menu. When you do, the cursor changes from
an arrow to a cros (+).
2.
Click and drag to define the area for the new mini calendar. When you release the
mouse button, the mini calendar displays on your calendar.
3.
You can adjust the size of the mini calendar by clicking and dragging any of its
points (the squares that appear when it is selected). You may also move the mini
calendar anywhere on your calendar by simply selecting and dragging.
4.
You can apply styles, insert a picture, or control the miscellaneous settings of the
date object by double-clicking or by selecting Properties from the Edit menu while
the Mini Calendar is selected.
Changing Layer Order in Calendar Creator™ Express
Layer orders are useful in situations where you have multiple calendars or cells
that overlap each other on the calendar screen. For example, if you have added
a new date object or placed a picture on your calendar, you may find that they
overlap each other. In such a case, you may use the Layer Order feature to
arrange the objects differently.
Four layer order options are offered: Bring to Front, One Level Forward, One
Level Back, and Send to Back. Your use of these options depends on how many
overlapping objects you have.
To apply a layer order option:
•
•
Select Week Start Day from the Calendar menu. Then select the day of the week
on which you want your calendar to begin.
All calendar views are adjusted so that the day selected is the starting day of
each week.
To display week days only on your calendar:
•
Choose Week Days Only from the Calendar menu.
The Week Days Only option is only available when you have selected a weekly
or monthly view.
Defining the View Properties in Calendar Creator™ Express
As you create your calendars, you may also define the calendar’s view
properties. This is done using the View Properties dialog box.
To access the View Properties dialog box:
•
Select View Properties from the Layout menu.
Continue to experiment with this feature until you have situated all of your objects
the way you want them.
The Facing Pictures tab of the View Properties dialog box is used to add a
facing picture to your calendar.
To view pages in a multi-page layout:
72
To change the day of the week that your calendar begins:
Select the object you want to adjust, then choose the appropriate layer order for
that object from the Layer Order sub-menu on the Layout menu.
The View Pages feature can be used to change your view to another page in a
multiple page calendar layout. It is also helpful when you want to add or remove
pages from your layout.
2.
Calendar views can be adjusted to begin on any day of the week. This is done
using the Week Start Day feature.
The General tab is displayed. This tab indicates the name of the view and its
type. It also controls your calendar’s viewing width and height. Default settings
are provided by the software. They can, however, be changed if needed.
Viewing Pages in a Multi-Page Layout in Calendar Creator™ Express
1.
Changing Your Calendar’s Start Day in Calendar Creator™ Express
Select Add/Remove Pages from the Layout menu. The Add/Remove Pages dialog
box opens, displaying the active page in the preview window.
Move between pages, if necesary, using the Next and Previous buttons located to
the right of the preview.
To add a facing picture:
•
Click the Facing Pictures tab and add the picture.
The Objects tab of the View Properties dialog box is used to control the
placement of your calendar objects, such as background, title, and pictures.
To edit the placement and other characteristics of object:
1.
Click the Objects tab and it displays.
2.
The Visible field is used to control the visibility of the selected object. For
73
example, if you want to hide the footer of a calendar, you can remove the X from
the Visible field.
3.
The X and Y fields repressent the placement coordinates of the selected object.
4.
The Width and Height fields control the size of the selected object.
5.
Make any necesary adjustments to the objects that appear on your calendar.
6.
When you are finished, click OK to save your changes.
Creating a Custom Calendar View in Calendar Creator™ Express
In addition to the preset views available in Calendar Creator™, you can create
your own custom views to reflect your needs.
To save your calendar:
•
Note: Calendar Creator™ files are stored as (*.bcc) files and can be retrieved at
any time using the standard
Windows File/Open method.
To save the current calendar as a Calendar Creator™ file with a different name
or location:
•
To create a custom view:
1.
2.
Select the Calendar Properties command from the Calendar menu. When the
Calendar Properties dialog box displays, select the Calendar Views tab. Click Add
and the View Properties dialog box displays.
In the View Properties dialog box, name your custom calendar view, select the
style your custom view is based on, set the height and width of your custom view,
and add facing pictures, if you want. Click OK to save your selections.
When the Calendar Properties dialog box reappears, you’ll see the name of your
custom view in the list of available views. You can now use the Calendar Style and
Categories tabs to set the style, name, QuickStyle, and categories asociated with
your new custom view.
An Overview of the Calendar Collection in Calendar Creator™ Express
A Calendar Collection is a single file containing the calendar(s) you have created. It
lets you create and customize different calendars while still giving you access to
your address book and event list—all in one convenient work file. You can easily
switch between calendars in your collection by using the Show Calendar option on
the Calendar menu.
New calendars can be added to your collection by selecting Add Calendar to
Collection from the Calendar menu. When the Add Calendar dialog box displays,
use it to name the new calendar, indicate the event categories to be included
and the views that apply. As you create new calendars, they will be listed in the
Show Calendar list on the Calendar menu.
Select Save Collection from the File menu. Then indicate the location where you’d
like to save the calendar file and enter a name for it, and click Save.
Select Save As from the File menu. Then indicate the location where you’d like to
save the calendar file and enter a name for it, and click Save.
Note: You might want to use this feature to create a back up copy of your file or
to save a copy to a floppy disk for portability.
The AutoSave Feature
This feature configures the program to save your file automatically at designated
intervals. It keep the document updated, without any special attention from you.
AutoSave is located in the Preferences dialog box, which can be accessed by
selecting Preferences from the File menu
Saving your Calendar in Other Forms in Calendar Creator™ Express
The Save as Other options on the File menu allow you to save your calendar in
a format that can be opened in other applications. These formats are: Bitmap,
JPEG, and HTML.
•
The Save As Other options capture the calendar image exactly as it is displayed
on screen, including the current zoom (magnification) level. If, for example, the
calendar is displayed at 50%, the resulting image will be smaller than the same
image captured while the calendar is displayed at 100%. So, if, the resulting
image is too large for your purpose, reduce the zoom level, and choose the Save
As Other option again.
The Save as Bitmap and Save as JPEG options allow you to save the image
currently on the screen as a bitmap or JPEG graphic file.
To save your calendar as a bitmap file:
1.
Open the File menu, point to Save As Other, and select Bitmap. The Save As
dialog box displays.
Saving Your Calendar File in Calendar Creator™ Express
2.
Whenever you work with your calendar, be sure to save your collection file
regularly.
If the Save in field is not pointing to the folder in which you want to save your
image, navigate to the desired folder.
3.
Enter a name for the file In the File name field.
4.
Click Save.
74
75
HTML page for each period saved. Each HTML page will contain the JPEG
image. If the capture included more than one period, then each page contains
“Next period” and/or “Previous period” links as appropriate.
You can use your new bitmap calendar as a background on your desktop so it
will always be there to remind you of upcoming events.
To use a bitmap file as desktop wallpaper:
1.
Open the Windows Start menu, point to Settings and select Control Panel.
2.
Double-click Display and the Display Properties dialog opens.
3.
Make sure the Background tab is active.
4.
In the Wallpaper section, click Browse, then find and open the .bmp image you
saved in Calendar Creator™.
5.
Click OK to save your settings.
See your Windows documentation for more about customizing your desktop’s
display settings.
To save your calendar as a JPEG file:
1.
Open the File menu, point to Save As Other, and select JPEG. The Save As
2.
If the Save in field is not pointing to the folder in which you want to save your
image, navigate to the desired folder.
3.
Enter a name for the file in the File name field.
4.
Click Save.
The new Save as HTML option saves a “snapshot” of a period (or number of
periods) of the current view as pages in HTML format. You can then post those
pages to the Internet or an intranet (provided you have access to a web server
or a service provider that allows you to create and post your own web pages).
To save your calendar as an HTML file:
1.
Open the File menu, point to Save As Other, and select HTML. The Save As
2.
In the Start date field, specify the first period of your calendar file to be captured.
You can use the Quick Date button to the right of the Start date field to select the
start date.
3.
4.
Sharing Your Calendar Creator™ Files on a Network in Calendar Creator™
Express
Calendar files can be shared with other users using the Share Events controls. A
calendar file can be placed on a server or shared drive, and any number of
users can create a link to that file. The events in the shared file then appear in
each of the users’ calendar files.
Events in the shared calendar file can only be modified by opening the calendar
file and can’t be modified from within the shared files. This allows the shared
calendar file’s information to be protected.
To share a file:
1.
Select Share Events Files from the Events menu. The Share Event dialog box
displays showing any previously shared files.
2.
To share a new file, click Add. The standard Windows Open dialog box displays.
Use this box to locate your file, then click OPEN to share the file.
3.
Click OK to return to your calendar.
Shared files can be set to update automatically using the Preference dialog box.
To access this box select Preferences from the File menu. Select the Update
Network Event Lists field to update the files automatically. Use the Every X
minutes field to indicate how often the files should be updated.
You can manually update shared files by selecting Update Shared Events from
the Events menu.
While working with shared files that contain pictures is equally simple, the actual
picture file is not saved with the calendar. Instead, the link to that picture file is
saved. As long as the picture file remains in that location, you can access it
when you open the Event List or calendar file. If the picture file has been moved,
a warning message displays when you open the calendar file.
To remove a link to a file:
In the Periods field, specify the number of periods to be included in the capture.
(Example: In a monthly calendar view, 4 periods equal 4 months.)
1.
Select Share Events from the Events menu. The Share Event dialog box displays
showing the currently shared files.
In the Save in field, specify the location where the files should be saved.
2.
Select the file you want to remove and click the Delete button in the Shared
Events dialog box.
3.
Click OK to return to your calendar.
Use the Browse button to navigate to the desired folder.
5.
Click OK to continue.
After you click OK, Calendar Creator™ performs these two functions: it captures
and saves each specified period as a separate JPEG image, and it creates an
76
77
Protecting Your File with a Pasword
To protect calendar files with a pasword, use the File Properties controls (which
can be accessed by selecting Collection Properties from the File menu). Two
levels of protection are available: Pasword and Pasword (read only). Pasword
gives read and write permision, and Pasword (read only) gives permision to view
the calendar file, but not to modify it.
To protect a file using a pasword:
•
Select Collection Properties under the File menu. Enter a pasword at the level of
permision you wish to control, and click OK. Re-enter the pasword when
prompted and click OK. The file is now pasword protected.
Note: It is recommended that only one person at a time be responsible for
making modifications to the event file. This ensures that every person who
shares the file receives the current modifications.
Importing and Exporting Files in Calendar Creator™ Express
If you have event or address information written in a program other than
Calendar Creator™ and you want to bring that information into Calendar
Creator™ you will need to use the Import feature. Event and address book
information in Calendar Creator™ can also be saved in a format that can be
read by other programs using the Export feature.
To import a file:
1.
Using the non-Calendar Creator™ program, save your event or address
information as a comma separated value file (*.csv).
2.
Select Import from the Calendar Creator™ File menu. Then select the type of file
you want to import.
3.
Locate your file, select it, then click OK to begin the importing process.
To export a file:
78
1.
Select Export from the File menu and select Address or Events. Depending on
which one you’ve selected, follow the steps below:
2.
If you select Address, the Export Address Book dialog displays. Specify which
folder you wish to export to and name the file, then click Save. If you select
Events, the Show Category Selection dialog displays. It has a Hide Categories
field on the left (which will initially be blank) and a Show Categories field on the
right (which lists all of your event categories). To hide a category, select it from the
“Show” list and click the single left arrow in the space between the Hide and Show
fields. The selected category will automatically disappear from the Show field and
appear in the Hide field. To remove a category from the Hide field (i.e., to include
it in an exported file) select it from the Hide field and click the single right arrow in
the space between the two fields. The selected category will automatically
disappear from the Hide field and appear in the Show field.
3.
When you are done selecting categories, click OK and the Categories dialog box
closes and the Export events dialog displays.
4.
Click Export.
5.
In the Save As dialog box specify which folder you wish to export to and name the
file, then click Save.
Importing *.csv Files from other Applications in Calendar Creator™
Express
Event lists that were created in other applications using the comma separated
value (*.csv) format can be imported by selecting Import from the File menu.
To import *.csv files into your event list:
•
Point to Import on the File menu and select Events. Choose *.csv as the file type
to be imported.
•
When you use the Import feature, the imported file merges with the open file,
creating a single event list when saved.
When the Import Fields dialog box displays use it to asign properties to each
field being imported into the event list:
1.
Select the first check box to convert any special DOS-based characters contained
in the file to be imported.
2.
Select the second check box to make the first line of the imported file as a header
or title.
3.
Click the column header, Unasigned, to asign each field in the imported file to an
event list. Then select the event list field from the drop-down list and click OK.
Opening Calendars Created in Previous Versions of Calendar Creator™ Express
Calendar Creator™ lets you open an event list created in a previous version of
Calendar Creator™. You may keep the style of each event as formatted in the
previous version, or have the format of the current event applied to all events
from the previous version.
To open an event list created in a previous version:
1.
Select Open Collection from the File menu and the Open dialog box displays.
2.
Click the down arrow to the right of Files of Type and select the file type for the
files you wish to open.
3.
Use the Look In box, to navigate to the drive and directory containing files from
your previous version of Calendar Creator™.
4.
Open the desired files and click Save As. Change the Save In location, if desired,
then click Save.
79
Creating Multiple Calendars in a Collection in Calendar Creator™ Express
• The Shared Categories button allows you to block certain categories in your
calendar file from being viewed by others who share your file over a network.
If you wish to do this, click the Shared Categories button and the Show
Category Selection dialog displays. Select any categories you wish to hide
from the Show Category field and click the left arrow (<). The selected
category will now appear in the Hide Category field
Each Calendar Creator™ file is a collection of calendars. Each calendar in the
collection can be tailored to display only specific event categories, but all will
share the same event list and task list.
To add a new calendar to a collection:
1.
2.
Select Add Calendar to Collection from the Calendar menu and the Add Calendar
dialog box displays with the Calendar Style tab selected.
3.
Click OK to continue.
Note: To add a graphic to the calendar from The Print Shop’s® Art
Gallery, either choose Picture from the Add menu or click Add a Picture
on the toolbar.
Enter a name for the calendar in the Calendar Name field.
Note: You can apply a QuickStyle to your new calendar, if desired, by
selecting the style from the QuickStyle list.
3.
Click the Categories tab at the top of the dialog box and the Categories tab
displays.
4.
Select the categories you want included in your new calendar.
Setting File Collection Properties in Calendar Creator™ Express
This feature allows you to asign files one or two levels of protection. It also allows
you to specify which categories to include and exclude when your file is being
shared by others. If, for example, someone opens your calendar file over a
network, and you’ve used the Shared Categories feature, they will only be able to
see the categories that you specify as “show” categories. The ones you specify as
“hide” categories will, of course, be hidden from view.
To access File Collection Properties:
1.
From the File menu select Collection Properties and the File Properties dialog box
displays.
2.
The File Properties dialog includes the following fields: Title, Author, Subject,
Keywords, Pasword, Pasword (read only), Comments, plus a Shared Categories
button.
• The Title, Author, Subject, Keywords, and Comment fields allow you to identify
your calendar file in a variety of ways. Put information in as many of the fields
as desired.
• The Pasword field enables you to protect your information so that no
unauthorized people can see it. Type in a pasword, press Enter and the
Pasword Confirmation dialog displays. Then type the same pasword into the
Confirmation field and click OK to continue.
Creating CD, DVD, and More Media Labels
You can print media labels from The Print Shop® if you have a printer that has a
media label print feature. The Print Shop® offers a collection of ReadyMade CD
(DVD), and other media labels that you can choose from and customize further.
1.
From the Project Picker, click Labels in the Create a Project list.
2.
Select CD & Media Labels in the Select Label Type list, and then select your label
type.
3.
Choose Customize a QuickStart Layout to select from several professionally
designed media labels, which you can customize later.
Note: You can also choose Start from Scratch to begin your label project using a
blank label.
4.
Click Next.
The Project Gallery displays.
5.
In Choose Project Category, click Compact Disc, DVD, or other media categories
to view labels for each category.
6.
Scroll through the gallery browser until you find a label you like. Click the label,
and then click Select.
The project displays on the Design Desk ready for you to customize.
Note: Before printing the labels, simply set up your individual printer
according to its own media label print settings.
• The Pasword (read only) field enables you to give access to others who may
wish to view your file. The read only protection will, however, prevent them
from making any changes to the file. For this level of protection, type in a
pasword, press Enter and the Pasword Confirmation dialog displays. Type the
same pasword into the Confirmation field and click OK to continue.
80
81
Using The Print Shop® Form Creator
Creating an Over-sized Project
Designed specifically for small business applications, The Print Shop® Form
Creator offers hundreds of customizable form and label templates. Use easy
editing tools to create precisely the form you need, whether it’s a simple paper
time slip or an elaborate database-enabled online job application.
If your printer can handle 8.5" x 14" (legal) or 11" x 17" paper, you can create
projects for those paper sizes.
1.
From the Project Picker, select Forms from the Create a Project list, and then click
The Print Shop® Form Creator on the bottom of the right panel.
The Print Shop Form Creator displays.
1.
Click New Project on the Object toolbar, then select Project Picker from
the submenu.
2.
Select Signs from the list of projects, choose the Start from Scratch option, then
click Next.
3.
Select a format and a paper size, then click Finish.
®
2.
Form Creator has its own help file. Choose Help Topics from the Help menu for
information on how to use this application
Types of Projects You Can Create
WORKING WITH PROJECTS
The Print Shop® allows you to create many types of projects. Click a type of
project listed below to see an example.
After you create a project, you can save it in order to modify and print it at
another time. You can then easily access, organize, and open your projects in
the Project Gallery. You can also import and export projects in the Project Gallery,
allowing you to move projects from one computer to another.
Banners
Menus
Booklets
Newsletters
Brochures
Newsletters, 4 Panel
Business Cards
Photo Albums
Calendars
Photo Collages
Certificates
Photo Greeting Cards
Envelopes
Photo Novelties
Fax Covers
Postcards
Forms
Presentations
Greeting Cards, Half-fold
Quick Prints
Greeting Cards, Creative
Touch
Report Covers
Greeting Cards, Quarter-fold
Resumes
Greeting Cards, Notecards
Signs
Invitations
Transfers
Labels
Web Pages
Letterhead
Opening a Project
You can open a project you previously created and saved so that you can modify
or print it. In The Print Shop®, you can have more than one project open at a
time. You can open a project from the Project Gallery or from the computer or
disk.
If you are not sure how to open your project, see Opening a Project from the
Project Gallery.
Opening a Project from the Project Gallery
You can open a project you previously worked on from the Project Gallery. You
can also open a QuickStart Layout project directly from the Project Gallery.
1.
If you want to open a project you previously worked on and saved, do one of the
following:
• From the Project Picker, click the Open My Projects button.
• From the Design Desk, choose Search Projects from the File menu, and
then click the My Projects tab in the Project Gallery.
The Project Gallery displays with the My Projects tab selected.
82
83
2.
If you want to open a QuickStart Layout project, do one of the following:
• From the Project Picker, click the Search Projects button , then click the All
Projects tab in the Project Gallery.
The Open Project from Disk dialog box displays.
2.
In the Open Project from Disk dialog box, locate the project file on the computer’s
hard disk or a separate disk.
Tip: To search for a particular type of project, select the appropriate
project file type from the Files of type drop-down list.
3.
then click the All Projects tab in the Project Gallery.
3.
The Project Gallery displays with the All Projects tab selected.
Opening Recent Projects
Click Reset to clear all the project search boxes.
The Print Shop® remembers the last four projects you worked on so that you can
quickly reopen one of them. The last four projects are listed near the bottom of
the File menu.
Note: This ensures that the Enter Search Words box is now blank.
4.
Select a project type from the Select Type of Project drop-down list.
The projects that match your selection display in the Preview browser.
5.
6.
•
Opening Matching Projects
If the project you want does not display in the Preview browser, it may exist on
your computer or on a disk. See Opening a Project from a Disk.
If you are using a QuickStart Layout, you can open other types of projects, such
as envelopes and letterhead that match the current project’s layout design.
These projects together give you a matching set of letterhead, business cards,
newsletters, and more.
To further narrow your search, you can also type search words in the Enter
Search Words box. For example, you can type the words Birthday Cake.
Note: For search words to exist for your own projects (not QuickStart Layout
projects), you need to have modified project properties for your project.
Note: Matching projects do not exist for all QuickStart Layout projects.
1.
• From the Project Gallery, click the View Matching Sets button
so that
only projects that have matching sets display. Search for and select the
In the Preview browser, double-click the project you want to open.
Tip: You can also click a project to select it, and then click Select in
the Project Gallery.
The project displays on the Design Desk.
project that you want, and then click the Open Matching Sets button.
Note: The Open Matching Sets button is active only when the View Matching
Sets button is “on.” If clicking Open Matching Sets does nothing, you need to
click View Matching Sets again to turn it “on,” and then select a project and
click Open Matching Sets.
Opening a Project from a Disk
• From the Design Desk, choose Open from the File menu.
• From the Project Gallery, either click the Open button
in the Project
Gallery toolbar or choose Open from Disk from the File menu.
84
• From the Design Desk with a project open, choose Open Matching Project
from the File menu to open other types of projects that match the current one.
If you are opening a QuickStart Layout project, you can also use the Advanced
Search button of the Project Gallery to help you locate the project you want.
For more information, see Searching for Projects.
1.
On the Design Desk, click the name of the project you want to reopen from the
Filemenu.
If applicable, select a category that contains the project you want to open from the
Choose Project Category list box.
The projects that contain the search words display in the Preview browser.
7.
Select the project file that you want to open from the list box, and then click Open.
The Open Matching Projects dialog box displays.
2.
Select the checkboxes for the matching QuickStart Layouts that you want to use,
and then click OK.
Matching QuickStart Layouts for all the projects you selected display on the
Design Desk.
85
Opening a Project with Missing Fonts
When you open a project, The Print Shop displays text using the appropriate
fonts. Sometimes when you open a project, a font can be missing from your
computer. This can occur, for example, if the project was created on a different
computer or if a font was deleted from your computer.
The project is imported into the My Projects tab of the Project Gallery, adding to
your list of projects.
®
If you open a project that contains missing fonts, a message displays that details
which fonts are missing and the default font that will be substituted.
1.
2.
Exporting a Project to a New File Format
You can export a project to a new file format so that you can share it with others
who don’t have The Print Shop®. You can export the project to various file
formats, such as JPG, BMP, GIF, WMF, and more, which can be viewed easily in
common graphics programs or Web browsers.
Open a project.
1.
Open a project to export.
If fonts are missing, the Missing Fonts message displays. The Fonts area lists the
fonts used in the project that are missing from your computer.
2.
On the Design Desk, choose Export As from the File menu.
3.
In the Export dialog box, select the desired options, and then click Continue.
4.
In the Save As dialog box, select the location to which you want to save the
exported file.
5.
Select a file type from the Save as Type drop-down list.
6.
Click Save.
• Click OK to open the project by substituting the named font for all missing
fonts.
• Click Cancel to stop opening the project. You may want to cancel, change the
default font setting, and then open the project again.
Importing a Project
Note: You can rename the exported file by typing a new name into
the File name box.
You can import (or bring in) a project that you or someone else has created on
another computer so that you can modify, view, or print it.
1.
• From the Design Desk, choose Search Projects from the File menu.
• From the Project Picker, click the Search Projects button.
2.
In the Project Gallery with the My Projects tab selected, choose Import from the
File menu.
3.
In the Import Projects dialog box, locate the project file on the computer’s hard
disk or separate disk that you want to import into The Print Shop®.
4.
Select the category in which you want to import the project from the Add to
Project Category drop-down list.
Note: You can create a new category for your projects. To do so, click
New. In the Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new
category, and then click OK. This new category is now selected from
the Add to Project Category drop-down list.
5.
86
The file is exported to the indicated location.
Exporting a Project to a New Location
You can export a project you created or modified either to the hard disk of your
computer or to a separate disk so that you can share it with others or copy it to
another computer. You export a project from the Project Gallery.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Search Projects from the File menu to display the
Project Gallery.
2.
In the Project Gallery, search for the project you want to export, and then select it
from the Preview browser.
3.
Choose Export from the File menu.
4.
In the Export dialog box, select the location where you want to export the selected
project.
5.
Click Save.
Note: You can rename the exported project file by typing a new name
into the File name box.
The file is exported to the indicated location. You are then returned to the
Project Gallery.
Click Import.
87
Saving a Project
After you create a project on the Design Desk, you can save it in order to modify
or print it at a later time. You can save the project so that it appears in the
Project Gallery for easy access, or simply save it on your computer disk or
another disk.
• Choose Printing from the File menu, and then select Print Setup. In the Print
Setup dialog box, choose Broderbund PDF Creator from the Name list box,
and then click OK. Click Print in the Print dialog box, and then go to Step 4.
2.
3.
1.
On the Design Desk, click the Save button
on the Standard toolbar, or choose
Save from the File menu to save the currently displayed project.
Note: If the Save menu option is grayed-out, either the project’s final changes have
already been saved or the project is a QuickStart Layout that has not yet
been customized.
In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the project in the File name box.
Note: Projects are automatically saved in the Projects folder. To save the project in
another location on your computer disk or onto a disk, select the appropriate
location from the Save in drop-down list.
3.
To easily access the project from the My Projects tab in The Print Shop’s® Project
Gallery, select the Add to Project Gallery checkbox in the Project Gallery area.
4.
• Select the appropriate category in which to place the project from the
Category drop-down list
• Click New, type a new category name in the Add User Category dialog box,
and then click OK.
5.
Click Save.
The project is saved as one of the following Project File Types.
Saving as PDF
The Print Shop® offers the ability to save projects in a PDF format, allowing your
local professional printers to open and print the project accurately without having
The Print Shop® program installed on their computers.
1.
With a finished project open on the Design Desk, do one of the following:
• Choose Save as PDF from the File menu.
Click Continue.
The Save as dialog box displays with PDF file type selected.
4.
Select a location to save your project in the Save in drop-down list.
5.
Type a name for your project in the File Name box.
6.
To save this project with a different name, choose Save As from the File menu
and continue with the following steps.
2.
Select a resolution in the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions increase
print quality, but also increase the PDF file size.
Click Save.
The project will be saved as a PDF file with your selected options.
Project File Types
When you save a project, The Print Shop® stores it in a file with a three-letter
extension that signifies the project type. For example, .NWS in the file name
NewsletterName.NWS signifies that the project is a Newsletter. The Print Shop®
uses these file extensions to categorize projects so that you can easily locate
and access them.
Organizing Your Projects
The Project Gallery contains a collection of your own projects that you have
created and saved to the Project Gallery. These will appear in the My Projects
tab in the Project Gallery.
To better organize your projects, you can create new categories, organize
projects in these new categories, and rename and delete categories on the My
Projects tab.
Note: This option is only available to projects you have saved to the Project Gallery.
See Saving a Project to the Project Gallery.
Accessing the Project Gallery
1.
• From the Project Picker, click the Search Projects button.
• Click the Finish Project button
then choose More Finish Options from the submenu. Select Save as PDF
from the Finish Project dialog box, and then click Next.
• Click the Professional Printing button
88
89
2.
• Click the All Projects tab to access thousands of projects available on The
Print Shop® CD (DVD) and online.
• Click the My Projects tab to access projects that you have saved to your
own categories.
Creating a New Category
move your project to from the Move Item to a New Category dialog box, and then
click OK.
Renaming a Category
You can rename a category of your own projects in the Project Gallery or your
own graphics in the Art Gallery.
1.
You can create a category for your own projects in the Project Gallery or your
1.
• To create a category for your own graphics, access the Art Gallery, and then
make sure the My Art & Photos tab is selected.
2.
Choose New Category from the File menu.
3.
In the Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new category, then
click OK.
The category is added to the list in alphabetical order.
Copying and Moving Projects into Categories
You can organize the projects you created into categories on the My Projects tab
of the Project Gallery.
Note: You need to have created new categories first.
1.
Access the Project Gallery.
2.
In the Project Gallery, click the My Projects tab.
3.
Search for the project you want to move or copy to another category and select it
from the Preview browser by clicking it.
4.
To copy the project to another category, press Ctrl then click and drag the
selected project to a different category in the Choose Project Category list box.
Tip: You may also use the Copy and Paste buttons on the Project
Gallery toolbar. See Copying and Pasting Projects.
5.
To move the project to another category, click and drag the project to the new
category in the Choose Project Category list box.
Tip: You may also use Cut and Paste on the Project Gallery toolbar.
See Cutting and Pasting Projects.
You can also choose Move from the File menu, select the category you want to
90
• To rename a category of your own projects, access the Project Gallery, and
then make sure the My Projects tab is selected.
• To rename a category of your own graphics, access the Art Gallery, and then
• To create a category for your own projects, access the Project Gallery, and
2.
In the Categories list box, select the category you want to rename.
3.
Choose Rename Category from the Edit menu.
Project Type
Banners
Booklets
Brochures
Business Cards
Calendars
Cards
Certificates
Envelopes
Fax Sheets
Forms
Half-fold Cards
Labels
Letterhead
Newsletters
Note Cards
Photo Albums
Photo Collages
Photo Novelties
Postcards
Presentations
Quick Prints
Report Covers
Resumes
Signs
Transfers
Web Pages
File Name Extension
BAN
BRO
BRO
BIZ
CAL
CAR
CER
ENV
FAX
SIG
HCR
LBL
LET
NWS
NOT
NWS
SIG
SIG
PCR
NWS
PHP
NWS
NWS
SIG
TSH
WEB
91
4.
Type a new name for the category, then click anywhere outside of the new
category name.
Sending Projects
The category is renamed.
After you create and save a project, you can send the project as a file
attachment using your e-mail program in order to share it with others who also
use The Print Shop®.
Deleting a Category
You can delete a category of your own projects from the Project Gallery or your
own graphics from the Art Gallery.
1.
• To delete a category of your own projects, access the Project Gallery, and
Sending a Project via Instant Messaging
You can use The Print Shop® to share any projects or self-running executables
created within the application with selected friends on your Instant Messenger
buddy list.
1.
• To delete a category of your own graphics, access the Art Gallery, and then
2.
In the Categories list box, select the category you want to delete.
3.
Choose Delete Category from the Edit menu.
then select Send via Instant Messaging from the submenu.
• Choose Send Project from the File menu, and then select Via Instant
Messaging.
A warning message displays confirming that you want to delete the selected
category.
Note: If you have projects or graphics in the category you are deleting, the Delete
Category dialog box displays with a warning that all projects or graphics within
the category will also be deleted. If you do not want to continue, click No.
Otherwise, you can select the delete project (or graphic) files from disk
checkbox to delete the projects or graphics from your computer’s hard drive.
4.
Renaming a Project
1.
2.
In the Project Gallery, click My Projects.
3.
If you have created categories for your projects, then select the category that
contains the project you want to rename from the Choose Project Category
list box.
4.
In the Preview browser, select the project you want to rename.
5.
Choose Rename Project from the Edit menu.
6.
Type a new name for the project, then press Enter.
The project is renamed. You may rename as many projects as you want following
these steps.
92
The Send via Instant Messenger dialog box displays.
Note: You will be prompted to save your project, if you have not already.
2.
Select a recipient from your “buddy” list to whom you want to send your
Broderbund project file, and then click Send.
3.
The MSN Messenger Conversation window displays and provides updates on the
progress of the file transfer.
Click Yes to continue the deletion.
The category is removed from the Categories list box.
From the Design Desk, with the finished project design open, do one of the
following:
Note: You can use most Instant Messaging services to send your project. Save the file
locally to your computer’s hard drive. Open your Instant Messaging service. Start a
conversation with a “buddy,” then use the send a file feature to attach your saved
project file.
Sharing a Project
The Print Shop® Share Project feature allows you to send your project to friends,
family, or business asociates as a file with a viewer. Your recipient can view and
print the project even if they do not have The Print Shop® installed.
Note: To use this feature, you must have a MAPI-enabled e-mail account.
Macintosh users will not be able to open or print the Share Project executable.
1.
• Choose Share Project from the File menu.
then select Share Project from the submenu.
93
The Share Project dialog box displays.
Modifying Project Properties
2.
Type a name for your project into the Enter Project Name box.
3.
Click Color, and then choose a background color from the Color Palette dialog
box.
After you create and save a project, you can modify its properties in the Project
Gallery, such as the description of the project and keywords you can use to
locate the project.
Click Preview.
Note: You cannot modify the properties for a project on the All Projects tab.
4.
1.
• You can navigate through your project using the viewer controls.
2.
• Click Best Fit to show the project as the best fit size in the viewer.
3.
If you have created categories for your projects, select the category that contains
the project you want from the Choose Project Category list box.
4.
In the Preview browser, select a project.
The Broderbund Click-N-View Project viewer displays your project.
• Click Broderbund to access the Broderbund online store.
• Click Close to close the viewer and return to the Share Project by E-mail
dialog box.
5.
Click Save As to save the project as a viewer on your computer’s hard drive.
6.
Click E-mail to send the project viewer to a friend.
• The File Information dialog box displays the file size of your project and the
transfer times.
• Click Continue.
Note: If you cannot see your project in the Preview browser, you may need to search
for your project first.
5.
Choose Properties from the View menu. The Properties dialog box displays.
6.
Type a description for the project in the Description box.
7.
Type words to use when searching for the project into the Keywords box.
8.
Your e-mail application will display with your project viewer attached.
7.
Fill in the recipient’s name, add a personal message, and then click Send.
Your Share Project viewer is now sent via e-mail to your selected recipients.
Note: In the Share Project dialog box, you also have the options to Instant Message
your project, Burn to CD, or Save As, to save the executable to your hard drive.
Sending a Project via E-mail
1.
• From the Design Desk with a project open, choose Send Project from the File
menu, and then select As E-mail Attachment.
• From the Project Gallery, click the My Projects tab. In the Preview browser,
select the project you want to send by clicking it. (You may first need to
search for the project so that it displays in the Preview browser.) Choose
Send As E-mail Attachment from the File menu.
Click OK.
The Preview browser displays the new description under the project.
• Follow the steps in the Internet Connection Wizard, and then click Finish.
Deleting a Project
You can only delete projects from the My Projects tab of the Project Gallery.
1.
2.
3.
If you have created categories for your projects, select the category that contains
the project you want to delete from the Choose Project Category list box.
4.
In the Preview browser, select the project you want to delete.
5.
Choose Delete Project from the Edit menu.
The Confirm Delete dialog box displays.
6.
To delete the file on your computer as well as from the Project Gallery, select the
Delete project file from disk checkbox.
The project is deleted.
Your default e-mail program displays with the project attached.
2.
Type the name of the recipient in the e-mail program’s To box, and then click
Send in the e-mail program.
Note: See your e-mail program’s help file for more information.
94
95
Closing a Project
1.
• Save as PDF — Choose this option to save your project as a PDF file to
send to friends, family, colleagues, or a commercial printer.
From the Design Desk, choose Close from the File menu.
• Instant Message Project — Choose this option to send your project as a
Broderbund file via Instant Messaging.
The project closes.
Note: If you have not saved your project, you will be prompted to do so.
Finishing a Project
Use the Finish Project dialog box to guide you through the many project
destination options available — such as printing it, sharing it with others, having
it professionally printed at your local copy center, and more.
1.
Click Next. Follow the onscreen instructions or choose options in the dialog boxes
that are displayed, depending on your Finish Project choice.
DESIGNING AND MODIFYING PROJECTS
From the Design Desk, with the finished project design open, click the Finish
Once you have started a new project in The Print Shop®, you can design and
modify it to fit your needs. You do this by adding, modifying, arranging, and sizing
objects, such as text and graphics, in the project. You can also save certain
objects you modify or import for future use.
Project button
on the Object toolbar, and then choose More
Finish Options from the submenu.
Using the Design Desk
The Finish Project dialog box displays.
2.
3.
Choose an option from the list box. Two or more of the following options will be
available depending on your project design type.
• Save Project — Choose this option to save the project to a local file.
• Print Project — Choose this option to print the project to a local printer.
• Professionally Print Project — Choose this option to save your project in a
format that can be printed professionally. Digital copy centers can print PDF
files with high-color, high-quality results.
• Share Project — Choose this option to publish the project as a slide show to
share with family and friends.
• E-mail Project as Attachment — Choose this option to e-mail the project to
family or friends as a Print Shop® project. Recipients of the e-mail attachment
must have The Print Shop® or another compatible Broderbund Print Creativity
product to open and view the project. This option requires an Internet
connection and an e-mail account.
The Design Desk is the place where you create and modify all your projects,
taking advantage of The Print Shop’s® many value-added tools and features
along the way. You can also save and print projects, or share them with others
via the Internet, all from the Design Desk.
Touring the Design Desk
The Design Desk contains a set of menu options along the top (File, Edit, View,
and more), toolbars along the top and left sides of the screen, and a status bar
along the bottom.
To find out what a toolbar button does, position your pointer over the button. A
tool tip appears, defining the button’s function. For every button on the toolbar,
there is a command in one of the menus that performs the same action(s). The
menus also offer additional commands.
Note: If a toolbar does not appear in the Design Desk, choose Toolbars from the View
menu, then select any toolbar that does not contain a checkbox. You can also deselect
a toolbar in this way to hide it from the Design Desk.
• Publish Project Locally — Choose this option to save the project as a Web
page that is stored on your hard drive.
• Publish Project to Web — Choose this option to save the project as a Web
page, then publish to your personal Web site. This option requires an Internet
connection and your own personal Web space.
• Share Project — Choose this option to e-mail your project as a self-running
executable to family and friends. This option requires an Internet connection
and an e-mail account.
96
Familiarize yourself with the button commands on the Design Desk toolbars, as
well as the symbols on the status bar.
97
The Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar appears at the top of the Design Desk and provides quick
access to some of the most commonly used commands in The Print Shop®,
such as printing and saving.
objects from the clipboard into any project.
Copy button
Click this button to copy the selected text or graphic to the Windows clipboard.
You can then use the Paste command or button to insert objects from the
clipboard into any project.
New button
Click this button to display the Project Picker, from where you can create a new
project from a QuickStart layout or from Scratch, and also to access the
Stationery Creator, the Calendar Creator™, and the Help Center.
Open button
Click this button to open a project from the computer disk.
Save button
Click this button to save the project on which you are working. You can save
projects to the Project Gallery, to your computer disk, or to a separate disk.
Paste button
Click this button to insert a copy of the Windows clipboard contents into your
project.
Undo button
Click this button to quickly undo the last action you took, including formatting,
editing, resizing, or almost any other type of action. To quickly undo the last
several actions, click this button more than once.
Redo button
Click this button to quickly reverse the change you made by clicking Undo.
Print button
Click this button to send your project to the printer.
Professional Printing button
Color tool
Click this button to change the color or texture of the selected object, the
background color or texture of the selected object, or the color of the selected
line.
Click this button to professionally print your project at Broderbund on the
Internet.
Tint tool
Print Preview button
Click this button to change the tint (a gradation of color) of a selected object by a
particular percentage.
Click this button to preview your project before you print it or send it to others.
Help Center button
Cut button
Click this button to remove the selected text or graphic, and copy it to the
Windows clipboard. You can then use the Paste command or button to insert
98
Click this button to open the Help Center to access easy-to-use multimedia
tutorials on using The Print Shop®, as well as The Print Shop® Help and Help
resources on the Internet.
99
Visit the Web for What’s New button
Click this button to start your Web browser and view the most up-to-date
information about The Print Shop®.
The Text Toolbar
The Text toolbar appears under the Standard toolbar on the top of the Design
Desk and contains tools for modifying the text objects in your project.
Paragraph Style drop-down list
Click the down arrow to choose another paragraph style for selected text in a
text box. Paragraph styles affect the entire paragraph of selected text.
Align Center button
Click this button to make the middle of each line of text in a selected paragraph
line up in the middle of the text box. You can place the I-beam anywhere in the
paragraph first to select it.
Align Right button
Click this button to make each line of text in a selected paragraph line up along
the right side of the text box. You can place the I-beam anywhere in the
paragraph first to select it.
Justify button
Font drop-down list
Click the down arrow to choose another font style from the long list of available
fonts. You need to select text in order to change the text’s font.
Click this button to justify the text in a selected paragraph. Justified lines of text
attempt to fill the entire width of the text box. The Print Shop® adjusts the space
between words, so that each full line of text spans the width of the text box.
Partial lines of text will not. You can place the I-beam anywhere in the paragraph
first to select it.
Font Size drop-down list
Click the down arrow to choose the size of the type, from 6 points to 72 points.
You need to select text in order to change the text’s font size.
Text Box Shape button
Click this button to apply a special shape to the selected text box.
Bold button
Click this button to make the text you type or select darker.
Bullets/Numbering button
Click this button to apply numbers or bullets to selected text.
Italic button
Click this button to italicize the text you type or select.
Spacing button
Click this button to apply character and paragraph spacing to selected text.
Underline button
Click this button to underline the text you type or select.
Align Left button
Click this button to make each line of text in a selected paragraph line up along
the left side of the text box. You can place the I-beam anywhere in the paragraph
first to select it.
100
The Object Toolbar
The Object toolbar appears at the left of the Design Desk and contains tools
either for adding objects to your project or for modifying them.
New Project
Click this button to display three options for beginning a project. Begin at the
Project Picker, choose Search Projects to open the Project Gallery or select My
Projects to display your saved projects in the Project Gallery.
101
Art & Photos
Click this button to view art options for your projects. Select Insert Art & Photos
to display the Art Gallery, where you can select from thousands of art graphics,
or import and save your own art graphics and photographs. Choose Insert
Border or Insert Frame to display a selection of each category. Click
Show/Hide Hot Shots Viewer to display or hide the Hot Shots Viewer.
Text Tools
Click this button to add a text box to your project that will contain text you type or
import, a shape that contains text, or a headline that you can create using The
Print Shop’s® Create a Headline dialog box. Other available text tools include:
Text Shapes, Stretch Text, Word Balloons, and Address Merge fields.
Effects
Click this button to add a special effect to the background panels of your project,
such as a particular backdrop, watermark, or panel color or texture. Other
available effects include Drop Shadow, Radiant Glow, and Special Effect.
Custom Graphics
Click this button to add a custom graphic to your project. You can add a
personalized graphic, initial cap, stylized number, special seal, timepiece, or
graphical signature to certificates, cards, announcements, and invitations. Insert
Table and Show Form Object are also available options in this toolbar.
Photo Tools
After selecting a graphic in your project (an art graphic or photograph), click this
button to display the options available in The Photo Workshop, where you modify
the graphic. You can crop and orient the graphic; adjust the color, brightness,
and focus of the graphic; and apply a number of other special photo and artistic
effects.
Drawing Tools
Click this button to add a shape or line to your project. You can also create a
Freehand drawing, or select Advanced Drawing from this tool’s submenu to
create your own drawing for the current project.
102
Address/Events
Click this button to edit your Address Book and set a reminder for an event, such as
a meeting or birthday.
Finish Project
Click this button when your project design is complete to select options to Save,
Print, Send, and Share your finished project and more.
Get More
Click this button to access online resources and additional features at
Broderbund on the Internet.
The Status Bar
The status bar appears at the bottom of the Design Desk and provides
additional, statistical information, and functionality for your project.
Page Turner
Click the left and right arrows of this tool to page through your project. If you are
at the last page of the project and click the right arrow button, for some project
types, an Add Pages dialog box appears, allowing you to add more pages to
your project.
Zoom
Click the Zoom In button
to magnify your view of the current project; click the
Zoom Out button
to shrink your view of the current project. You can also click
the box that contains the viewing percentage to display a menu of other viewing
options.
Multimedia Tools
Click the Background Sound tool button in the status bar to add sound to the
project. Click the Object Sound tool button to add sound to an object, so that it
plays when the object is clicked.
103
Absolute Positioning Tool
This tool displays the current position of a selected object, referenced from the
upper-left corner of the page. When you click this tool with an object selected, a
pop-up menu displays positioning options.
4.
The selected images display in the Hot Shots Viewer.
Note: To delete an image, click to select it, and then choose Delete from the
Slide Show menu.
Absolute Sizing Tool
This tool displays the overall width of the bounding box of a selected object.
When you click this tool with an object selected, a pop-up menu displays
positioning options.
Rotation Tool
You can rearrange images within the slide show by clicking and dragging to the
desired location. If the new location is beyond the five displayed slides, click and
drag the image to the scroll bar arrow to access the part of the slide show you
want, and then drop the image into position.
5.
The Print Shop® offers a special viewer right on the Design Desk in which you
can store art and photographs for current projects and can also create slide
shows and screen savers. You can drag and drop an image from the viewer to
your project, or add a newly created piece of art from your project directly into
your viewer for future use. You can create as many slide shows and image strips
as you like and then access them through the Hot Shots Viewer on the Design
Desk.
Use the Hot Shots Viewer as your design asistant, providing quick access to
your favorite images.
Creating a Screen Saver Using the Hot Shots Viewer
1.
On the Hot Shots Viewer, choose New from the Slide Show menu.
The Create New Slide Show dialog box displays.
6.
3.
The Export Screen Saver dialog box displays.
Choose a Save in location, then click Save.
9.
Click OK in the Export Finished dialog box.
10. Using the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel, Display, and then click
the Screen Saver tab to add the newly created screen saver from your saved
location.
Note: To access your saved slide shows and image strips, choose Open from the
Slide Show menu. Select the slide show you want to view from the list box,
and then click OK.
The Hot Shots Viewer saves your images as you add them.
Creating a Slide Show Using the Hot Shots Viewer
1.
Note: If the Hot Shots Viewer is not displayed, click the Art & Photos
button
Enter a name for the slide show, and then click OK.
2.
and select Show Hot Shots Viewer.
Enter a name for the slide show, and then click OK.
The Slide Show strip displays with the name you have chosen.
Choose Import from Disk from the Slide Show menu.
The Open dialog box displays.
Select options as desired, and then click Done.
8.
and select Show Hot Shots Viewer.
The slide show strip displays with the name you have chosen.
Select Save as a Screen Saver from the Choose a Slide Show format area, and
then click Next.
The Slide Show Options dialog box displays.
7.
Note: If the Hot Shots Viewer is not displayed, click the Art & Photos button
2.
Choose Finish from the Slide Show menu.
The Finish Slide Show dialog box displays.
This tool displays the percentage of rotation for a selected object. When you
click this tool with an object selected, a pop-up menu displays rotation options.
Using the Hot Shots Viewer
Use the Look In drop-down box to navigate to the location on your hard drive
where your images are stored. Ctrl+click the images you want to add to the slide
show, then click Open.
3.
Choose Import from Disk from the Slide Show menu.
The Open dialog box displays.
104
105
4.
Use the Look In drop-down box to navigate to the location on your hard drive
where your images are stored. Ctrl+click the images you want to add to the slide
show, then click Open.
The selected images display in the Hot Shots Viewer.
Note: To delete an image, click to select it, and then choose Delete from the Slide
Show menu.
You can rearrange images within the slide show by clicking and dragging to the
desired location. If the new location is beyond the five displayed slides, click and
drag the image to the scroll bar arrow to access the part of the slide show you
want, and then drop the image into position.
5.
With the Create a Self-Playing Slide Show option selected, click Next.
The Slide Show Options dialog box displays.
Note: If your computer has a CD burner, Create a Video CD and Burn to disc
options will also be available.
Be sure to use a blank CD when choosing the Create a Video CD option.
7.
You can set the following options in this dialog box:
• Time between slides
• Background sound
• Display size and color
• Transition effects
8.
Click Done when you have completed your slide show selections.
The Export PC Slide Show dialog box displays.
9.
1.
2.
Enter a name for the new slide show, and then click OK.
The image strip displays with the name you entered.
3.
Do one or all of the following to add images to the image viewer:
Choose Finish from the Slide Show menu.
The Finish Slide Show dialog box displays.
6.
Creating an Image Strip Using the Hot Shots Viewer
Another way to use the Hot Shots Viewer is to store your favorite images and
photographs right on the Design Desk. The images can be ones you use most
frequently or images you have chosen as posible additions to a current project.
Select a location in which to save your slide show or use the default save location,
then click Save.
10. Click OK in the Export Finished dialog box.
11. Choose Play Slide Show from the Play menu to view your newly created slide
show.
Note: You can attach the slide show executable to any e-mail message and
share it with family and friends.
• From the Design Desk, click the Art & Photos button
on the
Object toolbar, and then choose Insert Art & Photos from the submenu.
The Art Gallery displays.
You can add images from the All Art & Photos tab and the My Art & Photos
tab. Right-click the image you want and select Add to Hot Shots Viewer from
the pop-up menu.
Note: The image is automatically added to the viewer and the Art Gallery
remains open for you to search for and select more images.
When you have added all the images you want from the Art Gallery, click
Close.
The Design Desk displays with your images added to the Hot Shots Viewer.
• Choose Import from Disk from the Slide Show menu in the viewer, if you
want to add images from CD (DVD) or from a location on your hard drive.
• You can also add any piece of art you have created on the Design Desk to
the image strip. Right-click the art to select it, and then choose Add to Hot
Shots Viewer from the pop-up menu.
Note: Be sure to group the elements of the art image before
adding it to the viewer.
Note: To access your saved slide shows and image strips, choose Open from the
Slide Show menu. Select the slide show you want to view from the list box,
and then click OK.
Note: To access your saved slide shows and image strips, choose Open from
the Slide Show menu. Select the slide show you want to view from the list
box and click OK.
106
107
Navigating a Project on the Design Desk
Viewing Projects on the Design Desk
On the Design Desk, certain types of projects have more than one page.
For example, a card can have a front, inside, and back page; a calendar may
have 12 pages, one for each month in the year. You will need to navigate to
the appropriate page in the project before you can add or modify objects on
that page.
You can change the view of a project on the Design Desk so that it appears
larger or smaller on your screen. You can also view more than one project at
a time.
In addition, certain project types also use master pages. A master page can
contain background objects, effects, or colors that you want to have appear on
all project pages. Some projects have both a right and a left master page. You
will need to navigate to the appropriate master page before you can add or
modify objects on that page.
Changing the Project View by Percentage
•
On the Design Desk with a project open, choose Percent View from the View
menu, then select the percentage of magnification in which you want to view the
project on the screen.
The project view changes and a checkmark appears next to the option in the View
menu.
Navigating the Pages in a Project
For projects that contain pages, navigate to the appropriate page before adding
or modifying its objects.
1.
On the Design Desk, click the left arrow of the Page Turner in the lower-left corner
of the status bar to page toward the start of your project.
Each time you click the left arrow, the Design Desk displays the previous page of
your project.
2.
Click the right arrow of the Page Turner to page toward the end of your project.
Each time you click the right arrow, the Design Desk displays the next page of
your project.
Note: If you click the right arrow of the Page Turner when there are no more
pages, depending on the project type, you can add new pages.
Tip: For some projects, you can also choose Go to Page from the View menu,
type the page number in the Go to Page dialog box, and then click OK.
Navigating the Master Pages in a Project
For projects that contain master pages, navigate to the appropriate master page
before modifying it. (A master page can contain background objects, effects, or
colors that you want to have appear on all project pages.)
Fitting the Project in the Window
On the Design Desk with a project open, do one of the following:
•
Choose Fit in Window from the View menu to change the view of the project to fit
entirely in its window.
•
Choose Fit Window Width from the View menu to change the view to fit the full
width of the project in its window.
•
Choose Fit Window Height from the View menu to change the view to fit the full
height of the project in its window.
The project view changes and a checkmark appears next to the option in the View
menu.
Zooming In and Out
On the Design Desk with a project open, do one of the following:
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Go to Master Page from the View menu.
2.
If there is more than one master page, click the left arrow of the Page Turner in
the lower-left corner of the status bar to page to the left master page, or click the
right arrow of the Page Turner to move to the right master page.
•
Click the Zoom In button
preset percentage.
The appropriate master page displays.
•
Click the Zoom Out button
preset percentage.
3.
108
When you have finished designing the master pages as you would any other page
in your project, choose Return to Page from the View menu.
to increase the magnification of the project by a
to decrease the magnification of the project by a
109
Zooming to a Specific Project Area
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Zoom to Area from the View menu.
The pointer changes to a magnifying glas with a plus symbol.
2.
Click the area you want to zoom on.
The view changes to zoom in on the area you clicked.
Shortcut Menus
Any time you need to modify an object on the screen (for example, a line,
graphic, or text) position the pointer over the object, then right-click the mouse
(click the mouse’s right button) to display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus
contain tools and commands appropriate to modifying the particular object you
selected.
Note: You can then also click the Zoom In
or Zoom Out
buttons in the status bar to further control zooming.
Zooming to Selected Objects
1.
On the Design Desk with a project open, select the objects on which you want to
zoom in.
2.
Choose Zoom to Selected from the View menu.
The view changes to zoom in on the objects you selected.
Note: You can then also click the Zoom In
status bar to further control zooming.
or Zoom Out
buttons in the
Viewing More than One Project at a Time
You can work on several projects at once on the Design Desk, copying and
moving objects from one to the other. If you have more than one project open on
the Design Desk, you can use Window commands to organize them. Do one of
the following:
•
Choose Cascade from the Window menu to stack the project windows so that
you only see one project at the top and the titles of all the others.
•
Choose Tile from the Window menu, then:
• Select Tile Horizontally to arrange all projects horizontally across the Design
Desk so that you can see all projects at once.
• Select Tile Vertically to arrange all projects vertically across the Design Desk
so that you can see all projects at once.
Important Design Tips
The following is a list of helpful hints and tips to follow while designing and
modifying projects on the Design Desk.
The Undo Button
Click Undo on the Standard toolbar to “undo” the last action you took. This is
useful if something unexpected happens or if you change your mind about the
action, such as the color you selected for a graphic.
110
Grayed-out Menus and Buttons
Sometimes a button in a toolbar or a command in a menu does not seem to
work, and it appears gray in color. These commands and buttons are not
available because the object you are working on does not use them, or because
you may need to select the appropriate object first.
Tab Key
You can use the Tab key to move from one button (or active element) to another
on the screen.
Note: Shift+Tab reverses the direction that elements are activated.
Arrow Keys
When used in combination with the Tab key, you can often move more quickly
through lists in dialog boxes using the up and down arrow keys. Just press
the Tab key until the list you want is active, and then use the arrow keys to
highlight the item you want. You can also use arrow keys to move through
options in menus.
111
Enter Key
Pressing the Enter key in a dialog box has the same effect as clicking the default
button — usually OK. You can change the active button using the Tab key to
switch elements in a dialog box. When the button you want to use is active,
press Enter to click the button. In some lists, such as drop-down lists, pressing
Enter has the same effect as double-clicking the list item.
Graphic
An object that contains an art image or a photograph from The Print Shop’s® Art
Gallery or from an image you import.
Objects
An object is an element that you place in your project on the Design Desk that
you can then modify. Objects include the following.
Text Box
An object that contains text. The text can already exist or you can type it.
Headlines and sentiments are also found inside text boxes. You can modify the
size, look, and shape of the text in a text box.
Art Image
A graphic object that contains an art image from The Print Shop’s® Art Gallery or
an art image you import.
Headline
A text box object that contains a custom or ReadyMade headline from The Print
Shop’s® Headlines feature.
Photo
A graphic object that contains a photograph from The Print Shop’s® Art Gallery
or a photograph you import.
Sentiment
A text box object that contains a sentiment from The Print Shop’s® Sentiment
Gallery.
Animated Art Image
A graphic object that appears animated when you open the Web site or card that
contains it.
Table
A grid object that you can use in your project to arrange text. You can modify the
columns and rows of the grid, merge cells (where a row and column intersect),
and modify the colors to create the table you want.
112
113
Drawing
An object that contains a drawing you created using the Advanced Drawing tool
available on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Personal Graphic
An object that contains a specialized art graphic that you can personalize and
add using the Custom Graphics feature on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Shape or Line
An object that contains a shape or line that you created using the Drawing Tools
on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Initial Cap
An object that contains a stylized initial capital letter that you can add using the
Custom Graphics feature on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Frame
An object that contains a frame that you can use to surround a graphic object,
photograph, or any other object in your project.
Number
An object that contains a stylized number that you can add using the Custom
Graphics feature on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Border
An object that contains a border that can be added to your project using the
BorderPlus feature on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Seal
An object that contains an art graphic of a seal that you can add using the
114
115
General Editing
Select All
Timepiece
An object that contains an art graphic of a timepiece that you can add using the
Signature
An object that contains a specialized, graphical signature that you can add using
the Custom Graphics feature on the Design Desk of The Print Shop®.
Ctrl+A
Cut
Ctrl+X or Shift+Del
Copy
Ctrl+C or Ctrl+Ins
Paste
Ctrl+V or Shift+Ins
Open
Ctrl+O
Save
Ctrl+S
Print
Ctrl+P
Delete
Del
Undo
Ctrl+Z or Alt+Backspace
Redo
Ctrl+Y
Zoom in
Plus (+) key
Zoom out
Minus (–) key
Help
F1
Next window
Ctrl+Tab
Text Editing
To use these commands, you must have text highlighted, or have placed the Ibeam in a text box.
Move insertion point left
Left arrow
Shortcut Key Combinations
Move insertion point right
Right arrow
Shortcut key combinations are commands you can execute directly from your
keyboard without having to click a button or select a menu option. For example,
instead of clicking Print on the Standard toolbar to print your project, you can
press Ctrl+P , meaning that you hold down Ctrl and press P. Shortcut keys save
you time.
Move insertion point up
Up arrow
116
Move insertion point down
Down arrow
Move insertion point left a word
Ctrl+Left arrow
Move insertion point right a word
Ctrl+Right arrow
Move insertion point to beginning of line
Home
Move insertion point to end of line
End
Move insertion point to beginning of text
Ctrl+Home
Move insertion point to end of text
Ctrl+End
117
Moving a Selected Object
Move element 1 pixel left
2.
Left arrow
Move element 1 pixel right
Right arrow
Move element 1 pixel up
Up arrow
Move element 1 pixel down
Down arrow
Choose Insert Text Box from the submenu.
A text box displays. You can now double-click it to place the I-beam inside the text
box, ready for you to type or import text.
Adding Text into a Text Box
You add text inside a text box.
1.
Adding Objects
On the Design Desk, double-click an existing text box.
Note: If a text box does not exist, then add a text box first.
You can add all kinds of objects to your project, including text, graphics, photos,
headlines, and more. The Print Shop® allows you to import graphics and photos,
and to add special effects. Choose from thousands of art images in The Print
Shop’s® Art Gallery or from Broderbund on the Internet.
Adding Text
2.
Tip: You can also use the right- and left-arrow keys to move the I-beam through
existing text.
3.
All text in The Print Shop is contained in a text box object. To add text, you first
create the text box in your project, then type the text into it. You can also import
text into the text box from a file that comes from another program, such as a
word processor, to save time.
Click inside the text box at the location you want to type new text.
The I-beam moves to that location if there is existing text.
Type text into the text box.
The text displays in the text box. You can format the look of the text and resize
and move the text box to fit your needs. You can also add elements, such as
numbers, bullets, dates, and more to the text.
®
Adding Text within a Shape
You can insert new text directly into a variety of shapes using the Insert Text
within a Shape feature. You can also format the text and shape before you add
them to your project.
Note: The Insert Text within a Shape feature is not available in some versions of The
Print Shop®.
You can format the text to have any font (style of type), size, shape, and color
that you like. You can also add bullets, numbers, and dates to the text.
Text can also contain Address Merge fields, which are placeholders for items in
your address book, such as “First Name” and “Address,” automating the process
of creating labels, invitations, and more for a large number of people.
The Print Shop® provides creative headlines and a gallery of sentiments, which
you can easily add to your project.
Adding a Text Box
All text in The Print Shop® is contained in a text box object. You first need to
create the text box in your project, then you can type or import text into it.
1.
On the Design Desk, click the Text Tools button
toolbar.
A submenu displays.
118
on the Object
1.
toolbar.
on the Object
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Text within a Shape from the submenu.
3.
In the Create Text within a Shape dialog box, type text in the Enter Text Here
area.
4.
Choose text options, including Font, Size, Alignment, Style, and Color.
5.
Scroll to a shape and select it in the Select a Shape area.
Note: You can also select the Mirror Left to Right checkbox to flip the shapes
horizontally and select the Flip Top to Bottom checkbox to flip the shapes
vertically.
6.
Specify options for the shape by doing any of the following:
• Choose the size by specifying the shape’s Height and Width.
119
Adding a Symbol to Text
You can add symbols to text, such as the following:
• Specify the thickness of the outline in Outline Width.
• Select the color of the outline in Outline Color.
• Select the color of the interior in Fill Color.
• Drag the slider closer to Transparent for a light color effect or closer to
Opaque for a solid color effect.
Note: While previewing your shape, click
7.
to zoom in and click
to zoom out.
Click OK.
The shape displays in your project. You can resize and move the shape and the
text will wrap automatically.
1.
2.
Tip: Double-click a shape in your project to modify it.
Importing Text
You can import text into a text box from a file that comes from another program,
such as a word processor.
Note: Before you can import text, you will first need to export the text from the other
program by saving the file as either text (.TXT extension) or Rich Text Format
(.RTF). Almost all word processors offer these options for saving files (in their
Save As dialog box).
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click an existing text box.
3.
4.
Adding a Date to Text
You can add today’s date to a text box.
2.
The I-beam moves to that location if there is existing text.
4.
The text is imported into the text box at the location you selected. You can format
the look of the text and resize and move the text box to fit your needs. You can
also add elements, such as numbers, bullets, dates, and more to the text.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box to which you want to add a date.
Click inside the text box at the location where you want to place a date.
The I-beam moves to that location.
3.
Choose Insert Date from the Text menu.
Today’s date is inserted into the text.
Choose Import Text from the Text menu.
In the Open dialog box, locate the text file you want to import, select it, and then
click Open.
In the Insert Symbol dialog box, select a symbol, and then click OK.
Note: You can remove the symbol as you would any other text, by selecting it then
pressing Delete.
1.
3.
Choose Insert Symbol from the Text menu.
The symbol is inserted into the text.
2.
Tip: You can also use the right- and left-arrow keys to move the I-beam through
existing text.
Click inside the text box at the location where you want to place a symbol.
Note: If a text box does not exist, then add a text box first.
Click inside the text box at the location where you want to import the text.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box to which you want to add a symbol.
Note: You can remove the date as you would any other text, by selecting it then
pressing the Delete key .
Adding Address Merge Fields
You can add Address Merge fields to text, which inserts placeholders for
information contained in your Address Book.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box to which you want to add an
Address Merge field.
2.
Click inside the text box at the location where you want to place the Address
Merge field.
3.
120
Choose Insert Address Merge Field from the Text menu.
121
4.
In the Mail Merge Fields dialog box, select fields from the Address Book Fields list
box, then click Add.
Fields are moved to the Selected Fields list box. These are the fields that will be
placed into the text box, and then replaced with values from the Address Book
when you print.
5.
To remove a field, select it from the Selected Fields list box, and then click
Remove.
6.
Click Insert.
The Address Merge fields are inserted into the text.
Adding a Word Processing File
The Print Shop® provides the ability to import other documents, such as
documents created in Microsoft® Word. Of course, you can copy and paste text
from any word processor into a text box, but doing so with a Word document will
strip any formatting that you may have applied in Word. The most effective way
to insert a Word document in your project is to insert it as an object.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Word Processing File from the Insert menu.
The Insert word processing files dialog box displays.
2.
Select the file or files you want to insert.
3.
Select the Link checkbox if you want The Print Shop® to automatically update the
text if you edit it separately in Word.
4.
Click Open to add the object to your project.
Adding Headlines
You can format this text like any other text.
Tip: In the Mail Merge Fields dialog box, you can also click Receiver Address
to automatically insert that group of standard information into the text box.
Note: If you inserted more than one field, you will need to add spaces or punctuation
between them.
You can remove an Address Merge field by selecting it in the text box, and then
clicking Delete .
Important: Before you can print this project with the appropriate information
automatically filled in, you must select the specific people in your Address Book
from which you want The Print Shop® to draw the information. You do this from
within the Print dialog box. For more information, see Printing a Project.
Headlines are a special kind of text that you can use to create excitement in your
document. Use headlines primarily for strong, attention-getting statements.
Unlike regular text in a text box, you can change the size of a headline by simply
adjusting the size of the headline’s text box. The headline text will conform to the
new size. Using The Print Shop’s® Headline feature, you can create a
ReadyMade headline or a custom headline.
Adding a ReadyMade Headline
1.
on the Object toolbar.
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Headline from the submenu.
3.
In the Create a Headline dialog box, click the ReadyMade option button.
4.
Type the text for your headline into the Enter Headline Text Here box.
5.
Select the headline type you want from the Preview browser at the bottom of the
dialog box, and then click OK.
The headline displays in your project in a text box. You can resize and move this
text box and the headline will adjust automatically.
122
123
Adding a Custom Headline
1.
13. Click the Depth tab to select one or more of the following options:
• Select a depth effect from the Preview browser.
• Click Color to see the Color Palette dialog box, select a color, and then click
OK.
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Headline from the submenu.
3.
In the Create a Headline dialog box, click the Customize option.
4.
Type the text for your headline into the Enter Headline Text Here box.
5.
Select a font style from the Font drop-down list.
6.
Click the Bold
headline.
and Italics
buttons if you want to bold or italicize the
7.
Click one of the Justification buttons
within the text box.
to position the headline text
8.
Click the Face tab and select a color blend for the headline text.
Note: You can also click Color to display the Color Palette dialog box, select a color
or texture, and then click OK.
9.
Click the Shape tab to select one or more of the following options:
• Click Color to see the Color Palette dialog box, select a color or texture, and
then click OK. This fills the background with a color or pattern.
• Click and drag the arrow in the Depth Angle area to set the angle for the
depth effect.
14. Click the Proportion tab to select the appropriate proportion from the Preview
browser to change the relative size and position of the text in each line when your
headline contains more than one line.
15. Click OK.
The headline displays in your project in a text box. You can resize and move this
text box and the headline will adjust automatically.
Adding a Sentiment
that you can add to your project. Each sentiment has two parts: a phrase for the
front of the project and a phrase for the inside of the project. If your project has
only one page, both parts of the sentiment will appear on that page. After you
select the appropriate sentiment, each phrase automatically displays in a text
box in your project.
1.
• Select the Warp Text checkbox to distort the text to fit inside the shape; or
deselect the Warp Text checkbox to curve the headline text without distortion.
On the Design Desk, choose Sentiment from the Insert menu.
The Sentiment Gallery displays.
• Click one of the two Orientation buttons to produce a vertical or horizontal
headline.
2.
• Finally, select one of the headline shapes from the Preview browser of
shapes.
3.
Select an option from the Select Sentiment Collection drop-down list.
Two of the many sentiments display in the Preview browser on the right.
10. Click the Position tab to select letter positioning from the Preview browser.
In the Choose Sentiment Category list box, click the plus (+) symbol next to the
category that contains the sentiments you want, then select an option.
The sentiments in that category display in the Preview browser.
11. Click the Outline tab to select letter outlining from the Preview browser.
4.
Select an option from the Select Tone for Sentiment drop-down list.
Note: You can also click Color to display the Color Palette dialog box, select a color,
and then click OK.
5.
If you want to further narrow your search, type search words into the Enter
Search Words box, then click Go. For example, you can type the word Birthday.
12. Click the Shadow tab to select one or more of the following options:
6.
If you typed in search words, you can also select from one of the following
options:
• Select a shadowing effect for the headline’s text box from the Preview
browser.
• All — Search for sentiments that contain all of the search words you typed.
• Click Color to see the Color Palette dialog box, select a color for the shadow,
and then click OK.
• Any — Search for sentiments that contain any of the search words you typed.
The sentiments that contain the keywords display in the Preview
browser.
• Click and drag the arrow in the Depth Angle area to set the angle of the
shadow.
7.
124
To place one of the sentiments in your project, scroll through the Preview browser
125
to display it. Either click it and then click Select, or double-click the sentiment in
the Preview browser.
The sentiment displays in text boxes in your project. You can modify the sentiment
text like any other text.
The graphics that contain the keywords display in the Preview browser on the right.
8.
Click the Advanced Search button
to display the Advanced Search submenu,
then perform the following options as desired:
• Select a type of graphic from the Select Type of Graphic drop-down list.
Note: If your project has only one page, both parts of the sentiment display on
the same page.
• Select a tone from the Tone drop-down list.
Adding Graphics
• Select a collection from the Collections drop-down list.
Graphics include both art images and photographs. The Print Shop provides
thousands of art images in its Art Gallery that you can add to your project. You
can also import art images and photographs into your project from other
sources, such as a disk or your scanner, and save the imported graphic in the
Art Gallery so that you can use it again and again.
Graphics display in the Preview browser according to your selections.
®
Adding a Graphic from the Art Gallery
Locate the graphic you want from the Art Gallery, then add it to your project.
1. On the Design Desk, click the Art & Photos button
Object toolbar.
on the
9.
The graphic displays on the Design Desk.
Adding a Graphic from a Disk
You can add a graphic that is stored on a disk or on your computer to your
project.
1.
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Art & Photos from the submenu.
3.
To add a graphic from thousands of The Print Shop® art images and photos, click
the All Art & Photos tab.
Click the graphic you want from the Preview browser, and then click Select, or
double-click the graphic.
On the Design Desk, click the Art & Photos button
Object toolbar.
on the
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Art & Photos from the submenu.
3.
In the Art Gallery, choose Open from Disk from the File menu.
Note: You can also add a graphic from your own collection by clicking the My Art
& Photos tab. This tab contains graphics you previously scanned in, imported, or
saved.
4.
Locate the file for the graphic you want to add to your project.
4.
Click Reset to clear all the search boxes.
5.
5.
Select an option from the Select Featured Art and Photos drop-down list.
The graphic displays on the Design Desk.
Graphics display in the Preview browser on the right according to your selection.
Note: To save this graphic for future use, select it on the Design Desk, choose
Export As from the File menu, and indicate file name and type of file. Choose a
save location on your computer, and then in the Art Gallery section select a
Category from the Category drop-down list, or click New to create a new category
in the My Art & Photos tab. The graphic is stored in both locations.
6.
folder that contains the options you want to view, then select an option. You can
also double-click subfolders to display their options.
Note: Supported files types include: bmp, cgm, gif, jpeg, photo CD files, pcx files,
Print Meta objects, Photoshop files, PNG, tiff, dpp, and wmf.
Click Open.
The graphics in that category display in the Preview browser.
7.
If you want to further narrow your search, type keywords in the Enter Search
Words box. For example, you can type the words Birthday Cake.
You can also select one of the following options:
• All — Search for graphics that contain all of the keywords you typed.
• Any — Search for graphics that contain any of the keywords you typed.
126
127
Importing a Graphic
You can import (or bring in) a graphic from another source into the Art Gallery in
The Print Shop®, then use it in your project.
1.
Access the Art Gallery.
2.
In the Art Gallery with the My Art & Photos tab selected, choose Import from the
File menu.
3.
In the Import Pictures dialog box, locate the graphic file you want to import into
The Print Shop® on either the computer’s hard disk or on a separate disk.
4.
Select the category in which you want to import the graphic from the Add to Art
Category drop-down list, and then select the Make Local Copy of File checkbox.
Note: You can create a new category for your graphics. To do so, click New. In the
Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new category, and then
click OK. You can then select this new category from the Add to Art Category
drop-down list.
5.
Click Import.
The graphic is imported into the Art Gallery.
6.
To add this graphic to your project on the Design Desk, select it in the Preview
browser, and then click Select.
Scanning in a Graphic or Digital Image
You can scan in graphics and photos for use in your projects. The Print Shop®
includes TWAIN software so that you can easily use a flatbed scanner from
within The Print Shop®.
You can also read in images from a digital camera.
• If you scanned the graphic from the Art Gallery, the Export As dialog box
displays.
3.
Note: You may change the file format and the category to which the scan is saved in
this dialog box.
4.
The Print Shop® includes audio (sound) and video features that let you transform
your card and Web page projects into multimedia creations. With The Print
Shop®, you can add background sounds to each of the pages in a project. You
can also link sounds to objects, such as text or graphics, so that when the
viewer clicks the object the sound plays. In addition, you can also insert a
personal video clip. Once your multimedia project is complete, you can publish it
as a Web page at your own Web site where you can invite friends and family to
view it.
Note: Multimedia features are not available in some versions of The Print Shop®.
Adding a Background Sound
You can add a background sound to each page in your project.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page in your project to which you want to
add a background sound.
2.
Click the Background Sound button
Background Sound.
The Select Sound dialog box displays.
3.
Select a sound file, and then click Preview to sample the sound.
• From the Art Gallery, choose Digital Image from the File menu, and then
select Acquire Image.
After selecting a sound file, click Open.
• From the Design Desk, choose Acquire from the File menu.
Note: You can preview the sounds in your Web project. To do so, see Previewing
Web Pages.
Acquire the image according to the directions that came with your scanner or
digital camera. This will be different for each scanner or digital camera.
One of two results take place:
A background sound is attached to the page.
Adding an Object Sound
You can add a sound to an object, such as a graphic or text.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the object to which you want to attach an object
sound. To select text, double-click the text box, and then select the text.
2.
Click the Object Sound button
Sound.
• If you scanned the graphic from the Design Desk, the graphic is placed on the
Design Desk.
128
on the status bar, and then select Add
4.
This starts the software that came with your camera or scanner.
2.
When finished selecting options in the Export As dialog box, click Save.
Adding Multimedia Features
Note: If this is the first time you are scanning in a graphic or digital image, you must
first set up your scanner or digital camera for The Print Shop®. See Selecting
the Image Source.
1.
In the Export As dialog box, you can save the scanned graphic in Your Own Art
category on the My Art & Photos tab of the Art Gallery or in the Art folder on the
hard disk of your computer.
on the status bar, and then select Attach
129
Adding a Line
3.
4.
1.
A sound is added to the object.
On the Design Desk, click the Drawing Tools button
Object toolbar.
on the
A submenu displays.
Note: You can preview the sounds in your Web project. To do so, see
Previewing Web Pages.
2.
Choose Insert a Line from the submenu.
The Line Format dialog box displays.
Adding a Video Clip
You can add a video clip to the current page in your project.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Multimedia from the Insert menu, and then
select Video.
The Select Video dialog box displays.
2.
Select a video file, and then click OK.
Note: You can preview the video in your Web project. To do so, see Previewing
Web Pages.
A table is a grid-like object that you can use in your project to arrange text. You
can modify the columns and rows of the grid, merge cells (where a row and
column intersect), and modify the colors to create the table you want.
2.
3.
4.
Select a style from the Line Style drop-down list.
5.
To change the color of the line, click Line Color and select a color.
6.
Click OK.
Adding a Shape
You can add arrows, croses, hearts, and a number of other shapes to
your project.
1.
Adding a Table
On the Design Desk, click the Custom graphics button
Object toolbar.
In the Line Format dialog box, use the arrow buttons to select the thickness of line
in the Line Width box.
A line displays in the project. You can move and size the line.
The first frame of the video displays on the Design Desk. You can move and size
the video frame as you would any other object. When the project is published as a
Web page the video plays.
1.
3.
Object toolbar.
on the
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Shape from the submenu.
3.
In the Add a New Shape dialog box, select a shape.
on the
Tip: You can click More to select from more shapes.
A submenu displays.
4.
To change the color of the shape, click Fill Color and select a color.
Choose Insert Table from the submenu.
5.
To have no fill color, select the Hollow checkbox.
The Create Table dialog box appears.
6.
Select a width for the outline of the shape from the Outline Width box.
Type the number of rows and columns, and select a table format from the Table
Formats list box.
7.
To change the color of the shape’s outline, click Outline Color and select a color.
8.
Click OK.
A preview of the table format displays in the sample area.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click a cell and type text into it, as you want.
The shape displays in the project. You can move, size, and modify the shape.
The table displays as an object in your project.
Note: You can modify the text as well as move, resize, or rotate the table.
130
131
Adding a Freehand Drawing
1.
Object toolbar.
Adding Frames and Borders
on the
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Draw Freehand from the submenu.
The pointer changes to a croshair.
3.
Click and drag a freehand line across your project at the appropriate location.
Note: Keep holding the mouse button down as you drag until your drawing is
complete.
The line displays in the project as you have drawn it. You can then modify its width
and color, and move and resize it.
The Print Shop® includes thousands of frames and borders you can use in your
projects. Use a frame around photos or art images to help them stand out.
When you apply a frame to a graphic, the frame stays with the graphic when you
move and resize it. You can also add a freestanding frame that you can use to
surround a graphic or text box, or place anywhere else in your project. The frame
is separate from the graphic or any other object, which allows you to move and
resize it separately.
Finally, you can use The Print Shop’s® BorderPlus tool to place borders in or
around your project. BorderPlus allows you to select graphics for each side and
corner of the border, and provides tools for manipulating the color, size, and
effects of the border.
Adding a Frame to a Graphic
Adding a Drawing You Create
The Print Shop® allows you to create your own drawings to add to your project
using the Advanced Drawing program.
1.
2.
Object toolbar.
1.
Select a graphic (art image or photo) in your project, and then choose Apply
Frame from the Effects menu.
2.
In the Apply Frame dialog box, click the Picture Frames tab or click the Box
Frames tab for the type of frame you want.
on the
Choose Advanced Drawing from the submenu.
The Advanced Drawing program displays.
3.
When you apply a frame to a graphic, the frame stays with the graphic even
when you move or resize it. Depending on the type of graphic, you can choose
either picture-like frames or simple boxed frames.
Note: Some graphics don’t allow Picture Frames.
3.
• Select Picture Frames from the Collections drop-down list.
If you want to modify a graphic that is stored on your computer, choose Open
from the File menu in the Advanced Drawing program, select the appropriate
graphic file, and then click Open.
Note: Only vector graphics may be modified in Advanced Drawing (that is, only
images with .wmf, .emf or .clp file extensions).
If you selected the Picture Frames tab, do the following:
• Select a type of frame from the Frame Types list box.
• Select a frame from the Preview area on the right.
4.
If you selected the Box Frames tab, do the following:
The selected graphic appears in the Advanced Drawing program.
• Click Box.
4.
Create or modify the drawing using the Advanced Drawing tools and features. For
help, choose Help Topics from the Help menu.
• Click Color to display the Color Palette, and then select a color for the boxed
lines.
5.
When finished, click Close in the upper-right corner of the Advanced Drawing
window. The drawing displays in your project as a design element.
Note: If you change your mind, you can click the Remove Frame button.
5.
Click OK.
The frame displays around the graphic. If you move or resize the graphic, the
frame moves and resizes with the graphic.
132
133
Adding a Freestanding Frame
You can add a freestanding frame to surround a graphic or for placement
anywhere in your project. Once added, you can move and resize the frame to fit
your needs.
Note: You can undo an action by clicking the Undo button
toolbar.
6.
in the Standard
To resize the top and bottom or the left and right borders, do the following:
• Move the pointer to the inside edge until it changes to an adjuster.
1.
• Click and drag the border vertically or horizontally, as needed, to resize the
border.
A submenu displays.
2.
Note: You can further modify the border within BorderPlus. For more information,
see Modifying a Border Using BorderPlus.
Choose Insert Frame from the submenu.
The Select a Frame gallery displays.
3.
7.
Select an option from the Frame Types list box.
Click Close in BorderPlus, or choose Done Editing Border from the File menu.
The border is placed in your project. You can resize the border as needed. You
can also double-click it to open BorderPlus and modify the border.
The frames in that category display in the Preview browser on the right.
4.
Select the frame you want from the Preview browser.
5.
If you want the inside of the frame to be filled with a color, click Fill inside Area,
and then select a color or texture.
6.
Click OK.
Custom Graphics let you create special types of graphics — such as seals,
signatures, and fancy initial caps — that can be customized to fit your needs.
The frame displays in your project. You can move or resize the frame and place it
anywhere in your project.
Adding a Personal Graphic
Adding a Border Using BorderPlus
You can use The Print Shop’s® BorderPlus program to create a border in or
around your project.
1.
2.
Adding Custom Graphics
With a personal graphic, you can construct simple headline and graphic
combinations. The Print Shop® provides a large selection of designs especially to
use when creating a personal graphic.
1.
4.
2.
Choose Insert Personal Graphic from the submenu.
3.
In the Create a Personal Graphic dialog box, type a personal message in the
Enter Text box.
Choose Insert Border from the submenu.
4.
In BorderPlus, click the Art Gallery button
134
Select a personal graphic from the Graphics list box.
The graphic displays in the Preview area.
.
Note: You can click More Graphics to display the Art Gallery and select another
graphic from there. For more information, see Searching for Graphics.
5.
To change the color of the graphic, click Color, and then select a color.
Search for the graphic you want to use in the border, and then select it from the
Preview browser on the right.
6.
To change the tint, select a percentage of tint from the Tint drop-down list.
7.
Select a style for text from the Text Style list box.
8.
Select an appropriate font from the Font drop-down list.
9.
Click the Bold button
the text.
The selected art displays on all four sides and corners of the border.
5.
A submenu displays.
The BorderPlus program displays.
3.
Click the Custom Graphic button
To remove the graphic from a side or border, click a border side or corner in the
BorderPlus workspace, and then press Delete.
and the Italics button
if you want to bold or italicize
135
10. To change the color of the text, click Color, and then select a color.
Note: You can also select either the graphic or the text in the Preview area and resize
or move it.
5.
Select a graphic from the Graphics list box.
6.
11. When finished, click OK.
Note: You can only change the color for some graphics, not all.
Adding an Initial Cap
7.
The Initial Cap feature lets you construct decorative, custom initial capital letters
by combining a square graphic background with a single headline letter.
8.
Select a special effect for the number from the Effects list box.
9.
1.
Click the Custom Graphics button
2.
Choose Insert Initial Cap from the submenu.
10. Click the Bold button
the number.
3.
In the Create an Initial Cap dialog box, type a letter in the Enter Letter box.
4.
Select a graphic from the Graphics list box.
Note: You can also select the letter in the Preview area and resize, move, or
rotate it.
5.
Note: You can only change the color for some graphics, not all.
Adding a Seal
6.
7.
Select a special effect for the letter from the Effects list box.
You can add official-looking or humorous seals to certificates and awards in
a project.
8.
9.
the letter.
Note: You can also select the letter in the Preview area and resize, move, or rotate it.
Adding a Number Graphic
The Number graphic feature lets you combine a number in a headline style with
a square graphic background. You can create a graphic from one to three
numbers. You can also automatically add a suffix, such as “st” or “th” to create an
ordinal number.
1.
2.
Choose Insert Seal from the submenu.
3.
In the Create a Seal dialog box, type text into the Enter Seal Top Text box.
4.
Type text into the Enter Seal Bottom Text box.
5.
6.
Click Color next to the Font drop-down list to select a color from the Color
Palette.
1.
2.
Choose Insert Number from the submenu.
7.
3.
In the Create a Number dialog box, type one to three digits in the Enter
Number box.
the text.
8.
Select a style from the Graphics Edge list box.
9.
Click Color button under the Graphics Edge list box to select a color for the
graphic edge.
4.
136
To make the number an ordinal number (using a “st” or “th” suffix), select the
Smart Suffix checkbox.
137
10. Select a graphic to display in the center of the seal from the Center list box.
4.
11. Click Color under the Center list box to select a color for the center graphic.
Click OK. The seal displays in your project.
5.
the text.
Adding a Timepiece
6.
To change the color of the text, click Color, and then select a color.
You can add graphics of clocks and other timepieces to announce the time in an
invitation or similar type of project.
Note: You can also select the text in the Preview area and resize, move, or rotate it.
7.
When finished, click OK.
Modifying Objects
You can modify any object in your project using The Print Shop’s® powerful tools
and features. You can add or change colors, special effects, the way text
appears, and much more to personalize your project.
1.
Click the Custom graphics button
Note: If your project has more than one page, you may need to navigate to the page
that contains the object first. Before you can modify one or more objects, you
must select it or them.
A submenu displays.
2.
Choose Insert Timepiece from the submenu.
Navigating to the Object
3.
In the Create a Timepiece dialog box, use the arrow keys to select the appropriate
hour from the Hour box and minute from the Minute box.
Some projects have more than one page. If the design element that you want to
modify doesn’t appear on the current page, you must first navigate to the page that
does contain it.
4.
Select a timepiece graphic from the list box.
5.
Click OK.
Some projects may also have master pages. A master page can contain
background design elements, effects, or colors that you want to have appear on
all project pages. Before you can modify a design element on a master page,
you must first navigate to that page.
The timepiece displays in your project.
Adding a Signature
Signatures provide a line of subtext to make it easy to create authorizations for
certificates and other official documents. A signature is a custom graphic
containing a line, subtext, and an optional autograph.
While signatures are perfect for formal business documents, The Print Shop
also provides a fun set of autographs of famous people to use with your
Signature graphic.
®
1.
2.
Choose Insert Signature from the submenu.
3.
In the Create a Signature dialog box, do one of the following:
Selecting Objects
Before you can modify or arrange one or more objects, you need to select it (or
them). A selected object displays with handles around it in your project.
• To insert your own signature into the project, select None from the Famous
Signatures list box, and then type the text (up to 50 characters) that you want
to appear below the signature line in the Enter Text box.
• To insert a famous signature into your project, select one from the Famous
Signatures list box.
• Click an object to select it.
• To select more than one object, hold down Shift, and then click each object
you want to select.
• Position the pointer on a blank portion of the project, then click and drag
The signature displays in the Preview area.
138
139
completely around the objects that you want to select.
• If the object you want to select is layered underneath another one so that you
cannot click it, then press Tab until the object you want is selected.
6.
7.
You can add, modify, or delete text in a text box. You can also format the text to
appear differently, or modify its text box with special effects and colors. The text
in headlines and sentiments can also be formatted and modified.
Modifying the Text Itself
You can add, modify, or delete text in a text box.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box.
2.
• To add new text, click inside the text box at the location where you want to
add text, and then type the new text.
Tip: You can also use the right and left arrow keys to move the I-beam through
existing text.
• To modify text, click and drag over the text that you want to modify to select it,
and then type the new text.
• To delete text, click and drag over the text that you want to delete to select it,
and then press Delete.
Formatting Text
You can change the way text appears in your project, modifying its size, style,
and color, for example.
Formatting All Aspects of Text at Once
The Font Format dialog box allows you to format many aspects of text all at
once. You can modify the text’s style, size, color, and special effects.
1.
2.
Select the text that you want to format.
3.
Choose Font from the Text menu.
4.
In the Font Format dialog box, on the Font tab, select a font from the Font list box.
5.
Select a font style from the Font Style list box and a font size from the Size list
box.
140
Click Color, and then select a color from the Color Palette.
Note: You can select from even more colors by clicking More, clicking Define
Custom Colors, selecting appropriate options, and then clicking OK to return to
the Color Palette.
Handles display around selected objects.
Modifying Text
Select (or deselect) the appropriate checkboxes to add (or remove) underlining,
all caps, small caps, or a white border around the text.
8.
Click the Effects tab.
9.
On the Effects tab, select a pattern to fill in the text from the Fill Pattern dropdown list. Click its Color button to select a color for the fill pattern from the Color
Palette.
10. Select an outline for the letters from the Outline drop-down list. Click its Color
button to select a color for the line from the Color Palette.
Note: You can modify the line width more precisely by pressing More, selecting a
point size in the Line Format dialog box, and then clicking OK.
11. Select a shadow effect for the text from the Shadow drop-down list. Click its Color
button to select a color for the shadow from the Color Palette.
12. Click OK.
Formatting the Paragraph Style
Paragraph styles provide a convenient way to quickly format paragraphs in text
boxes.
The Print Shop® supplies many built-in styles for you to choose from. The default
style varies depending upon the type of project. For existing text, changes you
have made to most types of text formatting are preserved when you apply a
paragraph style. For example, bold and red text remains bold and red. However,
paragraph formats, such as horizontal alignment, line spacing, character
spacing, bullets and numbering, and tabs, are replaced by the settings for the
paragraph style.
1.
2.
Click the paragraph whose style you want to change. To change more than one
paragraph at a time, select all or part of the paragraphs you want to change.
3.
Select a style from the Paragraph Style drop-down list
Text toolbar.
on the
141
Formatting Font Style and Size
select an option from the Preview browser on the right.
1.
Note: To remove a shadow effect, click Remove Shadow.
2.
Select the text that contains the font style and size you want to modify.
4.
3.
Select an appropriate font from the Font Style drop-down list.
4.
Select an appropriate font size from the Font Size drop-down list.
• Click the Customize Shadow tab.
• In the Shadow Settings area, click and drag the Transparency pointer and the
Edge Softness pointer to give the shadow the desired effect. You can preview
the shadow effect in the Shadow Position area.
Note: You can also format the font style and size, along with other text attributes,
all at once in the Font Format dialog box. See Formatting All Aspects of Text
at once.
Formatting for Bold, Italics, and Underline
1.
2.
Select the text that you want to bold, italicize, or underline.
3.
• Click the Bold button
to bold selected text.
• Click the Italics button
to italicize selected text.
• Click the Underline button
to underline selected text.
Modifying the Color of Text
To create a custom shadow, do the following:
• To change the color of the shadow, click Color, and then select a color from
the Color Palette.
5.
Click OK.
The object displays with the new or modified shadow. If you chose to remove the
shadow, it is removed.
Adding or Modifying a Radiant Glow
You can add, modify, or remove a radiant (or glowing) effect to or from any
object except borders and lines. When you add a radiant effect to a text box, the
text inside glows.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the appropriate object.
2.
Choose Apply Radiant Glow from the Effects menu.
3.
In the Apply a Radiant Glow dialog box, click the Preset Glows tab, and then
1.
Note: To remove a radiant glow effect, click Remove Glow.
2.
Select the text that you want to color.
4.
3.
Click the Color button
from the pop-up menu.
4.
In the Color Palette, select a color.
5.
The text displays in the selected color.
• Click the Customize Glow tab.
on the Standard toolbar and choose Object
• In the Glow Settings area, click and drag the Transparency pointer and the
Thickness pointer to give the glow the desired effect. You can preview the
effect in the Glow Thickness area.
• To change the color of the glow, click Color, and then select a color from the
Color Palette.
Adding or Modifying a Shadow Effect
You can add, modify, or remove a shadow effect to or from any object except
borders and lines. When you add a shadow effect to a text box, the text inside
is shadowed.
1.
2.
Choose Apply Drop Shadow from the Effects menu.
3.
In the Apply a Drop Shadow dialog box, click the Preset Shadows tab, and then
142
To create a custom glow, do the following:
5.
Click OK.
The object displays with the new or modified glow. If you chose to remove the
glow, it is removed.
143
Modifying the Character Spacing of Text
5.
In the Alignment area, select one of the following options:
1.
• Select the Left option button to set the left end of the text to the tab.
2.
Select the text whose character spacing you want to modify.
• Select the Center option button to set the center of the text to the tab.
3.
Click the Spacing button
4.
In the Spacing dialog box on the Character tab, select the appropriate spacing,
and then click OK.
The selected text appears with the selected character spacing.
5.
• Select the Right option button to set the right end of the text to the tab.
on the Text toolbar.
• Select the Decimal option button and type a character, such as a decimal
point, to set the tab to a specific character. This is useful to align numbers by
decimal points, for example.
6.
Click outside of the text box for the changes to take effect.
• Select the None option to eliminate leader characters.
• Select the ____ option to fill the empty space to the left of the tab with an
underline.
Modifying the Paragraph Formatting of Text
1.
2.
Select one or more paragraphs whose paragraph spacing you want to modify.
3.
Click the Spacing button
4.
In the Spacing dialog box, click the Paragraph tab.
5.
Type the appropriate point sizes for margins in the Indentation area.
6.
In the Line Spacing area, select the appropriate option button for Lines or Points
to insert the number of lines or point size between lines of text.
7.
Select the appropriate option from the Alignment drop-down list.
8.
In the Paragraph Spacing area, type the number of points for spacing that you
want before the selected paragraphs in the Before box, and the number of points
you want after the selected paragraphs in the After box.
9.
In the Leader area, select one of the following options:
• Select the Custom option and type any character to repeat that character
before the tab.
7.
Click Set to add this tab setting to the list of Tab Stops.
8.
In the Default Tab Stops box, type a number (in inches) for the tab stops.
Note: The default tab stop is 0.5 inch.
9.
To remove tabs that you have set, select the appropriate tab stop from the Tab
Stops list box, then do one of the following:
• Click Clear to remove the selected tab stop.
• Click Clear All to remove all of the selected tab stops.
10. Click OK.
The selected text appears with the selected tab spacing.
Click OK.
The selected text appears with the selected paragraph spacing.
10. Click outside of the text box for the changes to take effect.
Modifying the Tabs in Text
Shaping Text
You can shape existing text by applying shapes or word balloons to the text box,
shaping the text itself, or in some versions of The Print Shop®, you can insert
new text within a text shape.
You can set the tab stops in a paragraph.
Shaping the Text Box
1.
2.
Select one or more paragraphs whose tab spacing you want to modify.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the text box.
3.
Choose Tabs from the Text menu.
2.
Click the Text Box Shape button
4.
In the Tabs dialog box, type the distance of a tab (in inches) from the left edge of
the text box in the Position box.
3.
Click the Shape tab, and then select a shape from the area on the left.
4.
In the Shape Color area, click Background to display the Color Palette, and then
select a color for the background of the shape.
Note: You can also apply a previously set tab setting. To do so, select the appropriate
option from the Tab Stops list box, and then skip to step 10.
144
145
5.
Click Outline to display the Color Palette, and then select a color for the outline of
the shape.
6.
To flip the text horizontally or vertically within the shape, select the appropriate
checkbox in the Flip area.
7.
Click OK.
The shape of the text box changes to your selection. If you resize the text box, the
text adjusts to maintain the shape.
Tip: Click Undo on the Standard toolbar to return the text to its previous state.
Adding Text within a Shape
You can insert new text directly into a variety of shapes using the Insert Text
within a Shape feature. You can also format the text and shape before you add
them to your project.
Note: The Insert Text within a Shape feature is not available in some versions of The
Print Shop®.
1.
on the Object
A submenu displays.
Adding or Modifying a Word Balloon
1.
toolbar.
2.
Choose Insert Text within a Shape from the submenu.
3.
In the Create Text within a Shape dialog box, type text in the Enter Text Here
area.
2.
3.
Click the Word Balloons tab, and then select a word balloon from the area on the left.
4.
Choose text options, including Font, Size, Alignment, Style, and Color.
4.
select a color for the background of the word balloon.
5.
Scroll to a shape and select it in the Select a Shape area.
5.
the word balloon.
6.
To flip the word balloon shape horizontally or vertically, select the appropriate
7.
Click OK.
Note: You can also select the Mirror Left to Right checkbox to flip the shapes
horizontally and select the Flip Top to Bottom checkbox to flip the shapes
vertically.
6.
• Choose the size by specifying the shape’s Height and Width.
• Specify the thickness of the outline in Outline Width.
The text displays with a word balloon according to your selection.
• Select the color of the outline in Outline Color.
• Select the color of the interior in Fill Color.
Shaping the Text Itself
1.
2.
Specify options for the shape by doing any of the following:
• Drag the slider closer to Transparent for a light color effect or closer to
Opaque for a solid color effect.
A submenu displays.
3.
Choose Apply Text Shape from the submenu.
4.
In the Text Shape dialog box, select the shape you want to apply to the text.
5.
Click OK.
Note: While previewing your shape, click
7.
to zoom in and click
to zoom out.
Click OK.
The shape displays in your project. You can resize and move the shape and the
text will wrap automatically.
Tip: Double-click a shape in your project to modify it.
The shape of the text changes to your selection.
Or, repeat the previous steps and choose the Rectangle Shape in Step 4.
146
147
Modifying the Text Box
Modifying the Text Background Color
You can modify the appearance of text by applying colors and special effects to
the entire text box.
8.
9.
Click the Color tool
Shaping the Text Box
10. Select Behind Object from the pop-up menu.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Shape tab, and then select a shape from the area on the left.
4.
In the Shape Color area, click the Background button to display the Color Palette,
and then select a color for the background of the shape.
5.
the shape.
6.
To flip the text horizontally or vertically within the shape, select the appropriate
7.
11. Select a color from the Color Palette.
the Color Palette.
Click OK.
The background of the text box changes to the selected color.
Adding or Modifying a Line around the Text Box
You can add, modify, or remove the line around a text box.
1.
2.
Choose Line Format from the Effects menu.
3.
In the Line Format dialog box, do one of the following:
The shape of the text box changes to your selection. If you resize the text box, the
text adjusts to maintain the shape.
• To add or modify a line, use the arrow buttons to select the thickness of line in
the Line Width box. To change the color of the line, click Color, and then
select a color.
Adding or Modifying a Word Balloon
• To remove a line, select None in the Line Width box.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Word Balloons tab, and then select a word balloon from the area on
the left.
4.
select a color for the background of the word balloon.
5.
the word balloon.
6.
7.
4.
To flip the word balloon shape horizontally or vertically, select the appropriate
borders and lines. When you add a shadow effect to a text box, the text inside
is shadowed.
1.
2.
3.
Click OK.
The text displays with a word balloon according to your selection.
Click OK.
The text box displays with a line around it according to your choices.
4.
• In the Shadow Settings area, click and drag the Transparency pointer and the
148
149
Edge Softness pointer to give the shadow the desired effect. You can preview
the shadow effect in the Shadow Position area.
the Color Palette.
5.
Modifying Elements within Text
You can modify elements within text, such as bullets, numbers, dropped caps,
and more.
Click OK.
Adding or Modifying Drop Caps
The object displays with the new or modified shadow. If you chose to remove the
shadow, it is removed.
You can add drop caps to the start of paragraphs for a special effect.
text inside glows.
1.
2.
3.
In the Apply Radiant Glow dialog box, click the Preset Glows tab, and then select
an option from the Preview browser on the right.
4.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box to which you want to add or modify
drop caps.
2.
Select the paragraphs of text to which you want to add or modify drop caps.
3.
Choose Drop Caps from the Text menu, then select one of the following options:
• None — Remove drop caps from selected paragraphs.
• 2 Lines — Enlarge and drop the first letter of each selected paragraph by two
lines.
• 3 Lines — Enlarge and drop the first letter of each selected paragraph by
three lines.
• 4 Lines — Enlarge and drop the first letter of each selected paragraph by
four lines.
Color Palette.
5.
The text displays according to your choices.
Click OK.
The object displays with the new or modified glow. If you chose to remove the
glow, it is removed.
Stretching Text to Fit
1.
On the Design Desk, click to select the text box.
2.
A submenu displays.
3.
You can add or modify bullets or numbers in selected text.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box to which you want to add or modify
bullets or numbers.
2.
Select the paragraphs of text to which you want to add or modify bullets or
numbers.
3.
Choose Bullets & Numbering from the Text menu.
Choose Apply Stretch Text from the submenu.
The text stretches to the size of the text box. If you resize the text box, the text
adjusts.
Tip: You can click Undo on the Standard toolbar to return the text to its
previous state.
150
Adding or Modifying Bullets and Numbers
The Bullets and Numbering dialog box displays.
4.
To add or modify bullets, click the Bullets tab, and then do one of the following:
• Select one of the options, and then click OK.
• Click Custom Bullet, select a custom bullet from the Select Bullet dialog box,
151
and then click OK in the Select Bullet dialog box.
Note: You can click No Bullets to remove bullets.
The selected paragraphs display with bullets according to your choices.
5.
The selected paragraphs display with numbering according to your choices.
2.
You can remove an Address Merge field by selecting it in the text box, then
clicking Delete.
To add or modify numbers, click the Numbers tab, select one of the options, and
then click OK.
Note: You can click No Numbers to remove numbering.
1.
between them.
automatically filled in, you must select the specific people in your Address Book
Creating Text Wrap
You can choose to “wrap” text around a graphic design element.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the text box that is positioned below a graphic object.
Note: If design elements are layered so that you can’t click the text box to select it,
use Tab. For more information, see Selecting Objects.
Merge field.
2.
Choose Text Wrap from the Arrange menu.
3.
Select the appropriate option from the Text Wrap area.
3.
4.
4.
box, then click Add.
when you print.
5.
6.
Remove.
Click Insert.
152
Select the appropriate option from the Options area.
A preview of your selection displays in the dialog box.
5.
Click OK.
The text wraps around the graphic according to your choices.
Connecting Text to Other Text
When typing long pasages into a text box, the text may not fit in the text box. The
extra text isn’t lost, you just can’t see it. Instead of resizing the text box, you can
place the extra text in another empty text box anywhere in your project and have
the text flow from one box to the other. This is particularly useful for newsletters,
in which you want to continue an article from the front page to an inside page,
for example.
1.
On the Design Desk, add an empty text box to your project to accommodate the
overflow from another text box.
2.
Select the text box that has an overflow of text that you want to move to the empty
text box.
3.
Click the Link button
at the bottom of this text box.
When you move the pointer over the text, it becomes a Text Flow pointer
with an X over it. This means you cannot place the overflow text in a text
box that already contains text.
153
4.
Move the Text Flow pointer over the empty text box.
The pointer loses the X. You can now place the overflow text into this
empty text box.
5.
Click the empty text box.
Justifying Text
1.
2.
Select the paragraphs of text which you want to align.
3.
Click one of the following buttons on the Text toolbar:
The overflow text from the first text box flows into the second text box. Notice that
when you select connected text boxes, they display arrow buttons
•
Left Justify — Align the text to the left side of the text box.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 as many times as needed, until all the text appears in
your project.
•
Right Justify — Align the text to the right side of the text box.
Note: You can also resize any of the text boxes to better accommodate the text.
•
Center — Align the text in the center of the text box horizontally.
•
Justified — Display each line of text fully across the text box.
showing you how they connect to other text boxes.
6.
7.
To locate the next or previous text box in a flow, click an arrow button at the
bottom or top of a text box.
The next or previous text box in the flow is selected.
Disconnecting Text from Other Text
You can disconnect two text boxes that are connected so that the text that
displays in the second text box is removed and returned to the previous text box.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the text box that you want to disconnect from the
previous text box.
The text box displays one or more arrow buttons showing that it is connected to at
least one other text box.
2.
Click the left arrow button to select the previous text box in the connection.
3.
Click this text box’s Link button.
The text displays aligned according to your choices.
Tip: You can also choose Horizontal Alignment from the Text menu, and then
select Left, Right, Center, or Justified.
Arranging Text Vertically
You can position text on the top, middle, or bottom of a text box.
1.
2.
Choose Vertical Alignment from the Text menu, then select one of the following
options:
• Top — Position text at the top of the text box.
• Middle — Position text in the middle of the text box.
The pointer changes to a Text Flow pointer and the text disappears from
the previously connected text box. The connection is now broken.
• Bottom — Position text at the bottom of the text box.
Modifying a Headline
4.
Click anywhere outside of a text box to turn off the Text Flow pointer.
1.
Note: If more than two text boxes were connected, text disappears from all following
boxes and returns to the first box. The text remains available to flow into
another connected text box.
The two or more following text boxes are empty, but they remain connected to
each other.
Arranging Text within the Text Box
You can align text to the right, left, or center of the text box, or arrange text
vertically (from the top or bottom) within the text box.
154
On the Design Desk, double-click a headline.
The Create a Headline dialog box displays.
Note: If you added the headline from the Headlines category in the Art Gallery,
then the Headlines category in the Art Gallery displays. Select another headline
from the Preview browser, and then click Select.
2.
To modify a ReadyMade headline, select ReadyMade, and then do one or both of
the following:
• Select the text in the Enter Text Here box and type different text.
• Select a different headline type from the Preview browser at the bottom of the
dialog box.
155
3.
To modify a custom headline, select Custom, then do one or all of the following:
• Select the text in the Enter Text Here box and type different text.
• Select a different font style from the Font drop-down list.
• Click the Bold
headline.
and Italics
buttons if you want to bold or italicize the
• Click one of the Justification buttons
within the text box.
to align the headline text
Modifying Graphics
You can modify a graphic you have added to your project by changing its color,
adding special effects, and more. You can also crop the graphic to hide portions
of it that you don’t want to display, or replace a graphic with another.
Replacing a Graphic
You can replace a graphic with another one from the Art Gallery.
1.
• Click the Face tab and select a color blend for the headline text.
• Click the Shape tab to select a background color or texture, warp the text, select
an orientation for the headline, and select a shape from the Preview browser.
2.
• Click the Position tab to select a letter positioning from the Preview browser.
3.
• Click the Depth tab to select a depth effect, color, and depth angle.
• Click the Proportion tab to select the appropriate proportion from the Preview
browser to change the relative size and position of the text in each line when
your headline contains more than one line.
4.
Click OK.
The headline reflects your changes.
Modifying a Sentiment
You can modify a sentiment that you added from the Sentiment Gallery just as
you would any text box.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click a text box that contains a sentiment.
2.
Search for a different graphic in the Art Gallery.
Graphics display in the Preview browser on the right.
• Click the Outline tab to select letter outlining from the Preview browser.
• Click the Shadow tab to select a shadow effect for the headline’s text box, a
color for the shadow, and the depth angle of the shadow.
On the Design Desk, double-click the graphic that you want to replace.
The Art Gallery displays at the location the graphic came from.
Select a graphic by clicking it in the Preview browser, and then click Select.
The graphic is replaced on the Design Desk.
Cropping a Graphic
For photos and images, you can use the Crop tool to crop a graphic, which hides
a portion of the graphic that you don’t want to appear in your project. You can
crop using a presshaped crop or using a freehand crop.
Note: You can also crop and orient most graphics using The Photo Workshop.
If the graphic you have selected cannot be cropped using the Crop tool, the
Crop graphic menu item will be unavailable in the Edit menu.
1.
From the Design Desk with a project open, select the graphic that you want to
crop, and then choose Crop Graphic from the Edit menu.
The Crop dialog box displays.
2.
To crop the graphic using a shape, select a shape from the Crop Shapes and
Tools area. The shape crop displays on the graphic in an outline with handles.
3.
Click and drag a handle to resize the crop.
4.
Click and drag from the center of the cropped shape to move it.
• To modify text, click, and drag over the text that you want to modify to select
it, and then type the new text.
156
157
5.
To create a freehand crop of the graphic, click Freehand Crop.
4.
To change the orientation of the graphic, click Rotate 90 Degrees until the
graphic appears as you want.
5.
To crop the graphic using a shape, select a shape from the Select a Preset
Shape area.
The Add Point pointer displays in the Preview area.
6.
To add freehand crop points to your graphic, click around the area of the graphic
you want to crop.
The shape crop displays on the graphic in an outline with handles.
Points and lines display on the graphic, repressenting the crop area.
7.
To close the freehand crop, click the first point.
The pointer displays as normal and the Move Point button is activated.
8.
To move a point, position the mouse pointer over the point to be moved, then click
and drag the point to the new position.
9.
To delete a point, select the point to be deleted and the Delete Point button is
activated.
10. To complete the crop (shaped crop or freehand crop), click Crop It.
The cropped graphic displays with the extraneous background removed.
11. To add the cropped graphic to your project, click OK.
Note: Click Undo to remove your last crop action or Remove Crop to start over.
Using The Photo Workshop
Photo Workshop allows you to repair and transform the photographs and
graphics that you add to your projects. You can crop and orient the graphic;
adjust the color, brightness, and focus; fix flaws, such as “red eye” and scratches
on the photo; apply interesting photo effects; and more.
You can use Photo Workshop on all photos and all bitmap graphics. If the
graphic is not a bitmap, The Photo Workshop button will be grayed-out.
You can access Photo Workshop either from the Design Desk while working on
a project or from the Art Gallery to modify a specific graphic.
Note: You may not have access to all of the following features depending on which
version of The Print Shop® you have.
6.
7.
8.
The Add pointer displays in the Preview area.
9.
you want to crop.
10. To close the freehand crop, click the first point.
The pointer displays as normal and the Move button is activated.
11. To move a point, position the mouse pointer over the point to be moved, and then
click and drag the point to the new position.
12. To delete a point, click Delete, and then select the point to be deleted.
Cropping and Orienting in The Photo Workshop
For photos and bitmap graphics, you can use The Photo Workshop to crop and
orient a graphic. Cropping hides a portion of the graphic that you don’t want to
appear. You can either select a preset crop or create a freehand crop.
1.
On the Design Desk with a project open, select the graphic that you want to crop.
2.
Click the Photo Tools button
Crop & Orientation from the submenu.
on the Object toolbar, then choose
13. To complete the crop (shaped crop or freehand crop), click Apply Crop.
Note: You can remove the crop by clicking Remove Crop.
Note: You can click Undo All to undo all changes. Note that it will also undo all
changes made on any of the other tabs in The Photo Workshop.
The Photo Workshop dialog box displays.
3.
158
Click the Crop & Orientation tab if it is not already displayed.
159
Modifying Brightness and Focus in The Photo Workshop
1.
• From the Design Desk with a project open, select the graphic to which you
want to modify the brightness or focus. Click the Photo Tools button
2.
Click the Photo Effects tab if it is not already displayed.
3.
Select one or more of the following options from the Select an Effect Category list
box:
• Quick Fix
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Adjust Brightness
& Focus from the submenu.
• Artistic
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic to which you want to modify the
brightness and focus, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit
Graphic on the Art Gallery toolbar.
• Colorization
• Filter
• Black & White
2.
Click the Brightness & Focus tab if it is not already displayed.
3.
Click and drag the arrows to adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Blur/Sharpen,
Saturation and Gamma options.
The results display in the Preview area.
4.
Select the appropriate option in the Select Effect Intensity area.
5.
To undo the last change, click Undo Last.
6.
changes made on any of the other tabs in the Photo Workshop.
See The Photo Workshop Adjusting Brightness and Focus tutorial in the Help
Center for more information.
The graphic displays according to your choices.
Applying Photo Effects in The Photo Workshop
• Warp & Distort
4.
View the results in the Preview area.
5.
Select the appropriate option in the Select the Effect Intensity area.
6.
7.
changes made on any of the other tabs in The Photo Workshop.The graphic
displays according to your choices.
Use Photo Effects to transform and enhance your photo. The Quick Fix Effects
let you improve your photo with a single click. The Artistic, Colorization, Filter,
and Warp & Distort Effects create fun and interesting looks.
1.
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic to which you want to apply a
photo effect, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on
the Art Gallery toolbar.
• From the Design Desk with a project open, select the graphic for which you
want to apply a photo effect. Click the Photo Tools button
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Photo Effects from the
submenu.
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic for which you want to apply a
photo effect, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on
160
want to apply a photo effect. Click the Photo Tools button on the Object
toolbar, and then choose Apply Photo Effects from the submenu.
let you improve your photo with a single click. The Artistic, Colorization, Filter,
and Warp & Distort Effects create fun and interesting looks.
1.
Select the special effect you want from the Select an Effect browser.
2.
3.
Select one or more of the following options from the Select an Effect Category
list box:
• Quick Fix
161
• Artistic
• Colorization
Points and lines display on the graphic, repressenting the area.
8.
• Black & White
9.
• Warp & Distort
4.
5.
6.
7.
The pointer displays as normal and Move is activated.
• Filter
To move a point, position the mouse pointer over the point to be moved, and then
11. Select the Invert Selection checkbox to invert the shape of the area selected.
12. Select one or more of the following options from the Select an Effect Category
list box:
• Quick Fix
• Artistic
• Black & White
• Colorization
• Filter
Applying Area Effects in The Photo Workshop
With Area Effects you can creatively add Photo Effects to a selected area of your
photo (instead of the entire photo). Start either by selecting an area with a preset
shape or use your mouse to draw a shape around the area to which you want to
add an effect.
1.
want to apply area effects. Click the Photo Tools button
on
the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Area Effects from the submenu.
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic to which you want to apply area
effects, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on the Art
Gallery toolbar.
• Warp & Distort
13. Select the special effect you want from the Select an Effect browser.
14. Select the appropriate option in the Select Effect Intensity area.
15. Click Apply to apply your selections to the graphic.
16. To undo the last change, click Undo Last.
Applying Artistic Stamps in The Photo Workshop
2.
Click the Area Effects tab if it is not already displayed.
Use Artistic Stamps to create unique photo frames and added photo appeal.
3.
Select a shape for the area from the Select a Preset Shape or Draw a Shape
area.
The shape displays on the graphic in an outline with handles.
4.
Click and drag a handle to resize the outline.
5.
Click and drag from the center of the outlined shape to move it.
6.
To create a freehand area of the graphic to apply effects, click Draw a Shape.
7.
where you want to apply an effect.
162
1.
want to apply an artistic stamp. Click the Photo Tools button
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Artistic
Stamps from the submenu.
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic to which you want to apply an
artistic stamp, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on
163
2.
Click the Artistic Stamps tab if it is not already displayed.
3.
Select an option from the Select a Stamp Category drop-down list.
4.
Select an option from the Select a Stamp drop-down list.
Your options display in the Preview area.
Note: You can click More Stamps to access more artistic stamps.
6.
Click Save.
The modified graphic is saved to the Art Gallery in the category you indicated.
Using Advanced Photo Editor
Advanced Photo Editor is a powerful program used to edit and enhance photos.
It contains similar features found in The Photo Workshop plus additional effects,
filters, and more.
1.
From the Design Desk, choose Edit Using Advanced Photo Editor from the
Effects menu. The Advanced Photo Editor program displays. Use this program to
create customized calendars.
5.
Click the appropriate button in the Select a Stamp Size area for the size of the
stamp.
6.
Click the photo or graphic in the Preview area to place the stamp.
Starting the new Advanced Photo Editor
7.
8.
You can launch the Advanced Photo Editor from within The Print Shop® Pro
Publisher Deluxe
Saving a Modified Graphic
You can save a graphic you modified using The Photo Workshop so that you can
use it again at a later time. You can save it on the computer disk or to the Art
Gallery for easy access.
1.
If the Photo Workshop is not displayed with your modified graphic, then select the
modified graphic in your project, click the Photo Tools button
on
the Object toolbar, and then select one of the Photo Workshop options from the
submenu, such as Adjust Color.
2.
Click Save As.
3.
In the Save As dialog box, find the location where you want to save the graphic.
4.
In the Art Gallery area, select the Add to Art Gallery checkbox in order to easily
access the project from the My Art & Photos tab in the Art Gallery.
The location you select is where the graphic will be stored on the computer disk.
This stores the graphic in the Art Gallery for easy access in The Print Shop®.
5.
To start Advanced Photo Editor:
In The Print Shop® Pro Publisher Deluxe, do one of the following:
• Right-click an image, and then select Edit using Advanced Photo Editor.
• Click Effects | Edit Using Advanced Photo Editor.
Learning the basics
About the Advanced Photo Editor user interface
The Advanced Photo Editor user interface provides convenient access to editing
tools and effects, and is highly customizable. The following sections include
descriptions for each Advanced Photo Editor user interface component, and links
to further information.
Main display area
You can use the main display area to view, modify, and enhance your images
with Advanced Photo Editor tools and effects. When working with editing tools,
you can use the Current and Preview tabs in the upper-left corner of the display
area to switch between your original image and your changes. You can also use
the Compare button on the Common Tasks pane to toggle the display between
Current and Preview.
Toolbars
You can use the Advanced Photo Editor Main and Drawing toolbar buttons to
access common tasks and tools.
• Select the appropriate category in which to place the graphic from the
Category drop-down list.
and then click OK.
164
165
Status bar
Using the undo/redo system
You can use the Status bar, located at the bottom of the Browser window, to see
the processing progress of an image, as well as information about images, menu
items, and toolbar buttons.
You can undo and redo multiple changes when editing an image. You can also
control the number of reversible changes by changing the undo/redo system’s
buffer size and by compressing stored information.
To undo a change, do one of the following:
Common Tasks panel
• Click Edit | Undo.
You can use the customizable Common Tasks panel to quickly access common
Advanced Photo Editor tasks and tools and their related options. When you start
Advanced Photo Editor, the panel displays the Startup Tasks area. After you
open an image, the panel displays three areas: Editing Tasks, Editing Tools, and
File Tasks. You can hide or display an area by clicking its title.
• Click the Undo button.
Survey panel
You can use the customizable Survey panel to navigate a zoomed image. When
you zoom in on an image using the Zoom tools or the panel’s slider, the panel
displays your image with a rectangular marquee.
The marquee indicates the part of your image that appears in the display area.
You can drag the marquee on the image in the survey panel to display its
contents in the display area. You can also quickly resize the image by clicking
the Best Fit or Actual Size button
To redo a reversed change, do one of the following:
• Click Edit | Redo.
• Click the Redo button.
To set the undo/redo options:
1.
Click View | Options.
2.
Select the Undo/Redo tab.
3.
Select the Enable Undo/Redo system check box.
4.
Specify a Buffer size. Larger values allow you to reverse more changes; a
minimum buffer size of 30 MB is recommended.
5.
Select the Compress Undo/Redo information check box to increase the number
of changes stored in memory.
6.
Click OK.
Using the Photo Correction Wizard
You can use the Photo Correction Wizard to enhance your images quickly with
the following editing tools:
• Crop
• Sharpness
• Auto Exposure
• Color Cast
• Red-Eye
To open the Photo Correction Wizard:
About tool presets
Many Advanced Photo Editor tools, such as resize, allow you to save your
settings as presets. This is convenient when you frequently use the same
settings for a particular tool or effect.
For most tools, Advanced Photo Editor automatically saves the last option
settings you applied to an image when you clicked Apply or Done. This preset is
called Last Used.
To save tool settings:
Click Adjust | Photo Correction Wizard.
1.
Select a tool and specify its settings.
After opening the wizard, follow the directions in each dialog box. Click the Help
button if you need further information about a tool.
2.
In the Presets area, click the Save button.
3.
In the New Preset dialog box, enter a name for your preset and click OK.
Note: You can set the Photo Correction Wizard to auto-hide.
166
To use a previously-saved preset:
1.
Select the tool for which you created the preset.
2.
Select the desired preset from the Presets drop-down list.
167
To use the settings you last applied to an image:
Zoom Out
Reduces an image.
Zoom In
Enlarges an image.
Resize
Displays the Resize tab on the Common
Tasks panel.
Photo Correction
Wizard
Opens the Photo Correction Wizard.
Adjust Levels
Opens the Auto Exposure, Brightness, and Levels
tools on the Common Tasks panel.
Main toolbar buttons
Auto Exposure
Automatically adjusts the exposure of an image.
The Main Advanced Photo Editor toolbar is located near the top of the window
and includes shortcut buttons for common tasks:
Help
Opens the Advanced Photo Editor 3.0 Help file.
1.
Select a tool.
2.
Click the Presets drop-down list and select Last Used.
To delete a preset:
1.
Select the tool for which you created the preset.
2.
Click the Presets drop-down list and select the preset you want to delete.
3.
Click the Delete button.
4.
In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Yes.
Working with toolbars
Drawing toolbar buttons
Save
Saves the current image or opens the Save As
dialog box.
Print
Opens the Print dialog box.
Cut
Cuts an image or selection and places it on the
Clipboard.
Copy
Copies an image or selection and to the Clipboard.
Paste as
New Selection
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard to the current
image.
The Advanced Photo Editor Drawing toolbar includes shortcut buttons for
common drawing and selecting tasks:
Pan
Moves images that are larger than the display area
so that you can see hidden areas. The mouse
pointer changes to a hand that you can use to grab
and move the image.
Zoom
Zooms in or out on a center point you select on an
image.
Rectangular Select Creates a rectangular selection on an image.
Undo
Cancels the previous action.
Redo
Reapplies an action previously undone.
Crop
Opens the Crop tab on the Common Tasks pane.
Red-eye Reduction Opens the Red-Eye tab on the Common Tasks
panel.
168
Elliptical Select
Creates an elliptical selection on an image.
Lasso Select
Creates a freehand selection on an image.
Magic Wand Select Creates a selection based on the pixel color you
select in an image.
Mover
Opens the Tool Options - Move Selection area on
169
the Common Tasks panel, in which you can set
options for moving a selection.
Eyedropper
Selects the primary and secondary colors.
Pencil
Draws freehand lines on an image.
Line
Draws straight lines on an image.
Dodge
Lightens a specific image area.
Zooming in or out on an image
You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out tools to enlarge or reduce an image
around its center point. The Advanced Photo Editor window’s title bar displays
the zoom ratio. After zooming, you can use the Survey panel to move around
your image.
To zoom in or out on an image, do one of the following:
• Click View | Zoom In.
• Click View | Zoom Out.
• Click the Zoom In button on the Main toolbar.
Burn
Darkens a specific image area.
Rectangle
Draws a rectangle on the image.
Ellipse
Draws an ellipse on the image.
Polygon
Draws a polygon on the image.
• Click the Zoom Out button on the Main toolbar.
Zooming specific image areas
You can use the Zoom tool to enlarge or reduce an image around a center
point that you define. The Advanced Photo Editor window title bar displays the
zoom ratio.
To zoom in on a specific center point on an image:
Airbrush
Draws a colored spray pattern on the image.
1.
On the Drawing toolbar, click the Zoom button.
2.
• Click a specific point on the image to zoom in on that area.
Flood Fill
Fills an area of the image with the primary or
secondary color.
Clone
Copies a selected area of an image to another
location on the image.
Manual Sharpen
Sharpens a specific image area.
Manual Blur
Blurs a specific image area.
• Right-click a specific point on the image to zoom out of that area.
3.
Repeat step 2 for additional image enlargement or reduction.
4.
Click the Zoom button again to return to another tool.
Zooming an image to best fit
You can zoom an image to fit within the Advanced Photo Editor display area.
To zoom an image to best fit:
Click View | Best fit.
Viewing images
Zooming an image
Panning an image
You can use the Pan tool to view hidden areas of images that are larger than the
display area. You can move images vertically, horizontally, and diagonally across
the display area.
You can use the Advanced Photo Editor zoom tools to modify the size of the image
displayed in the main viewing area. You can enlarge and reduce an image’s
magnification, enlarge a specific area on an image, and zoom the image to fit the
display area.
170
171
To pan an image:
Customizing the Advanced Photo Editor
1.
Click the Pan button on the Main toolbar. The mouse pointer changes to a hand in
the display area.
2.
Drag the image to view areas outside the display area.
3.
Click the Pan button again to return to another tool.
Viewing actual size
You can display an image using its saved dimensions. To view the current image
at its actual size: Click View | Actual size.
Modifying toolbars
Customizing toolbars
You can customize the appearance and organization of the Main and Drawing
toolbars. You can display and hide toolbars and toolbar buttons, and even create
new toolbars. You can also discard your changes and reset the toolbars to their
default layouts at any time.
Using the Preview Bar
You can use the customizable Preview Bar to see how the current editing tool
affects specific image areas. You can simultaneously pan the images in both
panes by dragging one image within its pane.
To open or close the Preview Bar:
On a tool tab, click the Preview Bar button.
The Preview Bar displays the original version of your image in the top pane, the
edited version of your image in the bottom pane, and the toolbar between them.
Note: The Preview Bar is not available with the Crop, Red-eye Removal,
Resize, and Add Text tools.
Displaying and hiding toolbars
You can display and hide the Main, Drawing, and Page toolbars.
To display or hide a toolbar:
Click View and select the toolbar you want to display or hide.
Customizing toolbar buttons
You can add and remove, resize, rearrange, and add text labels to toolbars.
To customize the appearance of toolbar buttons:
1.
Preview Bar toolbar buttons
Zoom In
Enlarges the images in the panes.
Zoom Out
Reduces the images in the panes.
Actual Size
Displays the images at their original size.
Fit In Window
2.
On the Commands tab, select All Commands.
3.
Do any of the following:
• Add buttons by dragging commands from the Commands area to a toolbar.
• Remove buttons by dragging them from a toolbar.
• Rearrange buttons by dragging them to a new position on any toolbar.
4.
To resize toolbar buttons, click the Options tab, and select or clear the Large
Icons check box.
5.
To display or hide button text, click the Toolbars tab, select a toolbar from the
Toolbars list, and select or clear the Show text labels check box.
6.
Click Close.
Resizes the images to fit within each pane.
Survey Window
Opens a survey window in which you can select an
image area to display. When available, you can drag
the marquee to display specific image areas in the
panes.
172
Click the More Buttons button to the right of the Main toolbar, and
select Customize.
Note: When there are more icons than Advanced Photo Editor can display in
the viewable area of the toolbar, a Chevron button appears. Click the button to
expand the toolbar.
173
Resetting toolbars
Adding text labels to buttons
You can discard all of your changes and return the toolbars and buttons to their
default states.
You can add text labels to buttons on the Main and Drawing toolbars.
To reset the toolbars:
1.
Click the More Buttons button to the right of the Main toolbar, and select
Customize.
2.
Click the Toolbars tab, and then click Reset All.
3.
Click Yes to reset your toolbars.
4.
Click Close.
To add text labels the Main or Drawing toolbars:
1.
2.
Select the Interface tab.
3.
In the Toolbars and menus area, do one or both of the following:
• In the Main toolbar area, click the Text check box.
• In the Draw toolbar area, click the Text check box.
4.
Click OK.
Creating a new toolbar
You can create new toolbars that include the commands you use most
frequently.
To create a new toolbar:
1.
Customize.
2.
In the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.
3.
Click New.
4.
In the Toolbar Name dialog box, type a name for the new toolbar, and click OK. A
small window appears with your toolbar’s name on its title bar.
You can now add buttons to the new toolbar, and move it to anywhere on your
screen.
Moving, resizing and docking toolbars
You can move, resize, and dock the Drawing and Page toolbars, and any new
toolbars you create.
To move, resize or dock a toolbar:
1.
To move a toolbar, position the mouse pointer over the left edge of a docked
toolbar until it changes to a four-pointed arrow, and drag the toolbar to a new
location.
2.
To resize a floating toolbar, position your mouse pointer over the toolbar’s edge or
corner until it changes to a double-pointed arrow, and drag the toolbar’s border to
the desired size.
3.
To dock a floating toolbar, slowly drag the toolbar’s title bar towards the Advanced
Photo Editor title bar until it automatically docks.
Resizing toolbar buttons
You can shrink buttons on the Main and Drawing toolbars to increase the size of
your work area.
To shrink Main or Drawing toolbars:
1.
2.
3.
In the Toolbars and menus area, do one or both of the following:
• In the Main toolbar area, clear the Large icons check box.
• In the Draw toolbar area, clear the Large icons check box.
4.
174
Click OK.
Note: You can return a floating toolbar to its previous location by double-clicking its
title bar.
Customizing Advanced Photo Editor Panels
Customizing panels
You can customize the following Advanced Photo Editor panels to suit your
preferences:
•
Common Tasks
•
Survey
•
Preview Bar
You can open or close, move, resize, dock, stack, and auto-hide these panels.
175
To open or close a panel:
To enable or disable Auto Hide for a panel:
Click View and select the panel you want to open or close.
Click the Auto Hide button on the panel’s title bar so that it displays a horizontal
or slanted pushpin.
Note: To open or close the Preview Bar, click its button on the tool tab.
Note You cannot set floating stacked panels to auto-hide.
To move, resize, or dock a panel:
1.
The following table summarizes the options for Auto Hide:
To move a panel, do one of the following:
Auto Hide enabled
• Disable Auto Hide and drag the panel’s tab to a new location. Any stacked
panels will remain in their original position.
• Drag the panel’s title bar to a new location. If the panel is docked, you must
disable Auto Hide before you can move the panel. Any stacked panels will
also move.
2.
To resize a panel, position your mouse pointer over the panel’s edge or corner
until it changes into a double-pointed arrow, and drag the panel’s border to the
desired size.
3.
To dock a panel, drag the panel’s title bar to a side of the Advanced Photo Editor
window until the marquee automatically resizes, and release the mouse button.
Panel docked
Note: To return a panel to its previous location, double-click its title bar.
Stacking panels
You can stack panels and reorder their tabs to suit your needs. By default, the
Common Tasks and Survey panels are stacked and tabbed.
Panel not docked
(floating)
Auto Hide disabled
Panel rolls away when
you move the mouse
pointer outside of it,
leaving a tab displayed.
You can access the
panel by moving the
mouse pointer over the
tab.
Panel remains docked in
place when you move
the mouse pointer
outside the panel.
Panel rolls up when you
move the mouse pointer
outside of it, leaving the
title bar displayed. You
can access the panel by
moving the mouse
pointer over the title bar.
Panel remains in place
when you move the
mouse pointer outside
the panel.
To stack panels and reorder their tabs:
1.
Disable Auto Hide on the docked panel to which you intend to stack
another panel.
2.
Drag a panel’s title bar to the docked panel’s title bar until the marquee
automatically resizes, and release the mouse button.
Adjusting the Advanced Photo Editor display
3.
To reorder panel tabs, drag a tab left or right in the tab order.
Changing the display area color
Auto-hiding panels
You can change the background color used in the display area to provide
contrast when working with very light or very dark images.
You can use the Auto Hide button to automatically hide Advanced Photo Editor
panels. The Auto Hide button’s appearance on the panel reflects its current
setting:
To change the background color:
A horizontal pushpin indicates that the panel is set to automatically hide
when you move the mouse pointer outside the panel.
A slanted pushpin indicates that the panel is fixed and will remain visible
when you move the mouse pointer outside the panel.
176
1.
2.
3.
In the Miscellaneous area, click the Background color drop-down arrow and
specify a color.
4.
Click OK.
177
Customizing the context menu
Selecting, copying, and pasting
You can customize the context menu to display the commands for editing tasks
that you apply most frequently. The context menu appears when you right-click
in the display area. You can add and remove commands, and reorder them on
the menu.
Selecting an image area
To customize the context menu:
Creating a selection
Advanced Photo Editor includes easy-to-use tools for selecting all or part of an
image. You can manipulate selections based on your needs and paste the
selection as a new image.
1.
Customize.
To select an entire image:
2.
In the Customize dialog box, click the Menu tab.
Click Selection | Select All.
3.
In the Context Menus area, click the Select context menu drop-down list and
select Context-Menu.
To select part of an image, use these selection tools:
4.
Do one or more of the following:
Rectangular Select Selects a rectangular area.
• Reorder commands by dragging them to new locations in the Context-Menu
window.
Elliptical Select
Selects an elliptical area.
Lasso Select
Selects a freehand area.
Magic Wand
Selects image areas matching the color
chosen with the wand.
• Remove commands by dragging them outside the Context-Menu window.
• Add commands by clicking the Commands tab, selecting All Commands,
and dragging commands from the Commands area to the Context-Menu
window.
5.
In the Customize dialog box, click Close.
Setting window size and position
You can change the Advanced Photo Editor window’s size and position and then
save any changes as the default setting the next time you start Advanced Photo
Editor. You can also choose not to save window size and position.
To set window size and position options:
1.
2.
3.
Select an option:
• Save window size
• Save window size and position
• Don’t save size or position
4.
Click OK.
Selection options
Once you have made a selection, you can apply several options that affect its
appearance. You can access these options from the Selection menu.
Selection options
Clear
Removes the selection marquee. Removes the selection if it has
been moved or pasted.
Invert
Selects all areas except for the original selection.
Feather
Creates smooth transitions between the selected object
and background image.
Floating Copies the selection, allowing it to be moved on the image.
Clearing a selection
The Clear selection option is available when the marquee surrounds the
selection. If you have already attached the selection to the image, you must use
the Undo tool to clear the selection.
178
179
To clear a selection:
Floating a selection
Click Selection | Clear.
After making a selection, you can use the Floating option to make a copy of the
selection that you can then move freely around the image. You can also adjust
the opacity and feathering of a floating selection.
Feathering a selection
After making a selection, you can use the Feather option to create a smooth
transition between the selected area and the background image.
Feathering uses the secondary color for creating the transition.
To create a floating selection:
Click Selection | Floating.
A red marquee indicates a floating selection that you can drag to a new location.
When you click outside the marquee, the selection attaches to the image.
Example
Inverting a selection
After making a selection, you can use the Invert option to select all areas not
originally selected.
To invert a selection:
Click Selection | Invert.
Using Rectangular Select
There are two methods for feathering a selection. The method you use will
depend on whether you want to move the selection.
You can use the Rectangular Select tool to select a rectangular area of an
image. After selecting an area, you can copy and paste it, or use the selection to
create a new image. You can also apply filters, coloring, blends, and opacity to
the selection.
To feather and move a floating selection:
To select a rectangular part of an image:
No feathering
With feathering
1.
Create a selection.
1.
On the Drawing toolbar, click the Rectangular Select button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Move Selection, specify the
amount of Feather to apply.
2.
Drag the mouse pointer across the image to draw a marquee.
3.
To add to the selected area, hold the Shift key and drag the mouse pointer
across the image. The mouse pointer displays a plus sign (+).
4.
To remove a portion from the selected area, press the Ctrl key and drag the
mouse pointer across the image. The mouse pointer displays a minus sign (-).
3.
4.
Drag the floating selection to a new location.
5.
Click outside the marquee to anchor the selection on the image.
To feather a static floating selection:
1.
Create a selection.
2.
3.
Click Selection | Feathering.
4.
In the Feather Selection dialog box, specify a feathering Amount.
5.
Click OK.
180
Example
181
Using Elliptical Select
Example
You can use the Elliptical Select tool to select an elliptical area of an image. After
selecting an area, you can copy and paste it, or use the selection to create a
new image. You can also apply filters, coloring, blend, and opacity to the
selection.
To select a part of an image:
1.
On the Drawing toolbar, click the Elliptical Select button.
2.
Drag the mouse pointer across the image to draw a marquee.
3.
4.
Example
Using Magic Wand Select
You can use the Magic Wand Select tool to select image areas that match the
color you select with the wand. After selecting an area, you can copy and paste
it, or use the selection to create a new image. You can also apply filters, coloring,
blend, and opacity to the selection.
To select an area using the Magic Wand Select tool:
1.
On the Drawing toolbar, click the Magic Wand button. The mouse pointer changes
to a wand.
2.
In the Tool Options dialog box, do one or both of the following:
Using Lasso Select
• Specify the Threshold.
You can use the Lasso Select tool to create a freehand selection. After selecting
an area, you can copy and paste it, or use the selection to create a new image.
You can also apply filters, coloring, blend, and opacity to the selection.
• Click the Type drop-down list and select Magic Wand or Blue Screen.
To create a freehand selection:
1.
On the Drawing toolbar, click the Lasso Select button.
2.
Drag the mouse pointer on the image to draw a marquee. When you release the
mouse, Advanced Photo Editor completes the selection area between the start
point and the end point.
3.
4.
182
3.
Click an image area that contains the desired color.
4.
To add other image areas to the selected area, press the Shift key and click
another area.
Advanced Photo Editor uses a marquee to outline all image areas that contain
colors related to the one or more pixels you selected.
Magic Wand options
Threshold
Determines how closely a pixel’s color must match the
selected color for it to be included in the selected area.
Higher values include more pixels in the selection.
Magic Wand
Selects only pixels matching the original pixel and
connected to the original pixel.
Blue Screen
Selects all pixels matching the color of the original pixel.
183
Example
To copy an entire image:
Click Edit | Copy.
To copy part of an image:
1.
Create a selection.
2.
Click Edit | Copy.
Cutting a selection
After making a selection, you can remove it from the main display area and
place it on the Clipboard. When you cut a selection, Advanced Photo Editor fills
the cut portion of the original image with the secondary color.
Moving selections
To cut a selection:
After you have made a selection, you can drag it to a new location on the image.
Click Edit | Cut.
To move a selection:
Pasting a selection on an image
1.
Place your mouse pointer on the selected area and drag it to a new location on
the image.
2.
Click outside the marquee.
Note: If you want to set the Opacity and Blend mode before moving the selection,
click the Mover button on the Drawing toolbar. These options also become
available after you move the selection and before you place it.
After copying or cutting a selection, you can paste it onto another image, or onto
another location on the original image. Advanced Photo Editor places the pasted
image in the upper-left hand corner of the canvas area.
To paste a selection:
Click Edit | Paste.
*opacity
A red marquee borders the pasted selection. You can drag the pasted image to a
new location, apply a filter, and adjust its opacity and blend. Clicking outside the
marquee attaches the selection to the image.
After floating a selection, you can adjust its opacity.
Modifying image properties
To adjust the opacity of a floating selection:
Resizing an image
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Move Selection, move the
slider or click the spin box arrows to specify Opacity.
You can resize an image by adjusting its dimensions in pixels, percent, or by
actual/print size. While resizing, you can also choose an aspect ratio and a resampling filter to adjust the resized image’s appearance.
Using opacity with floating selections*
Copying, cutting, and pasting
Copying and cutting images or selections
You can use the Copy tool to copy an entire image or a selection to the
Clipboard. You can also use the Cut tool to remove a selection and place it on
the Clipboard.
Copying an image or selection
You can use the Copy tool to make a copy of an image or selection without
affecting the appearance of the original image.
184
You can save your options as a preset for future use.
To resize an image by pixels:
1.
Click Image | Resize.
2.
On the Resize tab in the Common Tasks panel, select the Pixels radio button.
3.
• Clear the Constrain Aspect Ratio check box, and type the image’s new
dimensions into the Width and Height spin boxes.
185
• Select the Constrain Aspect Ratio check box, and select an aspect ratio
from the drop-down list. Type a new dimension into the Width or Height spin
box; Advanced Photo Editor updates the other dimension automatically based
on the image’s aspect ratio.
4.
Click the Filter drop-down list and select a re-sampling filter.
5.
6.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Resize tool.
• Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool.
Resizing tips:
•
Maintain image quality by reducing images by 33%, 50%, or 66%. Other
percentages can distort the aspect ratio.
•
Avoid resizing an image repeatedly. Each resizing places image pixels using a
slightly different orientation. As a result, multiple resizes can change the overall
color and appearance of the image. If your first resize attempt does not produce
the desired result, click the Undo button or use the Revert command to begin
again.
•
Avoid increasing the size of an image. Increasing image size makes the image’s
pixels more apparent, causing a grainy effect.
To resize an image by percentage:
1.
2.
On the Resize tab in the Common Tasks panel, select the Percent radio button.
3.
• Clear the Constrain Aspect Ratio check box, and type a percentage into the
Width and Height spin boxes.
from the drop-down list. Type a new percentage into the Width or Height spin
box; Advanced Photo Editor updates the other percentage automatically
based on the image’s aspect ratio.
4.
5.
To resize an image by print size:
1.
2.
On the Resize tab in the Common Tasks panel, select the Actual/Print Size radio
button, and specify a measurement unit from the drop-down list.
3.
• Clear the Constrain Aspect Ratio check box, and type new print dimensions
for the image into the Width and Height spin boxes.
from the drop-down list. Type a new dimension into the Width or Height spin
box; Advanced Photo Editor updates the other dimension automatically based
on the image’s aspect ratio.
4.
In the Resolution drop-down list, select a print resolution for the image.
5.
186
Selecting a color depth
You can modify an image’s color depth. Color depth refers to the range of colors
an image contains.
To change the color depth of an image:
Click Adjust | Color Depth, and select an option.
Color depth options
Black and White
Two-color black and white palette
16 Grays
16-color grayscale palette
256 Grays
256-color grayscale palette
16 Colors
16-color palette
256 Colors
256-color palette (GIF format uses 256 colors by default)
Hicolor
32,768-color palette
Truecolor
16,777,216-color palette of all colors of the visible spectrum
You can use Advanced Photo Editor to convert an image to any of these color
depths. However, to use certain image enhancement tools, filters, blends, and
adjustment options, the image must be Hicolor or Truecolor. To edit an image
that is not originally Hicolor or Truecolor, you can convert it, edit the image, and
then convert it back to its original color depth.
Note: Immediately after conversion, you can use the Undo tool to return a converted
image to its original color depth.
187
Cropping an image
To constrain the crop window to a ratio:
You can use the Crop tool to remove unwanted parts of your images, or to
reduce the image canvas to a particular size. You can save your options as a
preset for future use.
1.
Select the Constrain cropping proportion check box.
2.
Select a ratio from the drop-down list and select or clear the Landscape check
box to toggle the crop window between landscape and portrait orientation.
To crop an image:
3.
1.
Click Image | Crop.
2.
Resize the crop window as described below, and position it over the area of the
image you want to keep.
3.
To adjust the opacity of the area to be cropped, drag the Darken outside crop
area slider to the desired setting.
4.
To estimate the file size of the cropped image, click Estimate file size.
5.
• Double-click on the crop window to crop the image and close the Crop tool.
• Click Done to crop the image and close the tool.
• Click Cancel to exit the tool without cropping the image.
Resizing the crop window
You can resize the crop window by dragging the edges of the crop window to the
desired size, or by specifying an exact size for the crop window in pixels, inches,
centimeters, or millimeters.
To resize the crop window by dragging:
1.
Position your mouse cursor over the edge or corner of the crop window until it
changes into a double-pointed arrow.
2.
Drag the crop window’s border to the desired size.
To specify an exact size for the crop window:
1.
In the Units drop-down list, select a unit of measurement.
2.
Use the Dots per inch spin box to specify a resolution.
3.
Type the desired crop window proportions into the Width and Height spin boxes.
188
• Position your mouse cursor over the edge of the crop window until it changes
into a double-pointed arrow, and then drag the edge of the crop window to the
desired size.
• Use the Width or Height spin box to specify a dimension for one side of the
crop window. The Advanced Photo Editor automatically resizes the other
dimension based on the ratio you selected.
Flipping an image
You can flip an image both vertically and horizontally.
To flip an image:
1.
Click Image | Flip.
2.
On the Flip tab in the Common Tasks panel, do one or both of the following:
• Select the Flip horizontally check box.
• Select the Flip vertically check box.
3.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the tool.
• Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the tool.
About additive blending
Additive blending reapplies a tool’s effect over an area already enhanced with
the tool. If you do not use additive blending, the effect applies only once to a
given area.
189
Example
Pencil tool applied
in white at 50%
opacity, without
additive blending.
Pencil tool applied
in white at 50%
opacity and
additive blending.
Note how the color
is reapplied at each
intersection.
Overlay
Shows patterns or colors of the upper layer while
preserving the shadows and highlights of the lower layers.
Applies Multiply or Screen based on the image’s color
channel value. If the underlying image’s color channel value
is less than 128 (half the maximum value), Multiply is used.
If the color channel value is greater than or equal to half,
Screen is used.
Difference
Subtracts the selection or tool color from the color
of the underlying image. Any white in the selection or tool
produces a true negative of the color in the image, while
black produces no effect.
Darken
Applies pixels in the selection or tool that are darker than
the underlying image to the image. Pixels in the selection or
tool that are lighter than the underlying image disappear
(based on RGB values).
Lighten
Applies pixels in the selection or tool that are lighter than the
underlying image to the image. Pixels in the selection or tool
that are darker than the underlying image disappear (based
on RGB values).
Hard Light
Use this mode to add highlights or shadows. Applies
Multiply or Screen based on the image’s color channel
value. If the selection or tool color channel value is less than
128 (half the maximum value), Multiply is used. If the color
channel value is greater than or equal to half, Screen
is used.
Soft Light
Use this mode to add soft highlights or shadows. Applies
darkening or lightening based on the image’s color channel
value. If the selection or tool color channel value is less than
128 (half the maximum value), darkening is applied. If the
selection or tool’s color channel value is greater than or
equal to 128, lightening is applied.
About blend modes
Blend modes are filters that change the effect of a tool or the appearance of a
selected object. Moreover, your choice of opacity level and the primary and
secondary colors affect the results of each blend. Experimenting with the blend
modes will help you understand their unique effects.
Note: You can use blend modes only with Truecolor images. If an image is not
Truecolor, you can covert it, edit the image, and then convert it back to the
original color format.
When you apply a blend mode to a floating selection, Advanced Photo Editor
analyzes its pixels and those of the underlying image. After completing the
comparison, Advanced Photo Editor applies a final pixel color to the image. The
pixels in the underlying image change as the selection is moved.
Blend Modes
Normal
Applies the selection or tool to the underlying image with its
original color. Only opacity affects this blend.
Hue
Applies the hue value of colors in the selection or tool to the
color of the underlying image.
Screen
Multiplies the inverse of the blend and base colors, resulting
in a color that is the same or a lightened version of the
base color.
Saturation
Applies the saturation value of colors in the selection or tool
to the color of the underlying image.
Color
Multiply
Combines the selection or tool colors with the underlying
layers to produce a darker color. Multiplying any color with
black produces black; multiplying any color with white
leaves the color unchanged.
Applies the hue and saturation of the selection or tool to the
image. This blend does not affect the luminance of the
underlying image.
Luminosity
Applies the lightness value of colors in the selection or tool
to the color of the underlying image.
190
191
Disolve
Creates a speckled effect by randomly replacing the colors
of some pixels in the selection or tool with those of the
underlying image. Lower opacity values result in greater
pixel replacement.
Examples
Using opacity with drawing tools
Opacity determines how visible an effect is when applied to an image or a
selection. You can adjust the opacity of a drawing tool before using it on an
image. An opacity of 100 creates a solid effect, while an opacity of 1 results in a
nearly invisible effect.
To adjust the opacity of a drawing tool:
1.
Click a drawing tool button.
2.
In the Tool Options area on the Common Tasks panel, do one of the following:
• Click the Opacity spin box arrows and select a value from 0 to 100.
• Move the Opacity slider.
3.
Draw on the image with the drawing tool.
Using colors with drawing tools
When you work with Advanced Photo Editor drawing tools, a Color Palette
appears under Tool Options on the Common Tasks panel.
Truecolor
Editing the Color Palette
You can edit the Color Palette of images that use up to 256 colors. You can then
save the palette and use it with other images.
Note: You cannot edit the palettes of Hicolor and Truecolor images.
To edit the Color Palette:
1.
Click Adjust | Edit Palette.
2.
In the Palette Editor dialog box, select the color you want to change. For grayscale
and black-and-white images, clear the Dither to new palette check box.
3.
In the Color dialog box, adjust the color by doing one of the following:
• Select a color from the Basic colors squares.
• Select a color from the Custom colors squares.
• Select a color from the color matrix. You can move the vertical slider on the
right to adjust the color’s luminescence.
To display the Tools Options area on the Common Tasks panel:
• Type a value into the Hue, Saturation, and Luminescence, or Red, Green,
and Blue fields.
Click View | Tool Options Panel.
The Color Palette contains all the colors Advanced Photo Editor uses to display
the current image. You can edit the Color Palette, apply saved palettes to image,
and create custom colors. When available, the Color Palette is displayed on the
Common Tasks panel under Tool Options.
16-grayscale
If you edit a Truecolor or Hicolor image, the palette displays every posible color
in the spectrum. Converting from one type of color display to another updates
the palette.
You can use the Color Palette to select the primary and secondary colors you
want to use with a drawing tool. You can also edit an image’s color palette, apply
it to another image, and create custom colors.
Working with the Color Palette
256-color
4.
Click OK.
5.
If you want to save the palette, click Save As, type a name for the palette, and
click OK.
6.
Click OK. Advanced Photo Editor saves the color palette with a .pal file name
extension.
Applying a saved color palette to an image
You can apply saved color palettes to images that use up to 256 colors.
To apply a color palette to an image:
192
1.
Click Adjust | Edit Palette.
2.
In Palette Editor dialog box, click Browse.
193
3.
Select a .pal file.
You can change the primary and secondary colors using the Color Palette.
4.
Click OK.
To change colors using the palette, do one or both of the following:
5.
Select Dither to new palette. If you do not select this option, Advanced Photo
Editor replaces the colors in the old palette with the closest matching colors from
the new palette.
6.
Click OK.
•
Click a color in the Color Palette to set the primary color.
•
Right-click a color in the Color Palette to set the secondary color.
Note: You can also hold down either mouse button and drag the pointer around
the palette to select a color.
Creating a custom color
You can create custom colors to use with Truecolor and Hicolor images.
To create a custom color:
1.
On the Common Tasks panel under Tool Options, click the primary or secondary
color square.
2.
In the Color dialog box, do one of the following to specify a color:
• Select a color from the Color Matrix. You can move the vertical slider on the
Setting colors using the color squares
You can change the primary and secondary colors using the color squares. The
method used to set the colors with the color squares depends on whether your
image is Truecolor or Hicolor, or has 256 or fewer colors.
To set Truecolor or Hicolor colors using the color squares:
1.
Click the primary or secondary color box.
2.
In the Color dialog box, do one of the following:
• Type a new value in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminescence fields.
• Select a color from the Basic colors squares.
• Type a new value in the Red, Green, and Blue fields.
• Select a color from the Custom colors squares.
3.
Click Add to Custom Colors to save the color for later use.
4.
Click OK.
• Select a color from the color matrix. You can use the vertical slider on the
• Type a value into the Hue, Saturation, and Luminescence, or Red, Green,
and Blue fields.
Setting the primary and secondary colors
You can use the primary and secondary colors with drawing and selecting tools.
You can set the colors with the Color Palette, the color squares, or the
Eyedropper tool. Advanced Photo Editor displays these colors as two squares in
the Tool Options area:
The upper-left box displays the primary color, and the lower-right box
displays the secondary color.
You can use both colors with the following drawing tools:
• Airbrush
• Ellipse
• Pencil
• Burn
• Flood Fill
• Polygon
• Dodge
• Line
• Rectangle
You can use the primary color with the Add Text tool. The secondary color
appears in the background when you remove a selection from an image.
Setting colors using the Color Palette
3.
Click OK.
To set colors for images with 256 or fewer colors using the
color squares:
1.
Double-click the primary or secondary color box.
2.
In the Palette Editor dialog box, select a color. For grayscale and black-and-white
images, clear the Dither to new palette check box.
3.
In the Color dialog box, click OK.
4.
In the Palette Editor dialog box, click OK.
Setting colors with the Eyedropper
You can choose the primary and secondary colors using the Eyedropper tool.
To change colors using the Eyedropper tool:
1.
Click the Eyedropper button on the Drawing toolbar.
2.
Do one or both of the following:
• Click a color in the image to set the primary color.
• Right-click a color in the image to set the secondary color.
194
195
Drawing freehand on an image
Arrowhead
Specifies an arrowhead style to add to the line:
• None: select if you want to add an end cap to the line.
• Start: adds an arrowhead to the start of the line.
• End: adds an arrowhead to the end of the line.
• Both: adds arrowheads to the start and end of the line.
End cap
Specifies an end cap style to add to the line.
• Round: rounds the ends of the line. The mouse pointer is
offset from the end of the line as you draw.
• Square: squares the ends of the line. The mouse pointer
is offset from the end of the line as you draw.
• Flat: squares the ends of the line. The mouse pointer is at
the end of the line as you draw.
End caps are not available if you add an arrowhead to the
line.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the lines you draw on your image.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the lines.
Color picker
Specifies the primary and secondary colors for the tool.
You can use the Pencil tool to draw freehand lines on your images.
To draw a freehand line:
1.
Click the Pencil button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Pencil, set the options.
3.
• To draw using the primary color, drag the mouse pointer across the image.
• To draw using the secondary color, hold the right mouse button and drag the
mouse pointer across the image.
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Pencil tool.
Pencil options
Line width
Specifies the line width in pixels. Higher values create
wider lines.
Additive blending Reapplies the tool’s effect over an area already enhanced
with the tool.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the lines you draw on your image.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the lines.
Color picker
Drawing a line on an image
You can use the Line tool to draw straight lines on your images and add
arrowheads and end caps to your lines.
To draw a line:
1.
Click the Line button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Line, set the options.
3.
Lightening an image manually
You can use the Dodge tool to lighten image areas that you want to stand out.
To lighten image areas manually:
1.
Click the Dodge button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Dodge, set the options.
3.
Drag the pointer across the image areas you want to lighten.
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Dodge tool.
Dodge options
Nib width
Specifies the tool’s width in pixels. Higher values widen the
image area you can lighten with each stroke.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the tool.
• To draw using the primary color, drag the mouse pointer across the image.
• To draw using the secondary color, hold the right mouse button and drag the
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Line tool.
Line options
Line width
196
Specifies the line width in pixels. Higher values create
wider lines.
197
Darkening an image manually
Drawing an ellipse on an image
You can use the Burn tool to darken image areas that you want to stand out.
You can use the Ellipse tool to draw an ellipse on an image.
To darken image areas manually:
To draw an ellipse:
1.
Click the Burn button.
1.
Click the Ellipse button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Burn, set the options.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Ellipse, set the options.
3.
Drag the pointer across the image areas you want to darken.
3.
Drag the pointer across the image to draw the ellipse.
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Burn tool.
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Ellipse tool.
Ellipse options
Burn options
Line width
Nib width
image area you can darken with each stroke.
Specifies the ellipse border’s width in pixels. Higher values
increase the width.
Filled
Fills the object using the secondary color.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the tool.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the ellipse you draw on your image.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the ellipse.
Color picker
Specifies the primary and secondary colors for the tool. The
border uses the primary color and any object fill uses the
secondary color.
Drawing a rectangle on an image
You can use the Rectangle tool to draw a rectangle on an image.
To draw a rectangle:
1.
Click the Rectangle button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Rectangle, set the options.
3.
Drag the pointer across the image to draw the rectangle.
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Rectangle tool.
Rectangle options
Drawing a polygon on an image
You can use the Polygon tool to draw a polygon on an image.
To draw a polygon:
1.
Click the Polygon button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Polygon, set the options.
3.
Drag the pointer across the image to draw the first side of the polygon.
4.
Repeat step 3 to draw more sides.
5.
Click the original starting point to close the polygon.
6.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Polygon tool.
Line width
Specifies the border width in pixels. Higher values increase
border width.
Round corners
Specifies how much to round the rectangle’s corners. Higher
values produce more rounded corners.
Filled
Polygon options
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the rectangle you draw on your
image.
Line width
Specifies the border width in pixels. Higher values increase
border width.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the rectangle.
Filled
secondary color.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the polygon you draw on
your image.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the polygon.
Color Picker
198
199
Color picker
secondary color.
Airbrushing an image
• To fill with the secondary color, right-click an area.
4.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Flood Fill tool.
Flood Fill options
Threshold
Specifies how similar in color the pixels must be before the
fill color replaces them. Higher values increase the tolerance
for color variations, resulting in more color-filled pixels.
Click the Airbrush button.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of the fill.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Airbrush, set the options.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the fill.
3.
Color picker
You can use the Airbrush tool to spray color on an image.
To airbrush the image:
1.
• To spray using the primary color, drag the mouse pointer across the image.
• To spray using the secondary color, hold the right mouse button and drag the
4.
Example
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Airbrush tool.
Airbrush options
Airbrush width
Specifies the airbrush width in pixels. Higher values
increase the spray pattern’s width.
Spray rate
Specifies how quickly the airbrush sprays. Higher values
increase the spray rate.
No color fill
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of airbrush spray on your image.
You can use the Clone tool to duplicate part of an image.
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the airbrush spray.
To clone a part of an image:
Color picker
Adding color to part of an image
You can use the Flood Fill tool to add color to parts of an image by replacing all
pixels that are similar in color with a selected color.
To fill part of an image:
1.
Click the Flood Fill button.
2. On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Flood Fill, set the options.
3.
200
Threshold 50
Threshold 100
1.
Click the Clone button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Clone, set the options.
3.
Right-click the part of the image that you want to clone. The Tool Options - Clone
area indicates whether you have set the clone source.
4.
Move the mouse pointer to where you want to place the cloned image.
5.
Drag the mouse pointer to apply the cloned image.
6.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Clone tool.
Clone options
Nib width
Specifies the tool’s width in pixels. Higher values
widen the area of the cloned image you can apply with
each stroke.
Feather radius
Specifies how much feathering to use when you apply the
cloned image. Higher values increase the feathering.
• To fill with the primary color, click an area.
Threshold 10
Cloning an image
201
Blend mode
Specifies the blend mode for the clone.
Sharpen options
Nib width
image area you can blur with each stroke.
Strength
Specifies how much blur to apply. Higher values increase
the blur level.
Example
with the tool.
Sharpening and blurring images
Blurring images
Original image
Cloned image
Sharpening an image manually
You can use the Sharpen tool to sharpen small areas of an image.
To manually sharpen an image:
You can use the Blur filter to apply different kinds of blur to an image, and you
can save your options as a preset for future use. If you want to blur a specific
area of your image, you can use the Manual Blur tool.
To blur an image:
1.
Click Filter | Blur, and then select Blur.
2.
On the Blur tab on the Common Tasks Panel, click the Blur type drop-down list
and select a blur type.
Drag the mouse pointer across the image area you want to sharpen.
3.
Specify options for the blur.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Sharpen tool.
4.
1.
Click the Manual Sharpen button.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Sharpen, set the options.
3.
4.
Sharpen options
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Blur tool.
Nib width
image area you can sharpen with each stroke.
Strength
Specifies how much sharpen to apply. Higher values
increase the sharpen level.
witt the tool.
Blurring an image manually
Blur types and options
The following table describes the options for each type of blur:
Gausian
Amount
Linear
You can use the Manual Blur tool to sharpen small areas of an image.
To manually sharpen an image:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Manual Blur button.
On the Common Tasks panel, under Tool Options - Blur, set the options.
Drag the mouse pointer across the image area you want to blur.
Click Done to apply your changes and close the Blur tool.
Radial
202
Produces an even, smooth blur.
Specifies the amount of blur. Move the
slider to the right to intensify the effect.
Produces a blurring effect that gives the illusion of
movement.
Amount
Angle
Specifies the direction in which the
object appears to move.
Produces blur around a center point. Click on the image to
set the center point.
203
Amount
3.
To increase the image’s sharpness, move the slider to the right. To decrease the
image’s sharpness, move the slider to the left.
Clockwise
Specifies clockwise blur.
4.
Counter-clockwise Specifies counter-clockwise blur.
• Click Apply to apply your changes and set options on another tab.
Horizontal position Specifies the blur’s center
point on the
horizontal axis.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Sharpness tool.
Vertical position
Spread
Produces a smeared or frosted blur.
Amount
Zoom
Specifies the blur’s center point on the
vertical axis.
Produces inward or outward blur to or from a center point.
Click on the image to set the center point.
Amount
Zoom in
Creates a blur that zooms in to the
image’s center.
Zoom out
Creates a blur that zooms out from the
image’s center.
Horizontal position Specifies the blur’s center point on the
horizontal axis.
Vertical position
Specifies the blur’s center point on the
vertical axis.
Sharpening images
You can use the Sharpness and Unsharp (only available in Pro Publisher
version) Mask tools to sharpen your images. You can save your options as a
preset for future use. If you want to sharpen specific areas of your images, you
can use the Manual Sharpen tool.
Using the Sharpness tool
You can use the Sharpness tool to increase the color difference in adjacent
pixels, resulting in sharper images.
Using the Unsharp (only available in Pro Publisher version) Mask tool
You can use the Unsharp (only available in Pro Publisher version) Mask tool to
sharpen an image by enhancing the contrast of medium and high contrast
edges.
To sharpen an image using the Unsharp (only available in Pro Publisher
version) Mask tool:
1.
Click Adjust | Sharpness.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, select the Unsharp (only available in Pro
Publisher version) Mask tab.
3.
Specify the options.
4.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Unsharp (only available in
Pro Publisher version) Mask tool.
Unsharp Mask options*
*only available in Pro Publisher version
Amount
Specifies the amount of light added to or removed from
each edge. Higher values produce darker edges.
Radius
Specifies the number of pixels to adjust around each edge.
Higher values increases the number of sharpened pixels.
Threshold
Specifies how different the lightness values of two adjacent
pixels must be before they are sharpened. Higher values
increase the required difference. It is recommend that you
set the threshold so that it enhances edges while keeping
background noise to a minimum.
To sharpen an image using the Sharpness tool:
1.
Click Adjust | Sharpness.
2.
On the Common Tasks panel, select the Sharpness tab.
204
205
Adding and removing image noise*
apply the filter. You can define a specific random seed to
generate identical image noise. To generate a new random
seed, click Random Seed.
* This feature is only available in the Pro Publisher version
You can add or remove image noise to give images a grainy effect or to improve
their appearance. You can also save your options as a preset for future use.
Adding noise to an image
You can use the Add Noise tool to add a grainy texture to an image. Adding
small amounts of noise can reduce the appearance of minor imperfections in the
original image.
Removing noise from an image
You can use the Remove Noise tool to remove noise from your images while
presserving details that you want to retain.
To remove noise from an image:
To add noise to an image:
1.
Click Filter | Noise, and select Remove Noise.
On the Remove Noise tab on the Common Tasks panel, set the options.
1.
Click Filter | Noise, and select Add Noise.
2.
2.
On the Add Noise tab on the Common Tasks panel, set the options.
3.
3.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Remove Noise tool.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Add Noise tool.
Add Noise options
Intensity
Specifies the amount of noise added to the image. A higher
intensity increases the chance that a noise pixel will replace
a pixel in the original image.
Color proximity
Specifies the color of noise pixels added to the image. A
lower value gives each noise pixel a color similar to the pixel
it replaces. Higher values result in a random selection of the
noise pixel color.
Noise color
Noise placement
Random Seed
206
Select one of the following options to specify noise pixel
color:
• Random: randomly selects the color.
• Monochrome: produces black and white noise pixels.
• Adjustable: randomly selects the color of each noise pixel,
with more pixels matching a defined color. To define a color,
click the color picker and select a color.
Adds noise to image areas that closely match a defined
color. Select the Set color check box to enable noise
placement, and click the color picker to specify a color.
Indicates the random placement of noise in an image.
When you apply the Add Noise filter to an image, Advanced
Photo Editor places the noise pixels based on a random
seed. This makes the image noise different each time you
Remove Noise options
Despeckle
Removes noise.
Square
Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel square.
X
Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel X shape. Use when you
want to preserve an image’s thin and diagonal lines.
Plus
Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel plus (+) shape. Use
when you want to preserve an image’s thin, vertical, and
horizontal lines.
Note: You can use the Remove Noise filter to remove hot image pixels caused by
digital cameras with malfunctioning CCD array sensors, or the extra pixels
caused by a dusty scanner or camera lens.
Adjusting image light and exposure
You can use the Auto Exposure tool to automatically correct the exposure of
your images. Auto Exposure makes the darkest image pixels darker, and the
brightest pixels brighter. You can save your options as a preset for future use.
To automatically correct an image’s exposure:
1.
Click Adjust | Auto Exposure.
2.
On the Auto Exposure tab on the Common Tasks panel, select one of the
following options:
• Auto Contrast and Color: adjusts color differences, brightness, and image
color channels.
207
• Auto Contrast: adjusts only color differences and brightness.
3.
Move the slider to fine tune the amount of exposure you want to apply.
4.
• Set the Levels options to adjust the contrast and light levels manually.
• Click Auto and select a menu option to automatically adjust image properties.
3.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Auto Exposure tool.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Exposure tool.
Adjusting brightness
You can use the Brightness tool to adjust an image’s brightness, contrast, and
gamma. You can save your options as a preset for future use.
Levels options
To adjust an image’s light levels:
Channel
Specifies the brightness or color channel you want to adjust.
1.
Click Adjust | Levels and select the Brightness tab.
Logarithmic scale Applies a logarithmic scale to the histogram so that you can
see and adjust lower color levels.
2.
On the Brightness tab on the Common Tasks panel, set the options.
Shadows
Specifies the black point of an image.
Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin
box to define the blackest area of an image.
3.
Midtones
Specifies the gamma correction in an image.
Move the slider or type a number from 0.10 to 10.00 into the
spin box to set the amount of gamma correction. Higher
values make the image appear brighter, while lower values
make the image appear darker.
Highlights
Specifies the white point of an image.
Move the slider or type a number from 0 to 255 into the spin
box to define the whitest area of an image.
Clipped %
Indicates how much of the image detail is lost due to black
point and white point correction.
Specifies the amount of difference between color and
brightness in an image. Moving the slider to the right
darkens the shadowed areas in an image, while moving the
slider to the left brightens them.
Shadows picker
Click the Shadows picker and then click on the image area
you want to set as the black point.
Midtones picker
Click the Midtones picker and then click on the image area
you want to set as the gamma correction value.
Specifies the intensity of the light spectrum in an image.
Moving the slider to the right lightens the image, while
moving the slider to the left darkens it.
Highlights picker Click the Highlights picker and then click on the image area
you want to set as the white point.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Brightness tool.
Brightness options
Brightness
Contrast
Gamma
Specifies the image’s light intensity. Moving the slider to the
right lightens the image, while moving the slider to the left
darkens it.
Adjusting levels
You can use the Levels tool to precisely adjust the contrast and light levels in
your images. You can save your options as a preset for future use.
To adjust image levels:
1.
Click Adjust | Levels.
2.
208
Auto
Select one of the following options:
• Adjust Contrast: automatically analyzes and adjusts
image contrast.
• Adjust Color and Contrast: automatically analyzes and
adjusts each color channel independently, and adjusts the
contrast.
209
• Adjust Color and Brightness: automatically analyzes and
adjusts image color and brightness.
• Tolerance: opens the Tolerance Setting dialog box.
Specify the maximum clipping percentage for black and
white levels, and click OK. Advanced Photo Editor adjusts
the image levels automatically.
Reset
To correct red-eye:
1.
Zoom in on the image to enlarge and center the eye you want to correct.
2.
Click Adjust | Red-eye Reduction.
3.
On the Red-Eye tab on the Common Tasks panel, set the options.
4.
Drag the mouse pointer across your image to create a marquee. Use the handles
on the marquee to center it over an eye.
5.
Discard all changes and revert to the original image levels.
• Click Apply and repeat for each eye needing correction.
Adjusting brightness curves
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Red-eye Reduction tool.
You can use the Curves tool to change the tonal range of an image. Select the RGB
color channel to adjust the entire range of the image, or select a specific color.
Red Eye options
To adjust the brightness curves in an image:
Amount Specifies how much color to use. Higher values fill more of the ellipse.
1.
In Edit Mode, on the Edit panel, click Exposure, and select the Curves tab.
2.
On the Curves tab, set the options.
3.
Drag the histogram bar to manipulate the image.
4.
Eye color
Specifies the eye color to apply. You may need to
experiment with colors to produce realistic-looking eyes. To
do this, select Custom, select a color, click Add to Custom
Colors, and click OK.
Show outline Displays an ellipse inside the marquee.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Exposure tool.
Applying Auto Color
You can use the Auto Color tool to automatically correct an image’s color
balance, with minimal changes to its brightness.
Curves options
To automatically adjust image colors:
Channel
Specifies the color channels to adjust.
Show Histogram
Toggles the histogram display.
1.
Click Adjust | Auto Color.
Histogram
Displays a visual repressentation of the color
information levels in the image, based on the selected
channel. Click and drag the line to manipulate the curve.
2.
Move the slider to use more or less color correction.
3.
Reset
Discards all changes and reverts to the original image.
Exposure warning Highlights over- and under-exposed areas of the image.
Adjusting image colors
Removing red-eye
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Auto Color tool.
Changing RGB values*
* This feature is only available in the Pro Publisher version
You can adjust an image’s red, green, and blue (RGB) color values. You can
save your options as a preset for future use.
You can use the Red-eye Reduction tool to correct the red-eye effect sometimes
caused by a camera’s flash.
210
211
To adjust an image’s RGB values:
4.
1.
Click Adjust | Red/Green/Blue.
• Click Done to apply your changes and close the Color cast tool.
2.
On the RGB tab on the Common Tasks panel, move the sliders to adjust the
amount of Red, Green, and Blue.
3.
Applying special effects
You can use filters to add unique effects to an entire image or a selected image
area. For more information on a special effect, click the name of the filter in the
following list:
Crosshatch
Adds a croshatched effect to an image.
Changing HSL values*
Edge Detect
Adds a tracing effect to an image.
* HSL feature only available with Pro Publisher version
Emboss
Adds a grayscale relief effect to an image
You can adjust an image’s HSL (hue, saturation, and lightness) values. You can
Negative
Adds a photo-negative effect to an image.
Oil Paint
Adds a painted effect to an image.
To adjust an image’s HSL:
Pencil Drawing
Adds a pencil-drawing effect to an image.
Sepia
Adds an antique photograph effect to an image.
1.
Click Adjust | Hue/Saturation/Lightness.
2.
On the HSL tab on the Common Tasks panel, move the sliders to adjust the Hue,
Saturation, and Lightness amounts.
3.
Advanced Photo Editor also includes many other special effects filters that have
their own help files. To reach these effects, click Filter | Effects Browser. To
open a filter’s help file, click Help in its dialog box.
Here is a list of all the effects available
*These features are only available in Pro Publisher version
Crosshatching an image
Removing a color cast*
You can use the Crosshatch effect to apply croshatching to an image.
*Color Cast only available in Pro Publisher version
To crosshatch an image:
You can use the Color Cast tool to remove an unwanted hue from an image. For
example, if you take a photo at sunset and the resulting image has a reddish
hue you want to change, you can use the Color Cast tool to remove it.
Click Filter | Artistic, and select Crosshatch.
Example
To remove a color cast from an image:
1.
Click Adjust | Color Cast.
2.
Click an image area that should be white or gray. The color square shows the
color of the original pixel on the left, and of the modified pixel on the right.
3.
If desired, move the slider to specify the color cast removal strength. Higher
settings remove more of the unwanted color.
212
Original image
Croshatched
213
Highlighting image edges
Example
You can use the Edge Detect effect to create a highlighted outline of your image.
After creating a black image, the effect uses colored lines to outline the detail of
an image where significant color differences exist. Greater differences between
colors in the original image produce brighter outline colors.
To create an image with highlighted edges:
Click Filter | Edge Detect, and select Edge Detect.
Original image
Example
Embossed
Creating an image negative
You can use the Negative effect to create a negative of your image. You can also
apply the Negative effect to a negative scanned from a roll of film to produce a
positive image.
To create an image negative:
Click Filter | Color, and select Negative.
Original image
Highlighted edges
Example
Embossing an image
You can use the Emboss effect to create a grayscale relief of an image. You can
To emboss an image:
1.
Click Filter | Artistic, and select Emboss.
Original image
2.
In the Emboss dialog box, specify the options.
Oil painting an image
3.
Click the Proof button to preview your changes.
4.
You can use the Oil Paint effect to give your images a painted appearance. You
can save your options as a preset for future use.
• Click OK to accept your changes and exit the Emboss dialog box.
• Click Cancel to discard your changes and exit the dialog box.
Emboss options
Elevation
Specifies the light source’s elevation on the image. Lower
values produce more shadows and a darker image. Higher
values produce fewer shadows and a lighter image.
Weight
Specifies the amount of relief added to the image. Higher
values increase the relief depth.
Azimuth
Specifies the angle of shadows that extend from the edges
of image details. A value of 0 adds shadows to the right
side, while a value of 180 adds shadows to the left side.
214
Negative image
To create an oil painting from an image:
1.
Click Filter | Artistic, and select Oil Paint.
2.
In the Oil Paint dialog box, specify the options.
3.
Click the Proof button to preview your changes.
4.
• Click OK to accept your changes and exit the Oil Paint dialog box.
• Click Cancel to discard your changes and exit the dialog box.
215
Example
Oil Paint options
Brush Width
Specifies the brush stroke width. Higher values widen the
brush stroke.
Variance
Specifies the color variance in each brush stroke. Higher
values increase the number of colors used in each stroke.
Vibrance
Specifies the vibrancy of colors in the image. Higher values
increase the intensity of image colors.
Original image
Sepia-toned
Adding text*
*Text Effects only available with the Pro Publisher version
Example
Adding text to an image
You can use the Add Text tool to add formatted plain or bubble text to an image.
Adding plain text to an image
Original image
Oil painting
Creating a pencil drawing from an image
You can use the Pencil Drawing effect to create a pencil drawing of an image.
To create a pencil-drawn image:
Click Filter | Artistic, and select Pencil Drawing.
Example
You can add plain text to an image to describe it or to bring attention to image
details.
To add plain text to an image:
1.
In the Editing Tasks area on the Common Tasks panel, click Add Text.
2.
On the Add Text tab, select Plain Text from the Text Style drop-down box.
3.
Type the desired text in the text field.
4.
Specify the Opacity and Font options.
5.
In the display area, do one or both of the following:
• Resize the marquee.
• Drag the marquee to the desired location.
6.
Original image
Pencil-drawn
• Click Apply to attach the text to the image. A new marquee appears on the
upper-left corner of the image.
Adding a sepia tone to an image
• Click Done to attach the text to the image and close the Add Text tool.
You can use the Sepia effect to give your images an antique look.
To add a sepia color to an image:
Adding bubble text to an image
Click Filter | Color, and select Sepia.
You can use talk and thought bubbles to give your images a comic-strip effect.
216
217
To add talk or thought bubble text to an image:
Stem Length
Specifies the length of the bubble stem.
1.
In the Editing Tasks area on the Common Tasks panel, click Add Text.
About opacity
2.
On the Add Text tab, select Talk Bubble or Thought Bubble from the Text Style
drop-down box.
3.
Type the desired text in the text field.
4.
Specify the options.
Opacity determines how visible an effect is when applied to an image or a
selection. Opacity of 100 creates a solid effect, while opacity of 1 results in a
nearly invisible effect. The slider controls opacity, moving the slider to the right
increases opacity.
5.
In the display area, do one or both of the following:
6.
Saving and printing
• Resize the marquee.
Saving an image
• Drag the marquee to the desired location.
You can save an image in one of the supported file formats.
To save an image:
• Click Apply to attach the bubble text to the image. A new marquee appears
on the upper-left corner of the image.
Click File | Save.
• Click Done to attach the bubble text to the image and close the Add Text tool.
can select a format that Advanced Photo Editor supports.
Printing images
Add Text options
Note: If the image is not in a supported format, a dialog box opens in which you
Text Style
Specifies whether to add plain text, or text in a talk or
thought bubble.
You can print your images using the Advanced Photo Editor print utility. You can
specify printer properties, control printer rendering, adjust the size and position
of the image, and add headers, footers, and captions to an image.
Opacity
Specifies the opacity of text when adding plain text, and for both
the bubble and text when adding bubble text.
You can also use the print utility to create and print contact sheets, complete
with headers, footers, and captions specific to each image.
Font
Type
Specifies the font type. The drop-down list displays fonts installed
in your Windows® system folder. Refer to the Windows Help file
for information about adding fonts.
Size
Specifies the font size.
Color picker
Specifies the font color.
Format
Specifies the bold, italic and underline text formats. Text formatting
applies to all text within the marquee.
Fill
Specifies the background color for talk and thought bubbles.
Border
Specifies the border color for talk and thought bubbles.
Thickness
Specifies the border thickness for the talk and thought bubbles.
Moving the slider to the right increases the thickness; moving the
slider all the way to the left removes the border.
218
To print your images:
1.
• To print only the image currently in the main display area, click File | Print.
• To print multiple images, in the Image Browser, select the images you want to
print, right-click on a selected image, and select Print All.
2.
Bubble
Stem Angle
As you change the options, you can view a dynamically updated preview of
the image.
Under Print layout, select one of the following:
• Full page: prints one image on each page. Select a print size from the Print
format area, or click Add to create a custom format.
• Contact sheet: prints thumbnail previews of your images on each page. Set
the options in the Contact sheet format area to define the appearance of your
contact sheet, as well as the number of thumbnails per page.
3.
Select your preferred measurement units from the Units of measurement dropdown list.
Specifies the direction of the bubble stem.
219
4.
On the Printer Options tab, set the options.
Thumbnail options
5.
On the Page Settings tab, set the options.
Colored drop shadow
6.
To add captions, headers, or footers, set the text options.
Creates a drop shadow effect around each thumbnail.
Click the color picker to define a color.
7.
Click Print.
Colored edge fade
Creates a fading frame effect around the image. Click
the color picker to define a color.
Colored matte
Creates a matte effect around each thumbnail. Click
Beveled edges
Creates a beveled edge effect on each thumbnail. This
effect is not displayed in the Preview window.
Creating a contact sheet
You can use the Advanced Photo Editor print utility to create contact sheets:
thumbnail previews of your images arranged on pages. The size of the
thumbnails depends on how many columns and rows the contact sheet displays,
and how much space is displayed between them.
To create a contact sheet:
1.
In the Image Browser, select the images you want to print.
2.
Right-click a selected image and select Print All.
3.
Under Print Layout, select Contact sheet.
4.
In the Contact sheet format area, set the options.
5.
To add captions, headers, or footers, set the text options.
6.
Set the Printer Options and Page Settings.
7.
Click Print.
Contact sheet format options
Thumbnail settings
Page background options
Solid color
Prints a solid color as a background for the page. Click
Tiled image
Prints a tiled image as the background for the page.
Click Browse to locate the picture you want to use.
Setting print options
When printing your images with Advanced Photo Editor, you can specify which
printer you want to use, and set the Printer Options.
To set the Printer Options:
1.
In the Print dialog box, select the Printer Options tab.
2.
On the Printer Options tab, set the options.
Printer options
Size
Specifies the number of columns and rows to create on
each page.
Spacing
Specifies the amount of space between rows or
columns. In the Horizontal and Vertical spin boxes,
type a value to indicate the amount of space to display.
Printer
Select a printer from the drop-down list and click
the Properties button to set its options. Refer to
the printer manufacturer’s help file for more
information.
Frame options
Use thumbnail frame
Creates a frame around each thumbnail.
Margin
Specifies the width of the frame.
Solid color
Specifies the frame’s color. Click the color picker to
define a color.
Tiled image
Specifies an image to use as a frame. Click Browse to
locate the image you want to use.
Color management
Opens a dialog box in which you can specify your
color management settings.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Print range
Select one of the following options:
• All: prints all of the pages in the document.
• Pages from: prints a range of pages. Specify
the first and last pages of the range in the fields.
Resolution
220
Specifies the printer you want to use.
Specifies a resolution in pixels-per-inch (PPI) for
the image. The higher the value, the more dots
per inch, and the higher the resolution of the
221
Filter
printed image. For example, 600 PPI is 360,000
(600 x 600) pixels per square inch.
Number of prints per image Specifies how many copies of each image to print.
The print utility adds pages as required.
Specifies the resampling filter. Click the dropdown list and select one of the following:
• Box: displays considerable tiling or jaggies when
you resize an image.
• Triangle: produces good results for image
reduction and enlargement, but displays sharp
transition lines.
• Bicubic: produces good results with photorealistic images and with images that are
irregular or complex. Uses interpolation to
minimize the raggednes normally asociated
with image expansion.
• Bell: smoothes the image.
• B-Spline: produces smooth transitions, but may
cause excesive blurring.
• Lanczos: produces the sharpest images, but
may also introduce some ringing artifacts.
• Mitchell: produces smooth transitions when
enlarging photo-realistic images. This filter is
good compromise between the ringing effect of
Lanczos and the blurring effect of other filters.
Automatically rotate picture
based on print format
Specifies whether you want the print utility to
determine automatically which orientation to use
for each image. If you select the check box, the
print utility changes each page’s orientation to
best suit the image you are printing.
Maintain aspect ratio
Specifies whether you want the print utility to
maintain the original image’s aspect ratio. Select
one of the following options to indicate how the
print utility should handle the aspect ratio for
oversized images:
• Crop image to fit print format: prints only the
part of the image that fits within the print format.
• Shrink image to fit print format: prints the
entire image, reduced to fit inside the print
format.
Adding text to pages
You can add headers and footers to pages, and captions beneath your images.
To add captions to your printed images:
1.
Click the Caption tab.
Setting image size and positioning
2.
Select Use caption text.
You can use the options in the Print dialog box to adjust and control the size of
the images you are printing, and the positioning of images on each page.
3.
Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options.
4.
In the text field, type the text you want the caption to display.
5.
Click Insert Metadata to insert file-specific information into the caption for each
image.
To set image size and positioning:
1.
In the Print dialog box, select the Page Settings tab.
6.
In the Text alignment drop-down list, select the caption positioning .
2.
On the Page Settings tab, set the options.
7.
To set the maximum number of text lines for each caption to display, select the
Number of lines check box and specify a number in the field.
Page Settings options
To add headers and footers to your printed pages:
1.
Page position
Specifies where to place the image on each page.
Margins
In the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right spin boxes,
type a value or click the arrows in each spin box
to specify the size of the margins.
222
• Click the Header tab and select Use header text.
• Click the Footer tab and select Use footer text.
2.
Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options.
223
3.
In the text field, type the text you want the caption to display.
Warning!
4.
To insert the current page number or the total number of pages into the text, click
Insert Page Number and select an option from the menu.
Color management can be a complex process. If you are not familiar with color
management systems, it is recommended that you accept the default settings
and do not attempt to change any of the options.
5.
In the Text alignment drop-down list, select the header or footer positioning.
6.
To set a maximum number of text lines, select the Number of lines check box
and specify a number in the field.
Creating custom print formats
You can create your own custom image print formats and store them in the Print
dialog box.
To create a custom print format:
1.
In the Print dialog box, select Full page.
2.
In the Print format area, click Add.
3.
In the Add Custom Format dialog box, select a measurement unit from the
Measurement units drop-down list.
4.
Enter the dimensions for the new format in the Format width and Format height
fields.
5.
Click Add.
Before changing the color management settings, make sure you have accurate
color profiles for each of your devices, and any device you want to emulate.
You can obtain a profile from the manufacturer if it was not included in the
device’s software.
To change the color management settings:
1.
Click View | Options | Miscellaneous | Color Management.
2.
In the Color Management Settings dialog box, select or change the options.
3.
Click OK.
Color Management Settings
Enable
Enable color management
Select this check box to enable the Advanced
Photo Editor CMS, and access the other color
management options.
Inserting metadata
Input
Metadata refers to any information embedded within a file. For example, digital
photos can contain information about the type of camera, flash speed, time of
day, image size, and so on.
Use embedded profiles
Sets the CMS to use color profiles embedded in
the image data of .jpg and .tif files.
Default input profile
Specifies the default color profile for all input
devices or images without embedded profiles or
asociated input rules.
Show Profile Details
Displays a list of color profiles currently stored in
the Windows® default directory.
In the Advanced Photo Editor print utility, you can insert metadata into
image captions.
To insert metadata:
1.
In the Print dialog box, on the Caption tab, select Use caption text.
2.
In the text field, position the cursor where you want to display the file information
and click Insert Metadata.
Output
3.
Select the file information you want to include.
Basic color management
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each metadata item you want to add.
Allows you to set specific monitor and printer
profiles, as well as rendering intent.
Proofing
Allows you to emulate another output device on
your monitor or printer and set the rendering
intent for that output. You can preview how an
image would appear on another output device,
such as a printer not currently connected to your
computer.
About color management
The Advanced Photo Editor Color Management System (CMS) helps reduce
color matching problems between the various devices of your computer, such as
the monitor, printer, and scanner. You can set the color management options to
use separate color profiles for each of your devices, or set specific options to
emulate the output of any device for which you have a profile.
224
225
Monitor profile
Specifies the color profile to use with your
monitor.
Printer profile
Specifies the color profile to use with your printer.
Rendering intent
Specifies the rendering intent for your output
devices. The default value for basic output
devices is Perceptual. (All four rendering intents
are defined and explained in the Glossary.)
Emulated device profile
Rendering intent
Save current settings
as defaults
Specifies the color profile of the device you want
your monitor and/or printer to emulate.
Specifies the rendering intent of the emulated
output device. The default value for emulated
devices is Relative Colorimetric. (All four
rendering intents are defined and explained in the
Glossary.)
Saves the current settings as the default color
management settings for Advanced Photo Editor.
Keyboard shortcuts for Advanced Photo Editor
Menu keyboard shortcuts
Shortcut Action
Ctrl + 1
Convert image to black & white
Ctrl + 2
Convert image to 16-color grayscale
Ctrl + 3
Ctrl + 4
Convert image to 16-color
Ctrl + 5
Convert image to 256 colors
Ctrl + 6
Convert image to Hicolor
Ctrl + 7
Convert image to Truecolor
Alt + X
Exit Advanced Photo Editor
Ctrl + A
Select all
Ctrl + B
Blur
Ctrl + C
Copy image or selection to Clipboard
Ctrl + D
Remove noise
Ctrl + E
Open Palette Editor
226
Ctrl + F
Open Photo Correction Wizard
Ctrl + G
Open Red Green Blue tool
Ctrl + H
Open Sharpness tools
Ctrl + I
Invert selection
Ctrl + Q
Clear current selection
Ctrl + P
Open Advanced Photo Editor Print utility
Ctrl + S
Save image
Ctrl + T
Make image negative
Ctrl + U
Open Options dialog box
Ctrl + V
Paste contents of the Clipboard
Ctrl + X
Cut selection to Clipboard
Ctrl + Y
Reapply cancelled change
Ctrl + Z
Cancel change
Ctrl + Shift + C
Open HSL tool
Ctrl + Shift + D
Display Drawing toolbar
Ctrl + Shift + E
Display Common Tasks panel
Ctrl + Shift + G
Display Page toolbar
Ctrl + Shift + H
Display Survey panel
Ctrl + Shift + L
Open Levels tool
Ctrl + Shift + N
Apply Gausian blur
Ctrl + Shift + O
Display Tool Options on the Common Tasks panel
Ctrl + Shift + P
Apply sepia hue
Ctrl + Shift + U
Open Resize tool
Ctrl + Shift + T
Display Main toolbar
Ctrl + Shift + X
Open Exposure tools
F1
Open Help file
Shift + 1
Convert image to black & white
Shift + 2
Shift + 3
227
Shift + 4
Convert image to 16-color
Shift + F8
Eyedropper
Shift + 5
Convert image to 256 colors
Shift + F9
Burn
Shift + 6
Convert image to Hicolor
Shift + F10
Line
Shift + 7
Convert image to Truecolor
Shift + F11
Rectangle
Shift + F2
Crop image
Shift + F12
Ellipse
=
Zoom in on the image
[numpad] /
Display image actual size
Modifying Object Color and Texture
[numpad] *
Display entire image in Display area
[numpad] -
Zoom out of the image
[numpad] +
Zoom in on the image
You can fill almost any object with a color and, in some cases, a texture or photo
as well. For example, you can fill a heart-shaped object with a photo of your
spouse, or simply fill it with the color red. When you fill a graphic with color, a
special effect is created, as in the following example, in which the graphic was
filled with a red color.
Drawing tools keyboard shortcuts for Advanced Photo Editor
Drawing tool shortcuts activate the Tool Options panel on the Common Tasks
panel for the corresponding drawing tool:
Shortcut Drawing tool
Ctrl + Shift + F1
Airbrush
Ctrl + Shift + F2
Flood Fill
Ctrl + Shift + F3
Clone
Note: For borders created in BorderPlus, you need to fill the color within the
BorderPlus program. See Modifying a Border Using BorderPlus.
Ctrl + Shift + F4
Text
1.
On the Design Desk, select the object whose color or texture you want to modify.
Ctrl + Shift + F5
Red-eye Reduction
2.
Ctrl + Shift + F6
Blur
Ctrl + Shift + F7
Sharpen
Ctrl + Shift + F9
Dodge
Ctrl + Shift + F12
Ellipse select
F9
Pencil
Shift + F1
Pan
Shift + F3
Zoom
Shift + F4
Rectangle select
Shift + F5
Lasso select
Shift + F6
Magic Wand select
Shift + F7
Mover
228
A pop-up menu displays.
3.
Choose one of the following options:
• Object — Modify the color of the selected object itself, such as a graphic or a
shape.
• Behind Object — Modify the color of the area behind the object, such as the
background of text in a text box or the background of a shape. (Most graphic
objects do not have a background, as the graphic fills the entire space.)
• Line — Modify the color of a line.
The Color Palette displays.
4.
On the Color tab, select the color you want.
Custom Colors, selecting appropriate options, and then clicking OK to return
to the Color Palette.
229
5.
If the Color Palette appears expanded (with a Texture tab), then you can also do
one of the following on the Color tab:
• Select Blend Style, and then select a blend from the Select Blend area.
• Click and drag the arrow in the Blend Angle area to set the angle of the color
blend.
6.
If the Color Palette appears expanded (with a Texture tab), then to select a texture
or to tint the color or texture, do the following:
• Click the Texture tab and select a texture from the options.
• To tint the selected texture, select an option from the Tint drop-down list.
Note: To remove the texture, click None.
7.
borders and lines. When you add a shadow effect to a text box, the text inside is
shadowed.
1.
3.
4.
If the Color Palette appears expanded (with a Photo tab), then to fill the object or
background with a photo, do the following:
• In the Shadow Settings area, click and drag the Transparency pointer and
the Edge Softnes pointer to give the shadow the desired effect. You can
preview the shadow effect in the Shadow Position area.
• To add a photo, click Import, and then select the photo’s file. Supported
graphic file types include: .bmp, .gif, .jpeg, photo CD files, .pcx, Photoshop
files, .png, .tiff, and .wmf.
the Color Palette.
5.
Click OK in the Color Palette.
Click OK.
The object displays with the new or modified shadow. If you chose to
remove the shadow, it is removed.
• To add or modify a tint to the photo, select a tint from the Tint drop-down list.
8.
• Click the Photo tab.
• If a photo already exists, click the Edit button. See Using the Photo Workshop
to modify photo effects as you want.
2.
The object displays with the effects according to your choices.
Note: If a background color does not display, then one or more graphics may be
blocking the view of the background.
text inside glows.
Modifying the Tint
1.
You can tint the colors of an object for a special effect.
2.
3.
In the Apply a Radiant Glow dialog box, click the Preset Glows tab, and then
1.
On the Design Desk, select the object that you want to tint.
2.
Click the Tint button
3.
Select a percentage for the tint.
4.
The object displays tinted according to your selection.
Note: You can undo the effect by immediately clicking the Undo button
Standard toolbar.
on the
Adding or Modifying Effects
A range of interesting effects can be applied to objects to create dramatic
results. You can add a shadow or a background glow, or soften the edges of a
photograph, for example.
230
Color Palette.
231
5.
Click OK.
The object displays with the new or modified glow. If you chose to
remove the glow, it is removed.
Adding or Modifying a Special Effect
You can add, modify, or remove a special effect to or from most graphics and
shapes. Special effects include softening the edges and adding outlines to
the edges.
1.
2.
Choose Apply Special Effect from the Effects menu.
3.
In the Apply a Special Effect dialog box, click one of the following tabs:
• Soft Edges — Soften the edges of the object
Modifying Multimedia Features
You can modify the sound that you have attached to a project page or to an
object. You can also modify the video clip in your project.
Modifying the Background Sound
You can replace the background sound for a page in your project with another
sound.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page that contains the background sound
you want to modify.
2.
menu displays.
3.
Select Replace Background Sound from the pop-up menu.
• Special Edges — Apply a special effect to the edges of the object
• Outline Edges — Apply an outline to the object
4.
Select an effect from the Preview browser, using the scroll bar to view more
options.
5.
The effect is displayed in the Current Effect area.
Deleting the Background Sound
You can delete the background sound for a page in your project.
1.
Note: To remove a special effect, click No Effect.
6.
Click OK.
The object displays with the special effect applied. If you chose to remove the
effect, it is removed.
Modifying a Graphic Using Advanced Drawing
You can use the Advanced Drawing program to modify a graphic that is on the
Design Desk.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the graphic you want to modify, and then choose
Advanced Graphic Editor from the Edit menu.
2.
3.
232
in the status bar.
Select Delete Background Sound from the pop-up menu.
Modifying the Object Sound
You can modify the sound attached to an object or to text.
1.
From the Design Desk, select the object or text in a text box that contains the
object sound you want to modify.
Note: You can select text by double-clicking the text box, then selecting the
appropriate text.
Modify the graphic using the Advanced Drawing tools and features. For help,
choose Help Topics from the Help menu.
2.
When finished, click Close in the upper-right corner of the Advanced Drawing
window.
3.
The modified graphic displays in your project.
The background sound for the page is deleted.
The Advanced Drawing program displays.
3.
From the Design Desk, navigate to the page that contains the background sound
you want to delete.
Note: You can only modify graphics that are a .WMF type. If the selected graphic
is not this type, then the menu option is grayed-out and unavailable.
2.
Select a different sound file from your computer, and then click Open.
The newly selected background sound is attached to the page.
• Transparent Effects — Apply a pattern of transparency over the object
4.
in the status bar. A pop-up
on the status bar.
Select Replace Sound from the pop-up menu.
233
4.
A different sound is attached to the object.
Deleting the Object Sound
You can delete a sound that is attached to an object or to text.
1.
From the Design Desk, select the object or text in a text box that contains the
object sound you want to modify.
Modifying the Size of a Column or Row
1.
On the Design Desk, select the table.
2.
Position the pointer on a border of the column or row you want to resize.
The pointer changes to an adjuster.
3.
Note: You can select text by double-clicking the text box, then selecting the
appropriate text.
2.
3.
Select Delete Sound from the pop-up menu.
The object sound is deleted.
on the status bar.
Adding Columns and Rows
1.
2.
Position the pointer along the outside border of a row or column at the location
where you want to insert a row or column.
Modifying the Video Clip
You can replace the video clip in your project with another.
1.
From the Design Desk, double-click the video clip object.
The pointer changes to a black arrow.
3.
The Select Video dialog box displays.
2.
Click and drag the border to adjust the size.
Tip: To keep the entire table the same size while only resizing a single column or
row within it, hold down Shift while clicking and dragging the column or row
border.
Click once to select the row or column.
The row or column appears selected (darkened).
Select a video file from your computer, and then click Open.
The newly selected video clip replaces the one you originally selected.
Deleting the Video Clip
1.
From the Design Desk, select the video clip object.
2.
Press Delete.
The video clip is deleted.
Modifying Tables
You can modify a table by creating additional columns and rows or by changing
their size. You can also modify individual or multiple cells (where rows and
columns intersect) by adding text and color.
4.
5.
In the What to Insert area, select the Rows or Columns option, as appropriate,
then type the number of rows or columns to be inserted in the Number to
Insert box.
6.
In the Where to Insert area, select the appropriate option button to insert rows or
columns before or after the selected row or column.
7.
Click OK.
You need to select cells before you can modify or add text to them.
Modifying the Table Format
1.
2.
Choose Auto Format from the Table menu.
3.
In the Auto Format dialog box, select a format from the Table Formats list box.
4.
Click OK.
Choose Insert from the Table menu.
The Insert dialog box displays.
Note: You may need to resize the table to get it to fit where it was originally
positioned.
The table displays in a new format.
234
235
Deleting Columns and Rows
You can delete columns and rows in a table.
Merging Cells
You can merge two or more cells to appear as one cell.
1.
1.
2.
Position the pointer along the outside border of the row or column you want to
delete.
2.
Select the cells you want to merge.
3.
3.
Choose Merge Cells from the Table menu.
The pointer changes to a black arrow.
The selected cells display as one.
Note: If the selected cells contain text, the text will display together in the
merged cell.
• Click once to select a single column or row.
• Click and drag horizontally or vertically to select multiple columns or rows.
The rows or columns appear selected (darkened).
Splitting Cells
You can split a cell that you previously merged back into individual cells again.
1.
2.
Select the cell you want to split.
When selected, the cell appears darkened.
3.
Choose Split Cells from the Table menu.
The selected cell is split.
4.
Choose Delete Column or Delete Row from the Table menu, as applicable.
The columns or rows are deleted.
Selecting Cells
You need to select cells before you can format them.
1.
2.
Click and drag the pointer starting at the first cell you want to select, and then
across or down to select other cells.
Note: To select a single cell, click and drag the pointer starting at that cell, then
across the row or column of the cells around it, and finally back again to leave
only the one cell selected.
The selected cells appear darkened.
Using Fill Down or Fill Right
You can repeat text in every cell across columns or rows by using the Fill
command. The text in the first cell that you selected appears in the other cells.
1.
2.
Select the cells you want to fill. The first cell should contain the text you want to
repeat across the other cells.
3.
Choose one of the following from the Table menu:
• Fill Down — Fill cells in the same column.
• Fill Right — Fill cells in the same row.
Modifying Text in a Table
You can modify the text in a cell of a table just as you would text in a text box.
1.
2.
Click the cell that contains the text you want to modify.
3.
Select the appropriate text, then type new text.
You can format text in a cell as you would text in a text box, adding symbols,
dates, bolding, text justification, and more. Select the text in a cell first, then see
Formatting the Text.
236
237
Formatting Individual Cells in a Table
You can format the color and width of the lines between cells as well as the
background color of cells.
1.
2.
Select the cells that you want to appear in a different format.
3.
Choose Cell Formatting from the Table menu.
4.
In the Cell Formatting dialog box, do one or more of the following:
To change to a different shape, select one from the top of the dialog box.
Tip: You can click More to select from more shapes.
3.
To modify the shape’s color, click Fill Color, and then select a different color.
4.
Select the Hollow checkbox if you want the shape to appear hollow (with no fill
color).
• Click Fill Color to display the Color Palette, and then select a color for the
background of selected cell(s).
5.
Select a different width for the outline of the shape by selecting a width from the
Outline Width box.
• To color the lines between selected cells, select a line from the Preview area.
Click Line Color to display the Color Palette, and then select a color. Repeat
this step until all the lines you want are colored.
6.
To modify the color of the shape’s outline, click Outline Color, and then select a
different color.
7.
• To change the width of the line between selected cells, select a line from the
Preview area, and then use the arrow buttons to select a width from the Line
Width box. Repeat this step to change the width of all the lines you want.
5.
The Add a New Shape dialog box displays.
2.
Click OK.
The cells are formatted according to your choices.
Modifying a Frame for a Graphic
You can modify the frame that surrounds a graphic (photo or art image) by
changing to a different frame.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the graphic that is surrounded by a frame.
Modifying a Line
2.
Choose Apply Frame from the Effects menu.
You can modify the color and thickness of a line or of a line that outlines any
shape or a freehand drawing.
3.
In the Add Frame dialog box, click the Picture Frames tab or the Box Frames tab
for the type of frame you want to apply.
1.
Note: Some graphics don’t allow picture frames.
On the Design Desk, select the line.
4.
2.
3.
Click the Drawing Tools button
then choose Line Format from the submenu.
If you selected the Picture Frames tab, do the following:
• Select Picture Frames from the Collections drop-down list.
• Select a type of frame from the Frame Types list box.
In the Line Format dialog box, use the arrow buttons to select a width in points
from the Line Width box.
• Select a frame from the Preview area on the right.
5.
If you selected the Box Frames tab, do the following:
4.
To select a different style, select one from the Line Style drop-down list.
5.
Click Color, and then select a color from the Color Palette.
• Click a Box option.
6.
If the dialog box still displays, click OK.
• Click Color to display the Color Palette, and then select a color for the boxed
lines.
The line displays formatted according to your choices.
Modifying a Shape
You can replace the shape, or change the color of its background, outline, or the
shape itself. You can also apply effects to a shape, such as shadowing. Shapes
and lines can be resized and moved like any other object.
1.
238
Note: If you change your mind, you can click Remove Frame.
6.
Click OK.
The new frame displays around the graphic.
On the Design Desk, double-click the shape that you want to modify.
239
Modifying a Freestanding Frame
You can modify a freestanding frame in your project by selecting a different one
from The Print Shop’s® collection.
1.
2.
1.
2.
The Select a Frame window displays.
3.
Select the frame you want from the Preview browser.
4.
If you want the inside of the frame to be filled with a color, click Fill inside Area,
and then select a color or texture.
Click OK.
You can modify a border that you created using BorderPlus. You can change the
border’s size, the appearance of graphics within the border, the border’s
background color, and more.
Accessing BorderPlus
If you are creating a border, see Adding a Border Using BorderPlus.
4.
1.
2.
3.
In the BorderPlus program, select the corners or edges that contain the graphic
you want to replace.
Click the Art Gallery button
.
Select a different graphic from the Art Gallery. For more information, see
Searching for graphics.
The selected edges and corners display with the new graphic.
Copying a Graphic to Other Corners and Edges
You can copy a graphic that displays on one edge or corner to other edges and
corners.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the border that you created using BorderPlus.
The BorderPlus program displays.
Click and drag the border vertically, as needed, to resize the border.
If you are modifying a border, do the following:
•
To resize the left and right border, move the pointer to the inside edge until it
Replacing the Graphic in Corners or Edges
The frame displays in your project. You can move or resize the frame to place it
anywhere in your project.
Modifying a Border Using BorderPlus
Click and drag the border horizontally, as needed, to resize the border.
changes to an adjuster.
Select an option from the Frame Types list box.
3.
In the BorderPlus program, to resize the top and bottom, move the pointer to the
inside edge until it changes to an adjuster.
On the Design Desk, double-click the frame.
The frames in that category display in the Preview browser on the right.
5.
Modifying the Size of Borders
In the BorderPlus program, select a single corner or edge that contains a graphic
that you want to copy to another corner or edge. Do this by clicking the corner or
edge.
2.
Click and drag the selected corner or edge to another corner or edge.
3.
The graphic is copied to that corner or edge.
Selecting Corners and Edges
Before you can add or modify a graphic in one or all of the corners or edges of a
border in BorderPlus, you need to select the appropriate corners or edges.
Note: You can also copy a graphic by doing one of the following:
Select a corner, then choose Copy to Corners from the Arrange menu to copy
the graphic to all corners.
In the BorderPlus program, do one of the following:
Select an edge, then choose Copy Across from the Arrange menu to copy the
graphic to the edge that is directly across, or choose Copy to Edges from the
Arrange menu to copy the graphic to all edges.
•
To select a single corner or edge, click it.
•
To select multiple corners or edges, hold down Shift, and then click all the
corners and edges you want.
•
To select only the corners, choose Select Corners from the Border menu.
•
To select only the edges, choose Select Edges from the Border menu.
1.
•
To select all, choose Select All from the Border menu.
The selected items appear highlighted.
2.
The graphic is copied to the selected edges or corners.
Deleting a Graphic from Corners or Edges
you want to delete.
Press Delete.
The graphic is deleted from the selected edges and corners.
240
241
Arranging the Graphic within Corners or Edges
You can rotate a graphic within a corner or edge.
1.
you want to arrange.
2.
Choose one of the following options from the Arrange menu:
You can also use the Paste Special command to paste an object from another
program, such as text from a Microsoft® Word document, and preserve the
original file format. Pasting an object with a specified file format is useful to
preserve the formatting of the original program.
Cutting Objects
• Flip Horizontal — Flip the graphic horizontally.
1.
• Flip Vertical — Flip the graphic vertically.
2.
• Rotate 90 degrees — Rotate the graphic by 90 degrees.
The graphic in selected corners and edges is rotated.
2.
In the BorderPlus program, choose Background Color from the Border menu.
Copying Objects
1.
Select a color, and then click OK.
2.
the Color Palette.
1.
3.
Pasting Objects
You can paste objects onto a page in your project or into another project after
you have cut or copied them to the Windows clipboard.
1.
On the Design Desk, do one of the following:
• Navigate to the page in your project that you want to paste the objects.
The dialog box for the Custom Graphics displays.
Type information and select options to modify the Custom Graphic as you want.
Click the Copy button
The object is now copied to the Windows clipboard. You can now paste a copy of
it on another page or into another project.
To modify a Custom Graphic, double-click it in your project.
2.
On the Design Desk, select one or more objects you want to copy.
Tip: You can also press Ctrl+C to copy.
The border’s background color is modified.
Custom Graphics include personal graphics, initial caps, number graphics, seals,
timepieces, and signatures.
The object is now copied to the Windows clipboard and is no longer visible in your
project. You can now paste it on another page or into another project.
Modifying Custom Graphics
Click the Cut button
Tip: You can also press Ctrl+X to perform the cut.
Modifying the Background Color of the Border
1.
On the Design Desk, select one or more objects you want to cut.
• Open the project to which you want to paste the objects.
2.
Click the Paste button
Tip: You can also press Ctrl+V to paste.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects
The objects are moved or copied to the selected location.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects
You can cut, copy, and paste objects from one page to another and from one
project to another by using the Cut, Copy, and Paste buttons on the Standard
toolbar.
When you “cut” an object, it is removed from the current page in your project and
placed in your computer’s memory, called the Windows clipboard. You can then
“paste” it on a different page or into a different project. When you “copy” an
object, it remains at its current location, but is also made available so you can
“paste” a copy of it into the current project or into another project.
242
Using Paste Special
If you have cut or copied an item from another program, such as Microsoft® Paint
or Microsoft® Word, you can paste this object into your project and preserve its
formatting by using the Paste Special command.
1.
In the other program, cut or copy an item, such as text in Word, for example.
2.
On the Design Desk in The Print Shop®, with a project open, choose Paste
Special from the Edit menu.
The Paste Special dialog box displays.
243
3.
• Select Paste, then select a file format from the As list box to paste the object
into your project with a particular file format.
• Select Paste Link to allow objects to appear in your project while they are still
linked to the program used to create them. This allows you to modify objects
even after you add them to a project.
Note: The Paste Link option is only available if the program file for the object is still
open on your computer.
4.
Note: For borders created in BorderPlus, you need to fill the color within the
BorderPlus program. See Modifying a Border Using BorderPlus.
1.
2.
3.
The object is pasted into your project according to your choices.
Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu.
The Duplicate Object dialog box displays.
3.
Select an option from the Standard Positions list box.
Examples are shown in the Preview area on the right.
4.
• Line — Modify the color of a line.
4.
On the Color tab, select the color you want.
to the Color Palette.
5.
Click OK.
If the Color Palette appears expanded (with a Texture tab), then you can also do
one of the following on the Color tab:
Note: The duplicated objects are automatically grouped. To ungroup them, right-click
them and choose Ungroup from the shortcut menu. You can then reposition the
separate objects to create various effects.
blend.
6.
Modifying Object Color and Texture
You can fill almost any object with a color and, in some cases, a texture or photo
as well. For example, you can fill a heart-shaped object with a photo of your
spouse, or simply fill it with the color red. When you fill a graphic with color, a
special effect is created, as in the following example, in which the graphic was
filled with a red color.
Choose one of the following options:
• Behind Object — Modify the color of the area behind the object, such as the
background of text in a text box or the background of a shape. (Most graphic
objects do not have a background, as the graphic fills the entire space.)
You can use the Duplicate command to copy an object and position the copies
at particular areas in your project.
2.
• Object — Modify the color of the selected object itself, such as a graphic or a
shape.
Duplicating an Object
Select an object you want to duplicate.
Click OK.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the object whose color or texture you want to modify.
If the Color Palette appears expanded (with a Texture tab), then to select a texture
or to tint the color or texture, do the following:
• Click the Texture tab and select a texture from the options.
Note: To remove the texture, click None.
7.
If the Color Palette appears expanded (with a Photo tab), then to fill the object or
background with a photo, do the following:
• Click the Photo tab.
• To add a photo, click Import, and then select the photo’s file. Supported
graphic file types include: .bmp, .gif, .jpeg, photo CD files, .pcx, Photoshop
files, .png, .tiff, and .wmf.
• If a photo already exists, click Edit. See Using the Photo Workshop to modify
photo effects as you want.
244
245
• To add or modify a tint to the photo, select a tint from the Tint drop-down list.
8.
Arranging and Sizing Objects
You can move, size, rotate, and further arrange objects in your project.
The object displays with the effects according to your choices.
Note: If a background color does not display, then one or more graphics may be
blocking the view of the background.
Selecting Objects
Before you can modify or arrange one or more objects, you need to select it (or
them). A selected object displays with handles around it in your project.
Modifying the Tint
You can tint the colors of an object for a special effect.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the object that you want to tint.
2.
Click the Tint button
3.
Select a percentage for the tint.
The object displays tinted according to your selection.
Note: You can undo the effect by immediately clicking the Undo button
Standard toolbar.
on the
Adding or Modifying Effects
A range of interesting effects can be applied to objects to create dramatic
results. You can add a shadow or a background glow, or soften the edges of a
photograph, for example.
•
Click an object to select it.
•
To select more than one object, hold down the Shift key, and then click each
object you want to select.
•
Position the pointer on a blank portion of the project, then click and drag
completely around the objects that you want to select.
•
If the object you want to select is layered underneath another one so that you
cannot click it, then press Tab until the object you want is selected.
Deleting an Object
1.
Select the object you want to delete.
2.
Press Delete.
Handles display around selected objects.
Modifying a Form Object
1.
Double-click the form object that you want to edit.
Grouping Objects
2.
A dialog box displays asking if you want to ungroup the objects. Click Yes.
You can group a set of objects so that you can move, size, and apply coloring to
them as if they were a single object.
Note: If no dialog box displays when you double-click the object, you can type
your text directly.
3.
To edit a text box, double-click the box and type the new text.
1.
On the Design Desk, select all the objects that you want to group. To do this, hold
down Shift and click each one.
Each selected object displays with handles.
4.
To edit a shape, double-click the shape and select a new one in the Add a New
Shape dialog box.
Note: When you are finished modifying a form object you can press Shift while
selecting each element, then choose Group from the Arrange menu.
246
247
2.
Choose Group from the Arrange menu.
2.
Click and drag from anywhere inside a selected object to the position you want.
The objects are grouped as one, displaying one set of handles around the entire
set. You can now move, size and apply coloring to all the objects at once.
3.
When finished, release the mouse button.
Ungrouping Objects
The objects are moved to the new position on your project page.
Sizing an Object
You can ungroup objects that you have previously grouped, allowing you to
move, size, and modify each object separately.
1.
On the Design Desk, select an object that you want to size.
Note: If objects in a QuickStart layout project seem unresponsive when you
double-click them, the objects may be grouped.
2.
Position the pointer over a handle until it changes to a double-sided arrow.
3.
Click and drag the handle away from the center of the object to increase size, or
toward the center to decrease size.
1.
On the Design Desk, select the group.
2.
Choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu.
Note: Click and drag a corner handle to increase or decrease both the height and
the width of the object proportionally.
Each object that was in the group now displays with its own set of handles.
Click and drag a top or bottom handle to increase or decrease the height of the
object.
Click and drag a right or left handle to increase or decrease the width of the
object.
To size a line and keep it either horizontal, vertical, or at a 45-degree angle as
you click and drag, hold down Shift while you drag the pointer.
4.
Moving Objects
When finished, release the mouse button.
The object displays resized.
You can move one or more objects on the project page. When you move multiple
objects at the same time, they remain in position relative to one another.
Positioning Objects
To move objects to another page, or to another project, see Cutting, Copying, and
Pasting Objects.
You can position objects to appear in a particular, preset position on the
project page.
1.
On the Design Desk, select one or more objects that you want to move.
1.
Tip: To select multiple objects, hold down Shift and click each one.
Each selected object displays with handles.
On the Design Desk, select one or more objects that you want to position.
Note: To select multiple objects, hold down Shift and click each one.
2.
Choose Position from the Arrange menu, then select one of the following options
from the submenu:
• Center on Page — Center selected objects on the page.
• Center Horizontally — Center selected objects between the left and the right
sides of the page.
248
249
• Center Vertically — Center selected objects between the top and the bottom
sides of the page.
• More — Display the Position & Size dialog box, then continue with the
following steps.
3.
If you selected the More submenu option, then in the Position & Size dialog box,
click the Position tab and select one or more of the following options:
• Select the Left, Center, or Right options in the Horizontal and/or Vertical areas
to place the object at the corresponding position on the project page.
• Select Space Equally to center the object vertically or horizontally.
Rotating by Specific Degrees
• Select At, and then type the number of inches between the left edge of the
object and the left side of the page. Enter a negative number (for example, -3)
to space the object from the right side of the page.
You can rotate an object by specific degrees.
1.
• Select No Change to return the object to its original position in each
dimension.
• Click Reset to return the object to its original position and size.
4.
2.
Click the Rotation Indicator
on the status bar.
Click OK in the Position & Size dialog box.
The selected objects display positioned according to your choices.
On the Design Desk, select an object that you want to rotate.
Handles appear around the object.
3.
• Select an option for the degree of rotation you want.
Rotating an Object
• To select a custom degree of rotation, select More. In the Custom Rotation
dialog box, type the degrees for the rotation in the Rotation box, and then
click OK.
You can rotate any object so that it appears at a different angle. You do so using
the rotation handle that appears in any selected object.
1.
2.
On the Design Desk, select an object that you want to rotate.
Flipping Objects
You can arrange an object to appear upside down or right to left by flipping it
horizontally or vertically.
Position the pointer on the rotation handle until it changes to a rotation pointer.
1.
On the Design Desk, select an object.
2.
Choose Flip from the Arrange menu, and then choose one of the following option:
• Horizontal — Flip the object from top to bottom.
• Vertical — Flip the object from left to right.
3.
250
Click and drag the rotation handle until the object appears at the angle you like.
• Both — Flip the object both horizontally and vertically.
251
Layering Objects
Objects can exist on top of each other in layers. One object may be partially or
completely hidden from another one that is on top of it. You can bring an object
to the top layer, send it to the back layer, or otherwise change its layering.
1.
On the Design Desk, select an object whose layering you want to change.
Tip: If the object is layered underneath another one so that you cannot click it,
then press Tab until the object you want is selected.
Handles appear around the selected object.
2.
Choose Layer from the Arrange menu, then select one of the following options:
• Bring to Front — Bring the selected object to the top layer.
• Send to Back — Send the selected object to the bottom layer.
• Forward One Layer — Bring the selected object up one layer.
• Back One Layer — Send the selected object to back one layer.
The object now appears in a new layer among the other objects.
Using Rulers and Guides
You can use rulers and guides to help you place objects in the project, especially
when trying to align more than one object. Rulers can be displayed vertically and
horizontally in the project window, and show relative spacing in inches. You can
choose to “snap” objects to the ruler settings by 1/4th of an inch. The following
illustration is a ruler.
Displaying and Hiding Rulers
On the Design Desk with a project open, choose Rulers from the View menu to
display or hide the vertical and horizontal rulers.
Note: Rulers display if a check mark appears next to Rulers in the View menu;
otherwise, the rulers are hidden.
Guides are lines that can be displayed vertically or horizontally across the
project to help you align objects to them on the page. You can move the guides
to the position you want, or you can choose to lock the guides into a selected
position. You can also choose to “snap” objects to the guide lines. The following
illustration contains guidelines in blue.
Snapping an Object to Rulers
When the Snap to Rulers command is selected, objects will “snap” to a quarter
of an inch of the vertical and horizontal rulers, whether the rulers are displayed
or not.
•
On the Design Desk with a project open, choose Snap to Rulers from the Arrange
menu to turn this command On or Off.
Note: Snap to Rulers is on if it displays with a check mark in the Arrange menu;
otherwise, this command is off.
252
253
Adding Guides
1.
On the Design Desk with a project open, choose Add Guide from the Arrange
menu, and then select Vertical to display a vertical guide or Horizontal to display a
horizontal guide.
A guide displays in the project.
Note: If you do not see the guide, choose Guides from the View menu.
2.
To move the guide to the location you want in the project window, do the following:
• Position the pointer on a guide. The pointer changes to an adjuster.
• Click and drag the guide horizontally or vertically, as applicable, to the desired
location.
The guide displays, positioned where you want.
Displaying and Hiding Guides
•
On the Design Desk with a project open, choose Guides from the View menu to
display or hide the guides that you have added to the project window.
Note: Guides display if a check mark appears next to Guides in the View menu;
otherwise, the guides are hidden. If there is a check mark and still no guides are
displayed, then you must first add a guide.
Locking and Unlocking Guides
Once you have added guides to the project window, you can lock them into
place so that you don’t accidentally move them. You will need to unlock the
guides in order to remove them.
•
On the Design Desk, choose Lock Guides from the Arrange menu to lock or
unlock guides.
Note: Guides are locked if a check mark appears next to Lock Guides in the Arrange
menu; otherwise, the guides are unlocked.
Modifying Project Pages
You can add or delete pages to some types of projects. You can also fill the
background pages, or panels, of a project with a color, texture, or sound.
Navigating a Project on the Design Desk
On the Design Desk, certain types of projects have more than one page. For
example, a card can have a Front, Inside, and Back page; a calendar may have
12 pages, one for each month in the year. You will need to navigate to the
appropriate page in the project before you can add or modify objects on that
page.
In addition, certain project types also use master pages. A master page can
contain background objects, effects, or colors that you want to have appear on
all project pages. Some projects have both a right and a left master page. You
will need to navigate to the appropriate master page before you can add or
modify objects on that page.
Adding Pages
You can add pages to Newsletter and Web page projects. You can add either
blank pages, or copies of an existing page.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page after which you want to add a page.
2.
Choose Pages from the Insert menu.
3.
In the Add Pages dialog box, type the number of pages you want to add in the
Number of pages to add box.
4.
In the Where area, select the appropriate option button to determine where to
place the added pages.
5.
In the Contents area, do one of the following:
• Select Add Blank Pages to add blank pages.
Snapping an Object to a Guide
When the Snap to Guides command is selected, objects will “snap” to the
vertical or horizontal guide when close to the guide.
•
On the Design Desk with a project open, choose Snap to Guides from the
Arrange menu to turn this command on or off.
Note: Snap to Guides is on if it displays with a check mark in the Arrange menu;
otherwise, this command is off.
Removing Guides
1.
Position the pointer on a guide. The pointer changes to an adjuster.
2.
Click and drag the guide horizontally or vertically, as applicable, off the screen (all
the way to the top or to the right of the screen).
• Select Add Copies of Page, and then type a page number into the field to
add copies of the indicated page to your project.
6.
Click OK.
The pages are added to your project.
Deleting Pages
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Delete Pages from the Edit menu.
2.
In the Delete Pages dialog box, type the starting page to be deleted in the Delete
Pages From box and the ending page you want to delete in the To box.
The guide is removed.
254
255
The entire range of pages will be deleted, including the numbers you typed. To
delete one page, type the same number into both boxes.
3.
Click OK.
Modifying Panel Color and Texture
You can add or modify color and texture on the background pages of a project.
1.
The indicated pages are deleted.
Adding Page Numbers
2.
On the Design Desk with a newsletter type project open, navigate to the right
master page.
2.
Add a text box to the location on the master page that you want to add a number.
3.
Choose Add Page Number from the Text menu.
• Select the color from the options.
Return to the newsletter page by choosing Return to Page from the View menu.
blend.
4.
Displaying and Hiding Master Page Objects
Navigate to the appropriate page in your project.
2.
To display the elements on the master pages, choose Display Master Page Items
from the View menu.
A check mark displays next to this command in the menu.
3.
To hide the elements on the master pages again, choose Display Master Page
Items from the View menu again to remove the check mark.
Adding or Modifying Panel Effects
The panel of a project on the Design Desk repressents the background of a
project. You can apply colors, textures, watermarks, and backdrop graphics
directly to the panel of your project. Because the panel always sits behind any
other objects, the effect you create becomes a background for your project.
Note: A project can have only one backdrop or watermark at a time. Therefore, when
you select a new backdrop it replaces the previous one.
256
To add or modify a texture, or to tint the selected color or texture, click the Texture
tab and do one or more of the following:
• Select a texture from the options.
A master page can contain background objects, effects, or colors that you want
to have appear on all project pages. On any particular page in your project, you
may want to hide master page objects or display them.
1.
On the Color tab, do one or more of the following:
Note: You can select even more colors by clicking More, clicking Define Custom
Colors, selecting appropriate options, and then clicking OK to return to the Color
Palette.
The number symbol displays with a page number.
Note: If you are designing a double-sided newsletter, repeat these steps to place a
number on the left master page.
on the Object toolbar, and then choose
3.
A number symbol (#) displays in the text box.
4.
Click the Effects button
Insert Panel Color & Texture from the submenu.
You can add page numbers to the master page of a newsletter project only.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page to whose background you want to add
a color or texture.
• To tint only the color, without using a texture, click None in the Recent
Textures area, and then select an option from the Tint drop-down list.
5.
The page displays with the effects according to your choices.
Adding or Modifying a Backdrop
The Print Shop® comes with a large collection of professionally designed
backdrops. Backdrops are available for all projects except labels. Some
backdrops are complete works of art, while others are attractive tiled patterns.
1.
Insert Backdrop from the submenu.
The Select a Backdrop dialog box displays.
2.
To narrow your search to backdrops of a particular category, scroll through the list
on the left until you find the name of the category you want, and then click the
plus (+) symbol next to it to display subcategories.
3.
Select a category or subcategory.
257
The backdrops display in the Preview area on the right.
4.
Select an option from the Type drop-down list to narrow your search to certain
types of backdrops, such as Designer Looks or Illustrations.
5.
Select the backdrop you want from the Preview area on the right.
6.
Click Color, and then select a main color for the backdrop from the Color Palette.
7.
Select a percentage of tint from the Tint drop-down list.
8.
The new or modified backdrop is applied to the open project.
Adding or Modifying a Watermark
You can add or modify watermark text on the background of your project.
1.
Insert Watermark from the submenu. The Create a Watermark dialog box
displays.
2.
Type the text you want as your watermark into the Enter Watermark Text box. The
watermark displays in the Preview area on the right.
3.
Select the appropriate font for the watermark from the Font drop-down list.
4.
To adjust the spacing above and below the watermark text, click Spacing.
5.
6.
• Click and drag the arrow in the Blend Angle area to set the angle of the
color blend.
4.
To add or modify a texture, or to tint the selected color or texture, click the Texture
tab and do one or more of the following:
• Select a texture from the options.
• To tint only the color, without using a texture, click None in the Recent
Textures area, and then select an option from the Tint drop-down list.
5.
Click the OK button in the Color Palette. The page displays with the effects
according to your choices.
Removing a Backdrop or Watermark
To remove a backdrop or watermark from your project, click the Effects button
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Delete
Backdrop/Watermark from the submenu.
Exporting a Backdrop
You can export the selected backdrop to the computer disk.
1.
In the Save in drop-down list, select the appropriate folder in which to save the
backdrop file.
Click Color, and then select a color for the watermark from the Color Palette.
2.
Type a name for the folder in the File name box.
Select a percentage of tint from the Tint drop-down list.
3.
Select the appropriate file type from the Save as Type drop-down list.
7.
Click and drag the arrow in the Text Angle area to angle the watermark as you want.
4.
8.
If you want to save the graphic file with a size other than its original, type the
number of pixels in the Image Size area.
The new or modified watermark is applied to the open project.
Modifying Panel Color and Texture
You can add or modify color and texture on the background pages of a project.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page to whose background you want to add
a color or texture.
2.
Insert Panel Color & Texture from the submenu. The Color Palette displays.
3.
On the Color tab, do one or more of the following:
• Select the color from the options.
Note: If the Maintain aspect ratio checkbox is selected and you change the size of
the graphic, then the length and width of the graphic will resize proportionally.
5.
Click Save.
Adding or Modifying a Color Set
You can select, create, and apply custom color sets for your entire project, which
helps you create consistent, professional looking documents. When you apply a
color set to one or more projects, The Print Shop® asigns default colors to the
panel, text, lines, and other attributes of the projects.
Note: You can select even more colors by clicking More, clicking Define Custom
Colors, selecting appropriate options, and then clicking OK to return to the
Color Palette.
258
259
Creating a Color Set
You can create a color set for a project, and then apply it to other projects.
1.
On the Design Desk, click the Color button
on the Standard toolbar,
and then choose Edit Color Sets from the pop-up menu.
The Color Set dialog box displays.
2.
In the Panel Color area, click Color, and then select a default color for the
background of your project.
3.
In the Text Font Color area, click Color, and then select a default color for the
text in your project.
4.
In the Line Color area, click Color, and then select a default color for lines in your
project.
5.
In the Headline Font Color area, click Color, and then select a default color for
the headline fonts in your project.
6.
In the Shape Fill Color area, click Color, and then select a default color for
shapes in your project.
• To current project from this point forward — Update the asigned color set
without affecting existing objects
• To entire project — Update the color set asignment and update existing
objects
4.
Click OK.
Depending on your selections, the selected color set is applied to the current
project.
Modifying a Color Set
You can modify a custom color set or delete it.
1.
2.
3.
Select the color set that you want to delete from the Saved Sets drop-down list.
Click Delete Sets.
A message displays, asking you to confirm the deletion.
7.
Click Save Set As. The Save Set As dialog box displays.
8.
Type a name for the color set you created, and then click OK.
4.
9.
Select one of the following options from the Color Set Asignment drop-down list:
Note: Projects using this color set remain as is.
• Do not asign to current project — Ensure that no changes are made to the
current project
• To current project from this point forward — Update the asigned color set
without affecting existing objects
• To entire project — Update the color set asignment and update existing
objects
Click OK.
Adding a Background Sound
You can add a background sound to each page in your project.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page in your project to which you want to
add a background sound.
10. Click OK.
Depending on your selections, the colors of the current project are updated.
Applying a Color Set
You can apply one of many preconfigured custom color sets to a project.
1.
2.
Select a color set option from the Saved Sets drop-down list.
3.
Select one of the following options from the Color Set Asignment drop-down list:
2.
on the status bar, and then select Add
Background Sound.
3.
4.
A background sound is attached to the page.
Note: You can preview the sounds in your Web project. To do so, see Previewing
Web Pages.
• Do not asign to current project — Ensure that no changes are made to the
current project
260
261
Modifying the Background Sound
You can replace the background sound for a page in your project with
another sound.
1.
2.
in the status bar.
Select Replace Background Sound from the pop-up menu.
4.
1.
The newly selected background sound is attached to the page.
Modifying Certain Project Types
The Print Shop® includes special editing features for modifying cards, calendars,
and Web pages. You can convert a quarter-fold card to a half-fold card and vice
versa. You can also modify particular aspects of a calendar or Web pages.
Converting Cards
On the Design Desk, with the half-fold card project open, choose Card
Converter from the Tools menu.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page that contains the background sound
you want to modify.
3.
Converting a Half-fold Card to a Quarter-fold
You can convert a half-fold card project into a quarter-fold card.
The Card Converter dialog box displays.
2.
Click Finish.
The new quarter-fold card displays.
Note: The original half-fold card remains open underneath.
Modifying a Calendar
You can modify many aspects of a calendar, including the style of the calendar
(lines, color, weekday spellings, and more), the text style used for the days and
dates, the time period of the calendar, and the way the title appears. You can
also add a graphic to the calendar page or to specific dates.
Modifying the Calendar Style
You can modify the appearance of lines as well as weekday names and
spellings in your calendar.
1.
With The Print Shop Card Converter, you can convert a half-fold card project to
a quarter-fold card or change a quarter-fold card into a half-fold card.
On the Design Desk, choose Calendar Settings from the Edit menu, and then
select Calendar Style.
®
Converting a Quarter-fold Card to a Half-fold
You can convert a quarter-fold card project into a half-fold card.
1.
The Calendar Style dialog box displays.
2.
• Text Only — The weekdays appear as text only, without a box around each
weekday.
On the Design Desk, with the quarter-fold card project open, choose Card
• Boxed Text — Each weekday appears in a box.
Converter from the Tools menu.
The Half-fold Greeting Card dialog box displays.
2.
3.
Select the type of paper, or card stock, for the half-fold card from the Choose a
In the Weekday Names area, select one of the following option buttons:
• Reversed Text — The weekdays appear with a dark background.
3.
In the Weekday Spelling area, select one of the following option buttons:
Card Stock list box.
• Initials — Display initials for the weekdays.
Click Finish.
• Abbreviations — Display abbreviations for the weekdays.
• Full Names — Display the full spellings of the weekdays.
The new half-fold card displays.
Note: The original quarter-fold card remains open underneath.
4.
In the Lines area, select one of the following option buttons:
• None — Display no calendar lines.
• Horizontal — Display only horizontal lines.
• All lines — Display both horizontal and vertical lines in the calendar.
5.
262
Select a shadow effect from the Shadow drop-down list.
263
6.
Select the Outline checkbox to outline the entire calendar into a grid.
7.
To color the lines of the calendar, click Line Color, select a color from the Color
8.
Click OK in the Calendar Style dialog box.
The calendar displays with the effects, according to your choices.
Modifying the Month and Year
You can modify the calendar’s starting date.
1.
select Date.
2.
In the Calendar Date dialog box, select one or more of the following options:
• Use the arrow buttons to select the year from the Year box.
• Note: Click Default to return to the calendar’s default style settings.
• Select the appropriate starting month for the calendar from the Month dropdown list.
Modifying Calendar Fonts
You can modify the way the text appears for the days and the dates in the
calendar.
1.
select one of the following options from the submenu:
• Date number font — Modify the font style for the date numbers.
• Weekday name font — Modify the font style for the days.
The Font Format dialog box displays.
2.
On the Font tab, do one or more of the following:
• Select a font from the Font list box.
• Select a font style from the Font Style list box.
• Select a font size from the Size list box.
• Click Color to display the Color Palette, and then select a color.
• Select the appropriate checkboxes for Underline, Small Caps, White Border,
or All Caps.
3.
To create special effects, click the Effects tab and do one or more of the
following:
• In the Fill Pattern area, select an option from the drop-down list, and then
click Color to select a color.
• In the Outline area, select an option from the drop-down list, and then click
Color to select a color for the outline. You can also click More, select a
specific line format, and then click OK in the Line Format dialog box.
• In the Shadow area, select an option from the drop-down list, then click the
Color button to select a color for the shadow.
4.
• Select the appropriate starting week for the calendar from the Week dropdown list.
Note: You can click Now to adjust the starting date for the calendar to today’s date.
3.
Modifying the Calendar Title
You can change the text of the calendar’s title. You may want to do this, for
example, if you want the month to be in a different language.
•
On the Design Desk, double-click the calendar’s title, and then type a new title.
Adding a Graphic to a Date
You can add a graphic to a specific date on the calendar.
1.
On the Design Desk, select a date in the calendar.
2.
Choose Calendar Settings from the Edit menu, and then select Choose Date.
3.
Search for a graphic in the Art Gallery, and then select it.
The selected graphic displays on the selected calendar date.
Adding or Modifying Text on a Date
You can add text, such as birthday reminders, to a specific date on the calendar.
1.
On the Design Desk, select a date in the calendar.
2.
Choose Calendar Settings from the Edit menu, and then select Edit
Date Text.
An I-beam displays in the text.
Click OK in the Font Format dialog box.
The fonts for the numbers or days of the week are formatted according to
your selections.
Click OK.
3.
To add text, begin typing.
4.
To modify the font style, select the text, and then choose an appropriate font from
the Font Style drop-down list
264
.
265
5.
To modify the font size, select the text, and then choose an appropriate font size
from the Font Size drop-down list
6.
.
Click outside of the date to view the results.
Coloring the Graphic on a Date
You can add a color effect to a graphic on a specific date in the calendar.
1.
2.
On the Design Desk, select a date in the calendar that contains a graphic.
Choose Calendar Settings from the Edit menu, and then select Date Picture
Color.
3.
Select a color, and then click OK.
• Note: You can select from even more colors by clicking More, clicking Define
to the Color Palette. Then click OK in the Color Palette.
The graphic in the date on the calendar displays with a color effect.
Navigation
If you plan to have more than one page in your Web project, think about how
your audience will move from one Web page to the next (or navigate) in your
Web site. The way you organize information will affect the way you design your
Web site.
Typically it is a good idea to have hyperlinks or hotspots on each page that
connect to the rest of the pages in the site. Hyperlinks and hotspots are places
on the Web page that take viewers to another place in the Web site when they
click them.
Try to keep the navigation logical and consistent. The Print Shop’s® Art Gallery
contains many graphics especially for Web pages and you can use them to
create navigation in your Web project. You can reuse them on each page to
make navigation easy. Some QuickStart layout Web projects already have
navigation buttons you can customize to suit your needs.
Use of Graphics
Graphic objects on a Web site may considerably increase the time required to
download and display the Web page from the Internet. For this consideration, try
to keep graphics small.
Clearing the Graphic or Text from a Date
You can clear the graphic and text from a date on the calendar.
1.
On the Design Desk, select a date in the calendar that contains a graphic or text.
Formatted Text
2.
Choose Calendar Settings from the Edit menu, then select Clear date.
Not all text formatting converts to HTML. For instance, The Print Shop® text that
has been stretched, rotated, or filled-in with a pattern will be converted into
graphics when you publish your Web project, as will The Print Shop® headlines.
For more information, see Controlling Conversion of Text to Graphics.
The graphic or text is cleared from the date in the calendar.
Modifying a Web Project
The Print Shop® makes it easy for you to create and publish Web projects. You
can use Web pages to create online photo albums, resumes, business, or
organization Web sites.
Use one of The Print Shop’s® QuickStart Layouts for a Web project and customize
it to fit your needs or create a Web page from Scratch.
You can add, modify, and arrange objects on a Web page as you would in any
other project. You can also turn text into hyperlinks, graphics into hotspots, and
add sound and video to your Web project. When you click a hyperlink or hotspot,
another Web page displays.
Note: Web projects are not available in some versions of The Print Shop .
®
Web Page Design Tips
When you design Web pages, keep the following special considerations in mind:
266
Other Tips
•
Use standard fonts, such as Arial, Courier, Times, and Wingdings. If you use
unusual fonts or formatting, they may not display properly on other computers.
•
Use text sizes between 10 and 30 points.
•
Single-space all text.
•
For best legibility, keep most of your text left-aligned.
•
Avoid tabs. They are converted into spaces in HTML.
•
Don’t underline text unless it’s a hyperlink.
•
If you add color to text, be sure it’s readable against the page background. Avoid
using the color used for hyperlinked text.
•
Use the same color to consistently identify hyperlinks.
•
Avoid rotated, shadowed, and stretched text.
267
Setting and Modifying Web Page Properties
Page properties allow you to set the background color, add a textured
background, or change the color of hyperlinks in your Web projects. You can
apply these changes one page at a time or apply them to all Web pages in your
project.
1.
On the Design Desk, with a Web project open, choose Page Properties from
the Web menu.
2.
In the Web Page Properties dialog box, select a color for the Web page(s) by
selecting a color from the Color drop-down list in the Background Properties area.
3.
To add a texture, click Browse to display the Art Gallery, and then search for a
graphic to place into Web page(s) as a background texture.
4.
Select the Use Design Checker checkbox to activate the Design Checker. The
Design Checker automatically displays when you publish your Web page to offer
tips for reducing the amount of time it will take to view your Web page.
5.
Select the Display Warning checkbox to display a warning message when you
save a Web page that may overwrite (replace) an existing one.
6.
Click OK.
You are now ready to publish your Web project.
Adding or Modifying a Hyperlink
You can turn text in your Web project into hyperlinks so that when you click it,
another Web page or file is displayed.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the appropriate text box.
2.
Select the text from which you want to create or modify a hyperlink.
In Text Colors, select the appropriate options from the drop-down lists to
color hyperlinks.
3.
Choose Links from the Web menu.
Note: A non-visited hyperlink is one in which the user has not clicked. A visited
hyperlink is one in which the user has clicked. An active hyperlink is one in
which the pointer is positioned over, about to be clicked.
4.
In the Hyperlink dialog box, in the Create a Link to area, select an option for the
type of hyperlink you want to use.
Note: You can click No Texture if you change your mind.
4.
5.
Select the Apply to All Pages checkbox to apply these properties to all Web
pages, not just the open Web page in your project.
6.
Click OK.
Web Page properties are set or modified.
Note: Click Apply to apply the settings to the currently open project.
Setting and Modifying Publishing Properties
When you are ready to publish your Web project on the Internet, you will need to
save your Web project with a file name that is understood by your Internet
Service Provider (ISP). Some ISPs require that you call your page “index.html,”
while others require you to call it “Home.html.”
Before you publish your Web project online, you will need to call your ISP to find
out what to call your main Web page. Then set the publishing properties as
follows.
1.
On the Design Desk with a Web project open, choose Web Publishing
Properties from the Web menu.
2.
In the Web Publishing Properties dialog box, select or type a name for your home
page in the Home Page File Name box.
3.
Select or type the appropriate file extension in the HTML File extension box. The
default is .HTML.
268
You can link text to an Web page, another page in your project, a file on your
computer, or an e-mail address.
5.
In the Link Information area, specify the location of the file or page or type an email address, as appropriate.
6.
Click OK.
After you publish your Web project, when you click the hyperlink, the file, Web
page, or e-mail browser will display, according to your selections.
Removing a Hyperlink
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click the text box that contains the hyperlink.
2.
Select the text that contains the hyperlink you want to remove.
3.
Choose Links from the Web menu.
4.
In the Hyperlink dialog box, click Remove.
The Web page displays with the hyperlink removed.
Adding or Modifying a Hotspot
You can create an invisible “hotspot” anywhere in your Web project, such as over
a graphic. When you click the hotspot, another page or file is displayed.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Hotspots from the Web menu.
The pointer changes to a croshair.
269
2.
Click and drag a hotspot over a graphic or any other portion of the Web page.
4.
In the Where area, select the appropriate option button to determine where to
place the added pages.
5.
In the Contents area, do one of the following:
The Hyperlink dialog box displays.
3.
In the Create a Link to area, select an option for the type of hyperlink you want to
use.
• Select Add Blank Pages to add blank pages.
• Select Add Copies of Page, and then type a page number into the box to
add copies of the indicated page to your project.
You can link text to an Internet page, another page in your project, a file on your
computer, or an e-mail address.
4.
5.
In the Link Information area, specify the location of the file or page, or type an email address, as appropriate.
Click OK.
After you publish your Web project, when you click the hotspot, the file, page, or
e-mail browser will display, according to your selections.
Removing a Hotspot
1.
6.
Deleting Pages
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Delete Pages from the Edit menu.
2.
In the Delete Pages dialog box, type the starting page to be deleted in the Delete
Pages From box and the ending page you want to delete in the To box.
On the Design Desk and Web page, select the hotspot.
The entire range of pages will be deleted, including the numbers you typed. To
delete one page, type the same number into both boxes.
Tip: If you cannot see it, press Tab until the hotspot is selected.
2.
Press Delete.
Controlling Conversion of Text to Graphics
The Print Shop® gives you control over the conversion of text (and its text box) to
a graphic on a Web page.
Note: The Print Shop® text that has been stretched, rotated, or filled-in with a
pattern will be converted into graphics, as will The Print Shop® headlines.
1.
On the Design Desk, select a text box.
2.
Choose HTML Text Format from the Web menu, and then select one of the
following options:
3.
Previewing Web Pages
You can preview your Web projects before you publish them. When you preview
your Web page, you can hear any sounds and view any video that you have
attached to your Web page. The Print Shop® converts your Web project to HTML
format, opens your default Web browser, and shows you the Web project.
1.
1.
On the Design Desk, navigate to the page after which you want to add a page.
2.
Choose Pages from the Insert menu.
3.
In the Add Pages dialog box, type the number of pages you want to add in the
Number of pages to add box.
270
On the Design Desk, choose Preview Web Site from the Web menu.
Your Web pages display in your Web browser.
Note: If the Design Checker or Warnings are turned on in the Web Publishing
Properties settings, you may see some informational dialog boxes first. Click
Continue in these dialog boxes to continue.
• Keep as Text — Never convert the selected text box to a graphic.
Adding Pages
You can add pages to Newsletter and Web page projects. You can add either
blank pages or copies of an existing page.
Click OK.
The indicated pages are deleted.
• Automatic — Allow The Print Shop® to choose when to convert a text box to
a graphic. This is the default setting.
• Publish as Graphic — Always convert the selected text box to a graphic.
Click OK.
The pages are added to your project.
2.
When finished viewing, close the Web browser and return to The Print Shop®.
Publishing Web Pages
Once you have created and modified Web pages, with all the hyperlinks and
hotlinks you want, you are ready to publish the Web pages as HTML files to a
folder or to your personal Web site.
271
• To change the word everywhere it appears in the project, click Change All.
If you are publishing to your personal Web site, make sure you do the
following first:
• To ignore the word and not change it, click Ignore.
•
Set publishing properties for your Web site.
• To ignore the word everywhere it appears in the project, click Ignore All.
•
Set up the Microsoft® Web Publishing Wizard with appropriate settings from your
Internet Service Provider (ISP). See the appropriate documentation in Microsoft®
Windows for this topic.
• To add the original word to the dictionary so that the Spell Checker does not
stop on it again, click Add. The word is added to the dictionary for this sesion
of The Print Shop® only.
Once you have done this, follow these steps to publish your Web project:
1.
On the Design Desk, choose one of the following options from the Web menu:
• Publish to Folder — Publish it to a folder.
The Spell Checker moves to the next word that is not in the dictionary. When all
mispelled words are found, the Spell Checker automatically closes and your
project is displayed.
• Note: You can click Close at any time to close the Check Spelling
dialog box.
• Publish to Web — Publish it on your Web site.
2.
If the same file already exists, a warning message displays asking if it is okay to
overwrite the file with the current one. If so, click Yes.
Finding and/or Replacing Text
3.
If you selected Publish to Folder, the Choose Directory dialog box displays.
Choose a location for the Web project and then click OK. Your Web project is
published to this location.
You can automatically search for a word and replace it with another word in your
project. For example, you may do a search for all instances of “Jim” and replace
it with “James.”
4.
If you selected Publish to Web and you have a live Internet connection, then
the Web project is published to your Web site.
For this option, see the appropriate documentation in Windows to set
up the Web Publishing Wizard with appropriate settings.
Using Additional Design Tools and Features
The Print Shop includes many tools and features that add value when you are
designing your project.
®
1.
On the Design Desk with a project open, navigate to the first page of your project
(if your project has more than one page).
2.
Choose Find/Replace Text from the Edit menu.
The Replace dialog box displays.
3.
Type one or more words to look for in the Find what box.
4.
Type one or more words to replace it with in the Replace with box.
5.
You can also select one or both of the following checkboxes:
• Match whole word only — Find text that matches the whole word you
entered. For example, if you typed “sun,” the Find/Replace tool will not stop at
the word “sunshine” if this checkbox is selected.
Checking Spelling
You can use the Spell Checker to check the spelling of all text in a project except
The Print Shop® headlines.
1.
On the Design Desk, with a project open, choose Spell Check from the Tools
menu.
The Check Spelling dialog box displays with the first word that is not in the
dictionary and which may be mispelled.
2.
To change the word, select the correct word from the Suggestions list box or type
the correct word in the Change To box.
Note: You can select one or both checkboxes at the bottom of the dialog box to
ignore words in upper case or to ignore words containing numbers.
3.
• Match case — Find text that matches the case (capitalization) of the words
entered.
6.
Click Find Next to locate the first instance of the word(s) that need to be replaced.
7.
• Click Replace to replace the word(s) with the ones you entered in the
Replace with box. The Print Shop® then automatically locates the next word or
set of words that need to be replaced.
• Click Replace All to replace all instances of the word(s) with the ones you
entered in the Replace with box.
• Click Find Next to skip replacing the current instance of word(s) found and go
to the next.
• To change that instance of the word, click Change.
272
273
8.
Repeat step 6 until all instances of the word(s) are replaced.
A message box displays, telling you that the search for words is finished.
9.
Adding Address Information
1.
Click OK in the message box.
Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Address Book, the Event
Reminder may also display on startup. Click Close to close it.
10. In the Replace dialog box, click Close.
Using the Address Book
The Options Wizard may also display. You can use it to set up your Address
Book options.
Use the Address Book to print personalized holiday cards for all your relatives,
invitations for friends, labels for customers, or certificates for students. Once you
have created an Address Book, you can quickly and easily draw information from
it to add to a project in The Print Shop®.
Note: You create and modify an Address Book using software called the
For more information, choose Ultimate Mail Manager Help from the Help menu
in the Address Book.
2.
Ultimate Mail Manager. For more information on using the Address Book,
choose The Ultimate Mail Manager Help from the Help menu in the Address
Book.
Creating a New Address Book
1.
On the Design Desk, click the Address/Events button
on the
Object toolbar, and then choose Edit Address Book from the submenu.
The Address Book displays. If you have not already created an address book,
The Print Shop® starts with a blank address book.
Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Address Book, you may see a
Welcome screen with the option to select New, Open, or How Do I. You can click
one of those options or Cancel to return to the Address Book.
To add new contact information, choose Add from the Address menu, and then
type or select from appropriate fields in the Add Address window.
Tip: Although you do not need to enter information into all the fields, it is a good
idea to include information in the First Name and Last Name fields.
3.
To enter more contacts, click New in the Add Address window and enter the
contact information.
4.
The new contacts are listed in the Address Book.
Modifying Address Information
1.
If this is the first time you are accessing the Address Book, the Event Reminder
may also display on startup. Click Close to close it.
on the
2.
The Options Wizard may also display. You can use it to set up your Address
Book options.
Select a contact from the list in your Address Book, and then choose Edit from
the Address menu.
3.
In the Edit Address window, edit the information as needed.
4.
2.
In the Address Book, choose New from the File menu.
3.
In the New Address Book dialog box, type a name for your address book in the
field, and then click OK.
The new Address Book displays with the name for it in the title bar. You can now
enter address information into this address book.
274
on the
Note: For more information, choose Ultimate Mail Manager Help from the Help
menu in the Address Book.
Opening an Existing Address Book
1.
Object toolbar, then choose Edit Address Book from the submenu.
on the
2.
If the address book displayed is not the one you want, choose Open from the
File menu.
3.
In the Open dialog box, select the address book you want from the list box, and
then click Open.
275
Using Address Merge
Whether you’re creating a form letter, mailing labels, envelopes, or greeting
cards, The Print Shop’s® Address Merge feature (also called Mail Merge) makes
it easy to personalize your project for every person you plan to send it to.
Address Merge fields are placeholders in text boxes. When you print your
project, The Print Shop® replaces the placeholders with information from your
Address Book. The information can be a first name or a complete address.
Address Merge fields allow you to address your card, envelope, or other project
to more than one person without having to retype their names and reprint your
project over and over again.
When you print a project that contains Address Merge fields, multiple versions of
the project will print, each one with different contact information for each name
you selected from the Address Book.
between them.
1.
You can remove an Address Merge field by selecting it in the text box, and then
clicking Delete.
2.
Merge field.
automatically filled-in, you must select the specific people in your Address Book
3.
4.
box, and then click Add.
when you print.
5.
Remove.
6.
Click Insert.
Adding or Modifying Your Personal Information
When you first start The Print Shop®, you can enter information about yourself.
The Print Shop® includes this information when you send projects to others so
that your recipient knows the message is from you. This information can also be
used in Address Merge fields. You can edit this information at any time within The
Print Shop®.
You can create up to seven information profiles, one for your primary
information, one for secondary information, and five for additional information.
These profiles could be used for different locations or for different people who
use The Print Shop® on your computer.
You can also add a personal graphic to your personal information. The design
you choose will be used whenever you insert your personal information.
Note: The personal graphic you add to your profile is only available for the
profile with which you save it. You can use a different graphic for each profile
that you create.
276
277
1.
To enter or edit your personal information, choose Edit Personal Information
from the Edit menu on the Design Desk.
3.
Click the Crop & Orientation tab if it is not already displayed.
4.
To change the orientation of the graphic, click Rotate 90 Degrees until the
graphic appears as you want.
2.
Select the profile that you want to create or edit from the Choose Your Personal
Information list box.
3.
Enter or edit your personal information in the fields provided.
4.
To add or modify your personal graphic, click Import Your Personal Graphic.
Shape area.
5.
Choose one of the following options from the pop-up menu:
The shape crop displays on the graphic in an outline with handles.
5.
To crop the graphic using a shape, select a shape from the Select a Preset
• Import From Art Gallery — Open the Art Gallery where you can select a
graphic
• Import From File — Open a file saved on your hard drive
• Create a Personal Graphic — Open the Personal graphic dialog box where
you can create a new design
6.
Using Advanced Drawing
The Advanced Drawing program is an easy-to-use, full-featured drawing program
in which you can create your own graphic designs or alter graphics from The
Print Shop’s® Art Gallery. You can use it to design personal graphics, special text
effects, and more.
Using The Photo Workshop
6.
7.
graphic is not a bitmap, The Photo Workshop will be grayed-out.
9.
Cropping and Orienting in The Photo Workshop
For photos and bitmap graphics, you can use The Photo Workshop to crop and
orient a graphic. Cropping hides a portion of the graphic that you don’t want to
appear. You can either select a preset crop or create a freehand crop.
1.
On the Design Desk with a project open, select the graphic that you want to crop.
2.
Click the Photo Tools button
on the Object toolbar, and then
choose Crop & Orientation from the submenu.
8.
The Add pointer displays in the Preview area.
you want to crop.
10. To close the freehand crop, click the first point.
11. To move a point, position the mouse pointer over the point to be moved, and then
13. To complete the crop (shaped crop or freehand crop), click Apply Crop.
Note: You can remove the crop by clicking Remove Crop.
278
279
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic for which you want to apply a
photo effect, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic
on the Art Gallery toolbar.
1.
2.
3.
Select one or more of the following options from the Select an Effect Category
list box:
• Quick Fix
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Adjust
Brightness & Focus from the submenu.
• Artistic
• Colorization
brightness and focus, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit
• Filter
• Black & White
2.
3.
• Warp & Distort
Click and drag the arrows to adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Blur/Sharpen,
4.
Saturation and Gamma.
5.
6.
7.
5.
6.
4.
• See The Photo Workshop Adjusting Brightness and Focus tutorial in the Help
let you improve your photo with a single click. Artistic, Colorization, Filter, and
Warp & Distort Effects create fun and interesting looks.
1.
add an effect.
1.
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Area Effects from the
submenu.
• From the Design Desk with a project open, select the graphic for which you
submenu.
280
effects, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on
281
2.
3.
Select a shape for the area from the Select a Preset Shape or Draw a
Shape area.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Artistic
Stamps from the submenu.
artistic stamp, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic
8.
9.
2.
3.
4.
list box:
5.
stamp.
• Quick Fix
6.
• Artistic
7.
• Black & White
8.
• Colorization
• Filter
• Warp & Distort
282
Applying Brush Effects in The Photo Workshop
Use Brush Effects to touch up or enhance your photo with color.
1.
want to apply brush effects. Click the Photo Tools button
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Brush Effects from the pop-up
menu.
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic to which you want to apply brush
effects, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit graphic on the
Art Gallery toolbar.
283
2.
Click the Brush Effects tab if it is not already displayed.
3.
Click to select a brush from the Select a Brush Size area.
4.
Select a color by clicking Select a Brush Color, and then choosing a color
from the Color Palette dialog box.
5.
To paint a brush effect on your photo, press the left mouse button and drag the
brush over the area to be painted. Release the mouse button when you are
finished.
6.
1.
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Adjust Color from the submenu.
effects, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic button
2.
Click the Adjust Color tab if it is not already displayed.
3.
Select a color effect for the graphic.
4.
1.
modified graphic in your project, click the Photo Tools button
on the Object toolbar, and then select one of the Photo Workshop options from
the submenu, such as Adjust Color.
2.
Click Save As.
3.
4.
5.
To transform the graphic to black and white, select Make Black & White.
6.
To transform the graphic to a negative reverse graphic, click Make a Negative.
7.
8.
Note: You can click Undo All to undo all color adjustments. Note that it will also
undo all changes made on any of the other tabs in The Photo Workshop.
Advanced Photo Editor is a powerful program used to edit and enhance photos. It
contains similar features found in The Photo Workshop plus additional effects,
filters, and more.
1.
Effects menu. The Advanced Photo Editor program displays.
5.
and then click OK.
6.
Click Save.
Adjusting Color in The Photo Workshop
284
285
PRINTING OR PUBLISHING A PROJECT
Previewing a Project
Just before you print your project, you can preview how it will appear.
You can print all kinds of projects in The Print Shop®. Some projects may require
special paper stock, such as extra thick stock for greeting cards or business
cards. Check the manual for your printer to ensure that it is able to handle the
paper stock required to print your project.
For oversized projects, you can print portions on several pieces of paper to
create a whole oversized project. You can also set up your printer to print
double-sided when needed for certain project types.
Note: It is a good idea to print a test page before printing on the actual stock.
Additional features allow you to e-mail your project complete with its own viewer
and also publish your Web project to a folder or to your own personal Web site.
1.
On the Design Desk with your project open, choose Print Preview from the
File menu.
Your project displays in a preview window.
2.
Click Close to return to the Design Desk; or click Print to print the project as
it appears.
Note: Before printing your project, you may want to set up your printer. If you are
using special paper stock, such as mailing labels or thick card stock, it is a
good idea to print a test page.
Setting up the Printer
You can select a different printer or change the settings for the printer.
Before Printing a Project
Before you print your project, you should check the paper stock, print a test
page, and preview your project.
1.
2.
Checking the Paper Stock
Many of the projects in The Print Shop® request that you use a paper stock. A
paper stock is a specific type of paper, such as envelopes, labels, business card
stock, banner paper, postcard stock, or iron-on transfer stock.
You select the paper stock when you create or print your project. If you are using
a brand new or custom paper stock, you can use the Custom Paper Wizard to add
the paper stock to the list of available options.
Note: You will want to check what your printer can handle before purchasing the
paper stock at the store. Some printers cannot handle extra thick paper stock,
for example.
It is also a good idea to print a test page on regular paper before printing on the
paper stock.
Choose Printing from the File menu, and then select Print Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box displays.
Select a different printer from the Name drop-down list, if applicable.
Status, Type, Where, and Comment update for the newly selected printer.
3.
Click Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
4.
On the Layout tab, in the Page Order area, if you want to print your project back
to front instead of front to back, select the appropriate option button.
Note: You will be choosing paper stock and orientation within The Print Shop®, so you
do not need to select any other items in this dialog box.
5.
6.
Click OK to return to the Print Setup dialog box.
Click OK to close the Print Setup dialog box.
The printer is set up for printing your projects.
Printing a Test Page
It is a good idea to print a test page on regular paper before printing your project
on paper stock to verify that it lines up properly.
1.
On the Design Desk with your project open, click the Print button
Standard toolbar or choose Print from the File menu.
on the
The Print dialog box displays.
2.
286
In the Print dialog box, click Print to print a test page.
287
Printing a Project
Printing Oversized Projects
Before you print your project, it is a good idea to preview how your project will
appear. If you are using special paper stock, such as mailing labels or thick card
stock, it is also a good idea to print a test page.
The Print Shop® lets you print oversized projects on multiple pages that you can
asemble into a large final print, or in its original size, if your printer can handle
oversized projects.
Note: For some types of projects, you can change the type of paper stock just
before printing. To do so, choose Print X Stock from the Edit menu, where X
can be a label, envelope, or other type of project.
1.
1.
Note: Options in the Print dialog box vary depending upon the type of project
you are printing.
Note: Options in the Print dialog box vary depending upon the type of project you
are printing.
3.
Select a print quality from the Print Quality drop-down list. The greater the number
of dots per inch (dpi), the better the quality. Your printer may limit the quality level
according to its top performance ability.
2.
3.
When you type changes to one of these fields, the others adjust to maintain
proportions of the project.
If your project contains Address Merge fields, then do the following:
4.
• In the Merge Names dialog box, click Select List.
• In the Open dialog box, select the appropriate address book, and then click
Open.
• In the Merge Names dialog box, select the names from the list box whose
contact information you want to include in the current project by clicking each
name. You can also click Select All to include all the contacts in the list.
Type the number of copies to be printed in the Copies box.
Note: If the project contains Address Merge fields, The Print Shop automatically
prints one copy of the project for each contact name you selected.
®
Type the number of sheets of paper to use either to accommodate the width in
the Sheets Wide box or to accommodate the height in the Sheets Tall box.
Note: To ensure that your project fits on the same page, change the Sheets Tall box
to 1.
The Print Shop® adjusts the dimensions in the other boxes to maintain the original
proportions of your project.
5.
Click Show to update all the fields to the correct proportions, according to your
changes.
6.
Click OK in the Custom Print Size dialog box to return to the Print dialog box.
• Click OK to return to the Print dialog box
5.
• Type the number of inches for width in the Inches Wide box.
• Type the number of inches for height in the Inches Tall box.
• Type a percentage of the size relative to the original project (100 percent) in
the Scale box.
If the project has more than one page, then the Print Range area displays. Click
All to select all pages to print or Pages and type the pages you want to print in
• Click Merge Names.
Click Output Size.
The Custom Print Size dialog box displays.
the From and To boxes.
4.
on the
on the
2.
7.
If you want to print just some of the tiles, or portions of each sheet, click
Which Tiles.
The Tiles to Print dialog box displays.
6.
Select other checkboxes and options as appropriate to the project you are
printing.
8.
In the Preview area, click the tiles on each sheet that you want to print.
7.
Click Print.
9.
Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
The project is printed.
10. Select other checkboxes and options, as appropriate to the project you
are printing.
11. Click Print.
288
289
Printing a Banner
10. After the two test pages have printed again, click Next.
The Print Shop® banner projects can be printed as oversized projects on standard
letter size paper or they can be printed following the steps below on special
continuous feed banner paper.
11. Pick up the pages without changing their order.
1.
On the Design Desk with your banner project open, click the Print button
the Standard toolbar or choose Print from the File menu.
12. Click the picture that shows the printing on the top and the bottom of the two
pages, and then click Next.
You have succesfully configured your printer for double-sided printing.
on
13. Click Finish.
Note: Options in the Print dialog box vary depending upon the type of project
you are printing.
2.
Click Setup in the Print dialog box, and then click Properties in the Print Setup
dialog box.
3.
From the Setup tab, select the continuous banner option, and then click OK.
4.
Position your continuous feed banner paper in your printer according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. In the Print Setup dialog box, click OK.
5.
In the Print dialog box, click Print.
Your banner project is printed.
Printing a Coloring Book
The Print Shop® lets you print certain graphics from the Art Gallery as outlines,
allowing you to create your own coloring book.
1.
choose Insert Art & Photos from the submenu.
, and then
2.
Click the My Art & Photos tab, and then click the plus (+) symbol next to the
appropriate folder in the Choose Category for Graphic list box. You can also
double-click subfolders to display their options.
3.
To check if a graphic will print as an outline, do one of the following:
Double-sided Printing
• Right-click the preview graphic, select Properties from the pop-up menu, and
make sure the graphic has a CGM extension on the file name.
You can set up your printer to handle the double-sided printing needed on some
of your projects. When you print a project that requires double-sided printing, it
will then automatically occur.
• Click Advanced in the Search panel, and then choose CGM from the Select
Type of Graphic drop-down list to display all CGM files in the Preview
browser.
1.
CGM file types are the ones that can be printed as outlines.
Choose Printing from the File menu, and then select Double-sided Printing.
The Double-sided Printing Wizard displays.
Note: This wizard helps you configure The Print Shop to print double-sided
projects for subsequent printouts.
4.
Once you have located the graphic you want, either select it and click Select, or
double-click the graphic to add it to your project.
5.
On the Design Desk, either click the Print button
choose Print from the File menu.
®
2.
Click Next.
3.
Make sure your printer is ready, and then click Print Test #1.
4.
After the test pages have printed, click Next.
5.
Pick up the test pages without changing their order.
6.
Hold the pages face up, and then click the graphic that matches the top page.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Insert the pages back into the printer face up and the arrow pointing in the
feed direction.
9.
Make sure the printer is ready, and then click Print Test #2.
290
on the Standard toolbar or
6.
Select the Coloring Book checkbox.
7.
Click Print.
The project is printed as a coloring book.
291
Printing a Preview Catalog
4.
You can print a set of graphics in the Art Gallery or a set of projects in the
Project Gallery to have a visual, paper reference.
1.
In the Print Range area, select one of the following options:
Note: You may want to print a test page on regular paper before using an
envelope.
5.
Open.
• Print Current Page — Print all the pictures/projects that you see at one time
in the Preview browser.
• Print All Pictures/Projects — Print all the pictures/projects in the gallery.
3. Select a print quality from the Print Quality drop-down list. The greater the number of
dots per inch (dpi), the better the quality. Your printer may limit the quality level
according to its top performance ability.
• Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
6.
7.
Click Envelope Feed.
Choose from Tall, Wide, Left, Center, or Right in the Envelope Feed dialog
box to indicate how you are going to insert the envelope into your printer.
Select the appropriate option button for the number of previews that you want to
appear on each page in the Number per Page area.
8.
5.
Click Print.
9.
Printing Envelopes
1.
On the Design Desk with your project open, choose Choose Envelope Stock
from the Edit menu.
The Choose Envelope Stock dialog box displays.
2.
Choose an envelope size from the list box.
You can see your selection in the Preview area.
Select the DPI (Dots per Inch) from the Print Quality drop-down list.
The higher resolution (more DPIs) will give you a better graphic, but it takes
longer to print. The lower resolution (fewer DPIs) is best for quick drafts and large
graphics that will be seen from a distance.
4.
A preview catalog is printed.
If your project contains Address Merge fields, do the following:
• Print Selected Picture/Project — Print only the one picture or project that
you have selected in the Preview browser of the gallery. A gray border
surrounds this selection.
Note: The gallery contains thousands upon thousands of graphics. Before you
use the Print All Pictures option, you may want to limit the number of items in
the browser by choosing Collection, Category, or Tone and then Print from
the File menu within the gallery.
on the Standard toolbar or choose Print from the
In the Art Gallery or the Project Gallery, choose Print from the File menu.
The Print Art dialog box displays.
2.
Either click the Print button
File menu.
Select either Flap Up or Flap Down.
Note: Be sure to check your printer to see which side it prints on.
10. Select or deselect the Rotated checkbox to print the envelope rotated or not.
11. Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
12. Type the number of copies of the project to print in the Copies box.
13. Click Print.
The project is printed. If your project doesn’t print exactly right, you can adjust the
alignment manually. See Setting the Print Alignment.
Note: The Print Shop® automatically resizes the elements of your design to fit the
size you selected.
If the envelope size you want does not appear, then you can add a new custom
envelope stock to the list. See Creating a Custom Paper Stock.
3.
292
Click OK to return to the Design Desk.
293
Printing Labels
1.
10. Click Print.
On the Design Desk with your project open, choose Choose Label Stock from
the Edit menu.
The Select a Label Stock dialog box displays.
2.
Choose a label stock from the list box. You can see your selection in the Preview
area.
The project is printed. If your project doesn’t print exactly right, you can adjust
the alignment manually. See Setting the Print Alignment.
Printing Business Cards
1.
On the Design Desk with your project open, choose Choose Business Card
Stock from the Edit menu.
Note: The Print Shop automatically resizes the elements of your design to fit the new
stock choice.
®
The Choose a Business Card Stock dialog box displays.
If the label stock you want does not appear, then you can add a new custom label
stock to the list. See Creating a Custom Paper Stock.
2.
3.
Click OK.
Note: The Print Shop® automatically resizes the elements of your design to fit the new
stock choice.
4.
File menu.
Choose a business card stock from the list box. You can see your selection in the
Preview area.
If the business card type you want does not appear, then you can add a new
custom business card stock to the list. See Creating a Custom Paper Stock.
3.
Click OK.
4.
File menu.
Note: You may want to print a test page on regular paper before using label stock.
5.
Open.
6.
Note: You may want to print a test page on regular paper before using business
card stock.
5.
8.
Open.
7.
If you want to print less than a full sheet of labels, type the number in the Number
of Labels box. Otherwise, The Print Shop® will print a full sheet.
6.
If you want to print on a sheet containing only a partial number of labels, do the
following:
• Click Starting Label.
• Select the label you want to start printing from in the Preview area.
7.
If you want to print less than a full sheet of business cards, type the number in the
Number of Business Cards box. Otherwise, The Print Shop® will print a full sheet.
Note: The printer will print from left to right.
9.
294
Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
295
8.
If you want to print on a sheet containing only a partial number of business cards,
do the following:
• Click Starting Card.
• Click the business card you want to start printing from in the Preview area.
Note: The printer will print from left to right.
9.
If you want to print on only half a sheet, do the following:
• Click the postcard you want to start printing from in the Preview area.
10. Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
11. Click Print.
On the Design Desk with your postcard project open, choose Choose Postcard
Stock from the Edit menu.
The Choose Postcard Stock dialog box displays.
Printing Photos
Choose a postcard stock from the list box. You can see your selection in the
Preview area.
You can print photos that you placed in your project. The project must be a Quick
Prints type of project. To create a Quick Prints type of project, from the Project
Picker, select Photo Projects from the Create a Project list of project types, and
then choose Quick Prints.
Note: The Print Shop® automatically resizes the elements of your design to fit the
new stock choice.
If the postcard size you want does not appear, then you can add a new custom
postcard stock to the list. See Creating a Custom Paper Stock.
3.
Click OK.
4.
File menu.
Follow these steps to print the photos:
1.
Select a format, choose Quick Prints Photo Layout, and then click Finish.
Note: You will be able to see your selection in the Preview area.
5.
Type the number of copies of the project to print in the Copies box.
9.
• Click Starting Card.
Printing Postcards
2.
Choose Both Sides, Front Only, or Back Only in the Print Range area.
8.
Click Print.
1.
7.
2.
Click Finish to return to the Design Desk
.Note: The layout panels do not display in the Design Desk.
3.
Place a picture or any other object in this panel.
Note: You may want to print a test page on regular paper before using postcard
stock.
Note: Only one graphic is displayed in the Design Desk. This does not affect the
way the project prints.
4. Choose Print Preview from the File menu.
This is how your project will appear when printed.
5.
Click Print.
Open.
6.
296
Note: To print on a different layout: On the Design Desk, with your Quick Prints
project open, choose Choose Quick Prints Layout from the Edit menu. The
Choose Quick Prints Layout dialog box displays. Select a layout, and then
click Finish.
297
Printing Transfer Projects
1.
On the Design Desk with your project open, either click the Print button
the Standard toolbar or choose Print from the File menu.
Printing to the Page Edge
on
2.
The greater the DPI, the better the quality. Your printer may limit the quality level.
3.
Make sure the Print Reversed for Iron-on Transfer Paper checkbox is selected.
This will reverse the graphic so it will look proper when added to a T-shirt.
Note: You may want to print a test page on regular paper before using iron-on
transfer paper.
4.
5.
Type the number of copies of the project to print in the Copies box.
Click Print.
Some printers allow you to print without margins to the edge of the printed
page. This is sometimes called borderless printing or full-bleed printing. You
can print your project to the page edge from The Print Shop® if your printer has
this feature.
Note: Printing to the page edge may create a printout of lower quality, especially
when printing banners. This is because the printer stretches your project
beyond the printed page to ensure that it is printed to the edge.
1.
2.
Choose Print from the File menu.
In the Print dialog box, click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box displays.
3.
4.
The project is printed. If your project doesn’t print exactly right, you can adjust the
alignment manually. See Setting the Print Alignment.
Select a printer that supports printing to the paper edge from the Name dropdown list, if necesary.
Click Properties.
Setting the Print Alignment
5.
In the Paper Options area, choose Borderless or Full-bleed. The printing
option name and its location may vary according to your printer.
If your project didn’t print exactly right on the paper stock you provided, you can
change the printer alignment by inches.
6.
Click OK.
1.
• From the Print dialog box, click Advanced. Then, in the Advanced Settings
dialog box, click Print Alignment.
• From the Design Desk, choose Printing from the File menu, and then select
Precision Print Alignment.
The Printer Alignment dialog box displays.
2.
Select Tall or Wide, and then click Print Test Page.
3.
The test page is printed.
Using the test page, measure the items requested, and then type the appropriate
inches into the Fields of the Measurements area.
As you do so, the appropriate location of the changes is highlighted in the
Preview area.
Note: You can click Reset to set the inches as they should be set for the paper stock
you are using.
7.
In the Print Setup dialog box, click OK.
8.
In the Print dialog box, select other options as appropriate.
9.
Click Print.
The project is printed to the edge of the page.
Printing Photo Book Pages
You can create pages you can then print online using photofinishing and photo
book services. QuickStart Photo Album templates in The Print Shop® are ideal
for this purpose.
1.
Create a Photo Album project from a QuickStart layout.
2.
Save the project.
3.
With the project open on the Design Desk, choose Export As from the File menu.
4.
In the Export dialog box, select JPG, then click Continue.
5.
exported file.
5.
In the Print dialog box, select other options as appropriate.
6.
Click OK.
6.
7.
Click Save.
298
299
Previewing Web Projects
The file is exported to the selected location.
8.
You can then upload this file to your chosen online service for printing. Consult
the service’s documentation for further options when finishing your project.
Printing Projects Using Online
Photofinishing Services
Many projects created using The Print Shop® can be uploaded to online
photofinishing services to create prints, photo books, and other merchandise. To
do this, you must first export your project in a format that can be uploaded to the
online services.
You can preview your Web projects before you publish them. When you preview
your Web page, you can hear any sounds and view any video that you have
attached to your Web page. The Print Shop® converts your Web project to HTML
format, opens your default Web browser, and shows you the Web project.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Preview Web Site from the Web menu.
Your Web pages display in your Web browser.
Note: If Design Checker or Warnings are turned on in the Web Publishing
Properties settings, you may see some informational dialog boxes first. Click
Continue in these dialog boxes to continue.
1.
Open a project to export.
2.
On the Design Desk, choose Export As from the File menu.
3.
In the Export dialog box, select JPG, then click Continue.
Publishing Web Pages
4.
exported file.
5.
Once you have created and modified Web pages, with all the hyperlinks and
hotlinks you want, you are ready to publish the Web pages as HTML files to a
folder or to your personal Web site.
6.
Click Save.
2.
If you are publishing to your personal Web site, make sure you do the following
first:
The file is exported to the selected location.
7.
You can then upload this file to your chosen online service for printing. Consult
the service’s documentation for further options when finishing your project.
Printing a Project Professionally Online
1.
•
Set publishing properties for your Web site.
•
Set up the Microsoft® Web Publishing Wizard with appropriate settings from your
Internet Service Provider (ISP). See the appropriate documentation in Microsoft®
Windows for this topic.
Once you have done this, follow these steps to publish your Web project.
1.
then choose More Finish Options from the submenu. Select Professionally
Print Project from the Finish Project dialog box, and then click Next.
• Click the Professional Printing button
• Choose Professional Printing from the File menu.
2.
When finished viewing, close the Web browser and return to The Print Shop®.
• Publish to Folder — Publish it to a folder.
• Publish to Web — Publish it on your Internet Web site.
2.
If the same file already exists, a warning message displays, asking if it is okay to
overwrite the file with the current one. If so, click Yes.
3.
If you selected Publish to Folder, then the Choose Directory dialog box
displays. Choose a location for the Web projects, and then click OK. Your Web
pages are published to this location.
4.
If you selected Publish to Web and you have a live Web connection, then the
Web projects are published to your Web site.
Click Visit The Print Shop® on the Web.
Your Web browser opens, detailing options available for online
professional printing.
On the Design Desk, choose one of the following options from the Web menu:
For this option, see the appropriate documentation in Windows to set up the Web
Publishing Wizard with appropriate settings.
300
301
• Click the My Projects tab to access projects that you have saved to your own
categories.
USING RESOURCES, TOOLS AND FEATURES
The Print Shop® includes a range of available resources — from graphics in the
Art Gallery to QuickStart Layout projects you can download from the Internet.
The Print Shop® also includes powerful tools and features that greatly enhance
your use of The Print Shop®.
Using the Project Gallery
Modifying the View of Projects
You can change the view of projects in the Preview browser.
1.
2.
In the Project Gallery, click one of the following buttons on the Project Gallery
toolbar:
The Project Gallery contains thousands of QuickStart Layout projects that you
can customize and print. You can also save your own projects to the My Projects
tab of the Project Gallery.
• Small
From within the Project Gallery, you can also e-mail projects to others, import
and export projects, search and organize projects, and more.
• Medium
• Large
— View small thumbnails of the projects
— View medium thumbnails of the projects
— View large thumbnails of the projects
The view of projects in the Preview browser of the Project Gallery updates
according to your selection.
Viewing Projects with Matching Sets
In the Project Gallery, you can choose to view only those projects that have
matching sets. Matching sets are other types of projects, such as envelopes and
letterhead, which match a selected project’s layout design. These projects
together give you a matching set of letterhead, business cards, newsletters, and
more.
1.
2.
Access the Project Gallery and make sure the All Art & Photos tab is selected.
Click the View Matching Sets button
.
Only those projects that have matching sets display.
1.
• From the Project Picker, click the Search Projects button
.
2.
Search Features in the Project Gallery
There are thousands of projects in the Project Gallery to choose from. To help
you quickly locate the one you want, The Print Shop® includes powerful
searching features. With the searching features, you can find the right project in
a combination of three ways:
•
Basic Search — This feature allows you to make basic selections about the
project type (such as Calendar) and the project’s category (such as Weekly).
You can also use keywords to help locate a project (see Search Words).
302
303
•
Enter Search Words — In this field, you can enter up to seven words. You can
also use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard; this means that you can type a portion of
the words you are using for your search, then use an asterisk (*) to repressent
one or more miscellaneous characters. (For example, *Cake* might return
Birthday Cake or Cake for a Party.)
Note: The All Projects tab of the Project Gallery includes all three searching
options. The My Projects tab, which contains your own projects that you
created, includes only Basic Search and the ability to type search words.
You can also click the View Matching Sets button
to display only those
projects that have matching sets. For more information, see Viewing Projects with
Matching Sets.
See the following topic:
•
Advanced Search — In addition to options in the Basic Search, you can also
select the tone (such as Humorous) and which collection the project is stored
in. You can also use search words in this mode, with a couple of additional options
(see Enter Search Words).
Searching for Projects
Searching for Projects
You can locate the right project from thousands of QuickStart Layout projects by
using the searching features in the Project Gallery. You can also use the Basic
Search feature to locate a specific project among your own projects on the My
Projects tab of the Project Gallery.
1.
2.
In the Project Gallery, the following tabs are available to you:
• All Projects — This feature allows you to access thousands of projects
available on The Print Shop® CD (DVD) and online.
• My Projects — This feature allows you to access projects that you have
saved to your own categories.
•
3.
In the Project Gallery, click either the All Projects tab or the My Projects tab,
depending on the project for which you are looking.
4.
Click Reset to clear all the boxes from a previous search.
Search Words — This feature allows you to type search words (such as
Birthday or Wedding Cake) to help locate the project. Search words work along
with the selections you make from drop-down lists in Basic Search or Advanced
Search modes. The more information you provide (the more selections you make
or type), the narrower your search result of projects will be.
304
305
5.
Opening a Project from the Project Gallery
Note: If Select Type of Project is the only drop-down list you see above the
Choose Project Category list box, then you are in Basic Search mode. If
you are searching for a QuickStart Layout project, then you can further narrow
your search by clicking the Advanced Search button to display the Advanced
Search mode and do the following, as you want: select a tone from the Select
Tone for Project drop-down list or collection from the Select Collection for Project
drop-down list.
You can open a project you previously worked on from the Project Gallery. You
can also open a QuickStart Layout project directly from the Project Gallery.
1.
• From the Project Picker, click the Open My Projects button
The projects display in the Preview browser on the right according to your
selections.
6.
If you want to open a project you previously worked on and saved, do one of the
following:
.
then click the My Projects tab in the Project Gallery.
In the Choose Project Category list box, click the plus (+) symbol next to the
folder that contains the options you want to view, and then select an option. You
can also double-click subfolders to display their options.
The projects in that category display in the Preview browser.
If you want to further narrow your search, type search words in the Enter Search
Words box, and then click Go. For example, you can type the words Birthday
Cake. If you are in Advanced Search mode, you can also select one of the
following options:
The Project Gallery displays with the My Projects tab selected.
2.
• From the Project Picker, click the Search Projects button, and then click the
All Projects tab in the Project Gallery.
• All — Search for projects that contain all of the search words you type.
• Any — Search for projects that contain any of the search words you type.
then click the All Projects tab in the Project Gallery.
Note: If you want to open one of the projects, either click it in the Preview
browser and then click Select, or double-click it. The project displays on the
Design Desk, ready for you to customize.
Selecting a Project
If you want to open a QuickStart Layout project, do one of the following:
The Project Gallery displays with the All Projects tab selected.
3.
Click Reset to clear all the project search boxes.
Note: This ensures that the Enter Search Words box is now blank.
4.
The projects that match your selection display in the Preview browser.
1.
2.
Click the project in the Preview browser of the Project Gallery.
If applicable, select a category that contains the project you want to open from the
Choose Project Category list box.
Note: To place the selected project on the Design Desk to modify it, click Select
in the Project Gallery.
If the project you want does not display in the Preview browser, it may exist on
your computer or on a disk. See Opening a Project from a Disk.
5.
6.
To further narrow your search, you can also type search words in the Enter
Search Words box. For example, you can type the words Birthday Cake.
Note: For search words to exist for your own projects (not QuickStart Layout
projects), you need to have modified project properties for your project.
306
307
If you are opening a QuickStart Layout project, then you can also use the
Advanced Search button in the Project Gallery to help you locate the project you
want. For more information, see Searching for Projects.
7.
In the Preview browser, double-click the project you want to open.
Tip: You can also click a project to select it, and then click Select in the Project
Gallery.
Note: The Open Matching Sets button is active only when the View Matching Sets
button is “on.” If clicking Open Matching Sets does nothing, then you need to
click View Matching Sets again to turn it “on,” then select a project and click
Open Matching Sets.
The Open Matching Projects dialog box displays.
2.
Matching QuickStart Layouts for all the projects you selected display on the
Design Desk.
Opening a Project from a Disk
1.
Organizing Your Projects
The Project Gallery contains a collection of your own projects that you have
created and saved to the Project Gallery. These will appear in the My Projects
tab in the Project Gallery.
• From the Design Desk, choose Open from the File menu.
• From the Project Gallery, either click the Open button
in the Project
Gallery toolbar or choose Open from Disk from the File menu.
The Open Project from Disk dialog box displays.
2.
In the Open Project from Disk dialog box, locate the project file on the computer’s
hard disk or a separate disk.
Tip: To search for a particular type of project, select the appropriate project file
type from the Files of type drop-down list.
3.
Select the checkboxes for the matching QuickStart Layouts that you want to use,
and then click OK.
Select the project file that you want to open from the list box, and then click
Open.
To better organize your projects, you can create new categories, organize
projects in these new categories, and rename and delete categories on the My
Projects tab.
Note: This option is only available to projects you have saved to the Project
Gallery. See Saving a Project to the Project Gallery.
1.
.
Opening Matching Projects
If you are using a QuickStart Layout, then you can open other types of projects
(such as envelopes and letterhead) that match the current project’s layout
design. These projects together give you a matching set of letterhead, business
cards, newsletters, and more.
Note: Matching projects do not exist for all QuickStart Layout projects.
1.
2.
• Click the My Projects tab to access projects that you have saved to your own
categories.
• From the Design Desk with a project open, choose Open Matching Project
from the File menu to open other types of projects that match the current one.
• From the Project Gallery, click the View Matching Sets button
so that
only projects that have matching sets display. Search for and select the
project that you want, and then click the Open Matching Sets button
308
.
309
1.
Renaming a Category
1.
Do one of the following
2.
2.
3.
In the Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new category, and then
click OK.
3.
4.
Type a new name for the category, and then click anywhere outside of the new
category name.
The category is added to the list in alphabetical order.
Deleting a Category
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tip: You may also use Copy and Paste on the Project Gallery toolbar. See
Copying and Pasting Projects.
5.
1.
2.
3.
category.
Tip: You may also use Cut and Paste on the Project Gallery toolbar. See Cutting
and Pasting Projects.
Note: If you have projects or graphics in the category you are deleting, then the
Delete Category dialog box displays with a warning that all projects or graphics
within the category will also be deleted. If you do not want to continue, then click
No. Otherwise, you can select the Delete project (or graphic) files from disk
checkbox to delete the projects or graphics from your computer’s hard drive.
click OK.
4.
310
311
Copying and Moving Projects
You can copy and move your own projects into other categories on the My
Projects tab of the Project Gallery in order to better organize them.
You can also use Cut, Copy, and Paste the Project Gallery to move or copy a
project to and from other areas within the Project Gallery, or to the Windows
Explorer. This is useful for copying a QuickStart Layout project to the My
Projects tab where it can be readily available to you without CD-swapping, for
example.
Finally, you can also click and drag any project in the Project Gallery to the
Design Desk to start the project. Doing so leaves the Project Gallery open so
that you can select other projects to start.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tip: You may also use Copy and Paste on the Project Gallery toolbar. See
Copying and Pasting Projects.
5.
Cutting and Pasting Projects
You can cut a project from one category in the My Projects tab in the Project
Gallery, and then paste it to another category. This moves the project to a
different category.
Note: You cannot cut projects from the All Projects tab.
1.
2.
Click the My Projects tab.
3.
Search for the project you want until it displays in the Preview browser.
4.
Select the project from the Preview browser.
5.
6.
Select the category in which you want to place the selected project from the
Choose Project Category list box by clicking it.
7.
on the Project Gallery toolbar.
The project is moved to the selected category.
Copying and Pasting Projects
You can copy a project from a category in the My Projects tab and paste it to
another category on the same tab. You can also copy a project from the All
Projects tab and paste it to a category on the My Projects tab.
This is useful for copying QuickStart Layout projects to the My Projects tab
where they are readily available without CD-swapping or for copying projects to
more than one category on the My Projects tab so that they are easier to find.
1.
2.
Search for the project you want until it displays in the Preview browser.
Tip: You may also use Cut and Paste on the Project Gallery toolbar. See Cutting
and Pasting Projects.
3.
Select one from the Preview browser.
click OK.
4.
5.
Make sure that the My Projects tab is selected by clicking on it.
6.
Select the category in which you want to place the selected project from the
Choose Project Category list box by clicking it.
7.
The project is copied to the selected category on the My Projects tab.
312
313
Copying Projects to the Design Desk
You can copy a project in the Project Gallery to the Design Desk. This opens the
project in the Design Desk and leaves the Project Gallery open.
1.
2.
Search for a project to display it in the Preview browser.
3.
Click and drag the title bar of the Project Gallery to move it so that the Design
Desk displays in the background.
Tip: You can also resize the Project Gallery window by clicking and dragging any
border.
4.
Click and drag the selected project from the Project Gallery to the Design Desk.
The project displays in the Design Desk and the Project Gallery remains open. To
begin working on this project, close the Project Gallery.
Copying Projects to Windows Explorer
You can copy a project in the Project Gallery then paste it into the Windows
Explorer. This copies it to another location on the computer disk, including a
separate disk.
Renaming a Project
1.
2.
3.
contains the project you want to rename from the Choose Project Category list box.
4.
In the Preview browser, select the project you want to rename.
5.
Choose Rename Project from the Edit menu.
6.
Type a new name for the project, and then press Enter.
The project is renamed. You may rename as many projects as you want following
these steps.
Modifying Project Properties
After you create and save a project, you can modify its properties in the Project
Gallery, such as the description of the project and keywords you can use to
locate the project.
1.
2.
Search for a project to display it in the Preview browser.
1.
3.
Select a project from the Preview browser.
2.
3.
contains the project you want from the Choose Project Category list box.
Note: You cannot modify the properties for a project on the All Projects tab.
4.
in the Project Gallery toolbar.
5.
Open the Windows Explorer.
6.
Locate the folder on the appropriate computer drive to which you want to copy the
project.
7.
4.
5.
Choose Properties from the View menu.
on the toolbar in the Windows Explorer.
The project is copied to the Windows Explorer.
In the Preview browser, select a project.
Note: If you cannot see your project in the Preview browser, then you may need
to search for your project first.
6.
7.
Type words to use when searching for the project into the Keywords box.
8.
Click OK.
The Preview browser displays the new description under the project.
314
315
Importing a Project
• Note: You can rename the exported project file by typing a new name into the
File name box.
You can import (or bring in) a project that you or someone else has created on
another computer so that you can modify, view, or print it.
1.
.
2.
In the Project Gallery with the My Projects tab selected, choose Import from the
File menu.
3.
In the Import Projects dialog box, locate the project file on the computer’s hard
disk or separate disk that you want to import into The Print Shop®.
4.
Select the category in which you want to import the project from the Add to
Project Category drop-down list.
The file is exported to the indicated location. You are then returned to the
Project Gallery.
Sending Projects
After you create and save a project, you can send the project as a file
attachment using your e-mail program in order to share it with others who also
use The Print Shop®.
Sending a Project via Instant Messaging
You can use The Print Shop® to share any projects or self-running executables
created within the application with selected friends on your Instant Messenger
“buddy” list.
1.
then select Send via Instant Messaging from the submenu.
Note: You can create a new category for your projects. To do so, click New. In
the Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new category, and then
click OK. This new category is now selected from the Add to Project Category
drop-down list.
5.
• Choose Send Project from the File menu, and then select Via Instant
Messaging.
The Send via Instant Messenger dialog box displays.
Click Import.
The project is imported into the My Projects tab of the Project Gallery, adding to
your list of projects.
Note: You will be prompted to save your project if you have not already.
2.
Select a recipient from your buddy list to whom you want to send your Broderbund
project file, and then click Send.
3.
The MSN Messenger Conversation window displays and provides updates on the
progress of the file transfer.
Exporting a Project to a New Location
Note: You can use most Instant Messaging services to send your project. Save
the file locally to your computer’s hard drive. Open your Instant Messaging
service. Start a conversation with a buddy, and then use the send a file feature to
attach your saved project file.
You can export a project you created or modified either to the hard disk of your
computer or to a separate disk so that you can share it with others or copy it to
another computer. You export a project from the Project Gallery.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Search Projects from the File menu to display the
Project Gallery.
2.
In the Project Gallery, search for the project you want to export, and then select it
from the Preview browser.
3.
4.
In the Export dialog box, select the location where you want to export the selected
project.
5.
Click Save.
From the Design Desk, with the finished project design open, do one of
the following:
Sharing a Project
The Print Shop® Share Project feature allows you to send your project to friends,
family, or business asociates as a file with a viewer. Your recipient can view and
print the project even if they do not have The Print Shop® installed.
Note: To use this feature you must have a MAPI-enabled e-mail account.
Macintosh users will not be able to open or print the Share Project executable.
1.
• Choose Share Project from the File menu.
316
317
then select Share Project from the submenu.
The Share Project dialog box displays.
2.
Type a name for your project into the Enter Project Name box.
3.
Click Color, and then choose a background color from the Color Palette dialog
box.
4.
Note: See your e-mail program’s help file for more information.
Deleting a Project
You can only delete projects from the My Projects tab of the Project Gallery.
Click Preview.
1.
2.
3.
contains the project you want to delete from the Choose Project Category list box.
4.
In the Preview browser, select the project you want to delete.
• Click Best Fit to show the project as the best fit size in the viewer.
• Click Broderbund to access the Broderbund online store.
• Click Close to close the viewer and return to the Share Project by E-mail
dialog box.
5.
Click Save As to save the project as a viewer on your computer’s hard drive.
6.
Click E-mail to send the project viewer to a friend.
• The File Information dialog box displays the file size of your project and the
transfer times.
• Click Continue.
• Follow the steps in the Internet Connection Wizard, and then click Finish.
Your e-mail application will display with your project viewer attached.
Fill in the recipient’s name, add a personal message, and then click Send.
Your Share Project viewer is now sent via e-mail to your selected recipients.
Note: In the Share Project dialog box, you also have the options to Instant
Message your project, Burn to CD or Save As, to save the executable to your
hard drive.
Sending a Project via E-mail
1.
Type the name of the recipient in the e-mail browser’s To box, and then click Send
in the e-mail program.
The Broderbund Click-n-View Project viewer displays your project.
• You can navigate through your project using the viewer controls.
7.
2.
5.
6.
Printing a Project from the Project Gallery
You can print a picture of the project with its title directly from the Project Gallery.
1.
2.
Search for the project you want to print to display it in the Preview browser.
3.
Select the project from the Preview browser by clicking it.
4.
The Print Art dialog displays.
5.
Select a print option in the Print Range area.
• Print Selected Picture
• From the Design Desk with a project open, choose Send Project from the
File menu, and then select As E-mail Attachment.
Your default e-mail program displays with the project attached.
To delete the file on your computer as well as from the Project Gallery, select the
Delete project file from disk checkbox.
The project is deleted.
• From the Project Gallery, click the My Projects tab. In the Preview browser,
select the project you want to send by clicking it. (You may first need to
search for the project so that it displays in the Preview browser.) Choose
Send as E-mail Attachment from the File menu.
Choose Delete Project from the Edit menu.
• Print Current Page
• Print All Pictures
Note: Choose Print All Pictures only from the My Projects tab.
6.
Select an option from the Number per Page area.
7.
Click Print.
The pictures of your selected projects print.
318
319
Using the Art Gallery
Modifying the View of Graphics
The Art Gallery contains thousands of graphics (art images and photos) that you
can use in your project on the All Art & Photos tab. You can also save modified
graphics and your own art images and photos on the My Art & Photos tab of the
Art Gallery.
You can change the view of graphics in the Preview browser.
1.
2.
In the Art Gallery, click one of the following buttons on the Art Gallery toolbar:
From within the Art Gallery, you can also import and export graphics, search and
organize graphics, and much more.
• Small
• Medium
• Large
— View small thumbnails of the graphics.
— View medium thumbnails of the graphics.
— View large thumbnails of the graphics.
The view of graphics in the Preview browser of the Art Gallery updates
according to your selection.
Searching Features in the Art Gallery
There are thousands of graphics in the Art Gallery to choose from and, if you
are connected to the Internet, there are even more available automatically. To
help you quickly locate the one you want, The Print Shop® includes powerful
searching features. With the searching features, you can find the right graphic in
a combination of three ways:
•
Basic Search — This feature allows you to make basic selections about the
featured art and the graphic type (such as bitmap file) as well as the graphic’s
category. You can also use search words to help locate a project (see Search
Words).
Accessing the Art Gallery
1.
on the
Object toolbar, and then choose Insert Art & Photos from the submenu.
2.
• Click the All Art & Photos tab to access the gallery of images.
• Click the My Art & Photos tab to access your own graphics and photos.
320
321
•
Advanced Search — In addition to options in the Basic Search, you can also
select the tone (such as Humorous) and which collection the graphic is in. You
can also use search words in this mode, with a couple of additional options (see
Search Words).
Searching for Graphics
You can locate the right image from thousands by using the searching features in
the Art Gallery. You can also use some of the Basic Search features to locate a
specific image among your own images on the My Art & Photos tab of the Art
Gallery.
1.
2.
In the Art Gallery, the following tabs are available to you:
• All Art & Photos — Access thousands of images available on The Print
Shop® CD (DVD) and online.
• My Art & Photos — Access images that you have saved to your own
categories.
3.
Select either the All Art & Photos tab or the My Art & Photos tab, depending on
the graphic for which you are looking.
Note: If you have selected the My Art & Photos tab, see steps 4, 7, and 8.
4.
Click Reset to clear all the boxes from a previous search.
5.
Select an option from the Select Featured Art and Photos drop-down list.
Graphics display in the Preview browser on the right according to your selection.
•
Search Words — This feature allows you to type search words (such as
6.
Birthday or Wedding Cake) to help locate the graphic. Search words work along
with the selections you make from drop-down lists in the Basic or Advanced
Search modes. The more information you provide (the more selections you make
or type), the narrower your search result of graphics will be.
•
Graphics display in the Preview browser according to your selections.
Enter Search Words — In this field, you can enter up to seven words. You can
also use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard; this means that you can type a portion of
the words you are using for your search, then use an asterisk (*) to repressent
one or more miscellaneous characters. (For example, *Cake* might return
Birthday Cake or Cake for a Party.)
Note: The All Art & Photos tab of the Art Gallery includes all three searching options.
The My Art & Photos tab, which contains your own graphics and photos,
includes only the Choose Category for graphic option with the ability to also
type search words.
Select a type of graphic from the Select Type of Graphic drop-down list.
Note: If Select Featured Art and Photos and Select Type of Graphic are the only
drop-down lists you see above the Choose Category for Graphic list box, then you
are in Basic Search mode. If you are on the All Art & Photos tab, you can further
narrow your search by clicking the Advanced Search button to display the
Advanced Search mode, and then do the following, as you want: select a tone
from the Select Tone for Graphic drop-down list or collection from the Select
Graphic Collection drop-down list.
7.
folder that contains the options you want to view, then select an option. You can
also double-click subfolders to display their options.
The graphics in that category display in the Preview browser on the right.
8.
9.
If you want to further narrow your search, type search words in the Enter Search
Words box, and then click Go. (For example, you can type the words, Birthday
Cake.)
If you are in Advanced Search mode, you can also select one of the following
options:
• All — Search for graphics that contain all of the search words you type.
• Any — Search for graphics that contain any of the search words you type.
322
323
The graphics that contain the search words display in the Preview browser.
1.
in the Preview browser and then click Select or double-click the graphic in
Preview. The graphic displays on the Design Desk.
To add an image to the Hot Shots Viewer on the Design Desk, right-click the
image in the Preview browser and then select Add to Viewer from the
submenu. (You can use the Add to Viewer menu item in the All Art & Photos
tab and the My Art & Photos tab of the Art Gallery.)
Selecting a Graphic
1.
2.
Click the graphic in the Preview browser of the Art Gallery.
Note: To place the selected graphic in your project on the Design Desk, click
Select in the Art Gallery.
Previewing Animated Art
Animated art graphics in the Art Gallery have the file type .GIF. You can search
for the .GIF graphic type the Art Gallery to find them. After you have searched
for them and selected a particular .GIF art graphic from the Preview browser,
you can preview the animation of that graphic before using it in your project or
sending it to others.
1.
2.
2.
3.
In the Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new category, and then
click OK. The category is added to the list in alphabetical order.
Copying and Moving Graphics into Categories
You can organize your own graphics and photos into categories on the My Art &
Photos tab of the Art Gallery.
1.
2.
In the Art Gallery, click the My Art & Photos tab.
3.
Search for and select the graphic you want to move or copy to another category.
4.
To copy the graphic to another category, press Ctrl and then click and drag the
selected graphic to a different category in the Choose Category for Graphic list
box.
Tip: You may also use Copy and Paste on the Art Gallery toolbar. See Copying
and Pasting Graphics.
Choose Preview Animated Art from the View menu.
5.
The Animated Preview dialog box displays with the animated graphic in action.
3.
You can also choose Move Graphic from the File menu, select the category to
which you want to move your graphic from the Move Item to a New Category
Organizing Your Graphics
To better organize your graphics, you can create new categories, organize
graphics in these new categories, and rename and delete categories on the My
Art & Photos tab. You can also reorder the graphics within a category. This is
useful for ordering your photos for a slide show, for example.
324
To move the graphic to another category, click and drag the graphic to the new
category in the Choose Category for Graphic list box.
Tip: You may also use Cut and Paste on the Art Gallery toolbar. See Cutting and
Pasting Graphics.
Click Done to return to the Art Gallery.
The Art Gallery contains a collection of your own graphics that you have
imported, scanned in, or saved to the Art Gallery. These appear in the My Art &
Photos tab in the Art Gallery.
Note: If you want to place one of the graphics in your project, then either click it
Reordering Graphics
You can reorder the graphics or photos in a category on the My Art & Photos
tab. This is useful for placing photos in a particular order for a slide show,
for example.
1.
2.
3.
Select the category in which you want to reorder graphics from the Choose
Category for Graphic list box. To do so, click the category.
Graphics in that category display in the Preview browser on the right.
325
4.
Select a graphic.
Copying and Moving Graphics
5.
Click and drag the graphic to another location in the Preview browser.
You can copy and move your own graphics and photos into other categories on
the My Art & Photos tab of the Art Gallery in order to better organize them. You
can also reorder your graphics within a category.
The graphic in that category is reordered.
Renaming a Category
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type a new name for the category, then click anywhere outside of the new
category name.
Deleting a Category
1.
Cut, Copy, and Paste in the Art Gallery allow you to move or copy graphics to
and from other areas within the Art Gallery. This is useful for copying a graphic
on the All Art & Photos to the My Art & Photos tab where it can be readily
available to you without CD-swapping or Internet access.
Finally, you can also click and drag any graphic in the Art Gallery to an open
project in the Design Desk to copy it there. Doing so leaves the Art Gallery open
so that you can select other graphics for your project.
Copying and Moving Graphics into Categories
You can organize your own graphics and photos into categories on the My Art &
Photos tab of the Art Gallery.
1.
2.
3.
Search for and select the graphic you want to move or copy to another category.
4.
To copy the graphic to another category, press Ctrl and then click and drag the
selected graphic to a different category in the Choose Category for Graphic list
box.
Tip: You may also use Copy and Paste on the Art Gallery toolbar. See Copying
and Pasting Graphics.
2.
3.
5.
You can also choose Move Graphic from the File menu, select the category to
which you want to move your graphic from the Move Item to a New Category
category.
4.
To move the graphic to another category, click and drag the graphic to the new
category in the Choose Category for Graphic list box.
Tip: You may also use Cut and Paste on the Art Gallery toolbar. See Cutting and
Pasting Graphics.
Note: If you have projects or graphics in the category you are deleting, then the
Delete Category dialog box displays with a warning that all projects or graphics
within the category will also be deleted. If you do not want to continue, click No.
Otherwise, you can select the Delete project (or graphic) files from disk checkbox
to delete the projects or graphics from your computer’s hard drive.
Cutting and Pasting Graphics
You can cut a graphic from a category in the My Art & Photos tab in the Art
Gallery, and then paste it into another category. This moves the graphic to a
different category.
Note: You cannot cut graphics from the All Art & Photos tab.
1.
Note: Be sure to select the My Art & Photos tab.
326
327
2.
Search for a graphic to display it in the Preview browser.
3.
Select the graphic from the Preview browser.
4.
5.
Select the category into which you want to place the selected graphic from the
Choose Category for Graphic list box by clicking it once.
6.
4.
Renaming a Graphic
1.
2.
3.
If you have created categories for your graphics, then select the category that
contains the graphic you want to rename from the Choose Category for Graphic
list box.
The graphic is moved to the selected category.
Copying and Pasting Graphics
You can copy a graphic from a category on any tab in the Art Gallery, and then
paste it into a category on the My Art & Photos tab.
This is useful for copying graphics from the All Art & Photos tab to the My Art &
Photos tab where they are readily available without CD-swapping, or copying
graphics to more than one category on the My Art & Photos tab so that they are
easier to find.
Click and drag the selected graphic from the Art Gallery to the Design Desk.
The graphic displays in the open project in the Design Desk and the Art Gallery
remains open.
4.
In the Preview browser, select the graphic you want to rename.
5.
Choose Rename Graphic from the Edit menu.
6.
Type a new name for the graphic, and then press Enter.
The graphic is renamed.
Modifying Graphic Properties
1.
2.
3.
Select the graphic from the Preview browser.
4.
5.
Make sure that the My Art & Photos tab is selected by clicking it.
1.
6.
Select the category into which you want to place the selected project from the
Choose Category for Graphic list box by clicking it.
2.
3.
7.
If you have created categories for your graphics, select the category that contains
the graphic you want from the Choose Category for Graphic list box.
4.
In the Preview browser, select a graphic.
The graphic is copied to the selected category on the My Art & Photos tab.
Copying Graphics to the Design Desk
You can copy a graphic in the Art Gallery to the Design Desk. This places the
graphic in the open project in the Design Desk and leaves the Art Gallery open
so that you can select additional art.
1.
2.
3.
Click and drag the title bar of the Art Gallery to move it so that the Design Desk
displays in the background.
After you import, scan in, or save a modified graphic, you can modify its
properties in the Art Gallery, such as the description of the graphic and
keywords you use to locate the graphic.
Note: You cannot modify the properties for a graphic on the My Art & Photos tab.
Note: If you cannot see your graphic in the Preview browser, then you may need to
search for your graphic first.
5.
Choose Properties from the View menu.
6.
7.
Type search words to use when searching for the graphic in the Keywords box.
8.
Click OK.
The Preview browser displays the new description under the graphic.
Tip: You can also resize the Art Gallery window by clicking and dragging the
side borders.
328
329
Modifying a Graphic Using Photo Workshop
let you improve your photo with a single click. Artistic, Colorization, Filter, and
Warp & Distort Effects create fun and interesting looks.
1.
graphic is not a bitmap, then The Photo Workshop will be grayed-out.
submenu.
• From the Art Gallery, search for the graphic to which you want to apply a
photo effect, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit graphic on
1.
2.
3.
Select one or more of the following options from the Select an Effect Category list box:
4.
• Quick Fix
• Artistic
• Colorization
• Filter
• Black & White
• Warp & Distort
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Adjust
Brightness & Focus from the submenu.
brightness and focus, and then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit
2.
3.
Click and drag the arrows to adjust Brightness, Contrast, Blur/Sharpen,
Saturation and Gamma.
4.
5.
6.
See The Photo Workshop Adjusting Brightness and Focus tutorial in the Help
6.
7.
5.
add an effect.
1.
330
331
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Area Effects from the
submenu.
effects, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on the Art
Gallery toolbar.
2.
3.
Select a shape for the area from the Select a Preset Shape or Draw a Shape
area.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
on the Object toolbar, and then choose Apply Artistic Stamps from the
submenu.
artistic stamp, then select it from the Preview browser. Click Edit Graphic on
9.
2.
3.
4.
list box:
5.
stamp.
• Quick Fix
6.
• Artistic
7.
• Black & White
8.
• Colorization
• Filter
• Warp & Distort
332
333
1.
4.
5.
• Print Current Page
modified graphic in your project. Click the Photo Tools button
on
the Object toolbar, and then select one of the Photo Workshop options from the
submenu, such as Adjust Color.
2.
Click Save As.
3.
4.
6.
Click Print.
The pictures of your selected graphic images print.
Importing a Graphic
You can import (or bring in) a graphic from another source into the Art Gallery in
The Print Shop®, then use it in your project.
In the Art Gallery with the My Art & Photos tab selected, choose Import from the
File menu.
3.
In the Import Pictures dialog box, locate the graphic file you want to import into
The Print Shop® on either the computer’s hard disk or on a separate disk.
and then click OK.
4.
Select the category in which you want to import the graphic from the Add to Art
Category drop-down list, and then select the Make Local Copy of File checkbox.
Click Save.
Advanced Photo Editor is a powerful program used to edit and enhance photos.
It contains similar features found in The Photo Workshop plus additional effects,
filters, and more.
Effects menu. The Advanced Photo Editor program displays. Use this program to
create customized calendars.
Printing a Graphic from the Art Gallery
You can print a picture of the graphic or photo with its title directly from the Art
Gallery.
1.
2.
3.
Select the graphic from the Preview browser by clicking it.
334
Note: Choose Print All Pictures only from the My Art and Photos tab.
6.
2.
1.
• Print All Pictures
1.
5.
Select a print option in the Print Range area.
• Print Selected Picture
The Print Art dialog displays.
Note: You can create a new category for your graphics. To do so, click New. In the
Add User Category dialog box, type a name for the new category, and then
click OK. You can then select this new category from the Add to Art Category
drop-down list.
5.
Click Import.
The graphic is imported into the Art Gallery.
6.
To add this graphic to your project on the Design Desk, select it in the Preview
browser, and then click Select.
Scanning in a Graphic or Digital Image
You can scan in graphics and photos for use in your projects. The Print Shop®
includes TWAIN software so that you can easily use a flatbed scanner from
within The Print Shop®.
You can also read in images from a digital camera.
Note: If this is the first time you are scanning in a graphic or digital image, then you
must first set up your scanner or digital camera for The Print Shop®. See
Selecting the Image Source.
335
7.
select Acquire Image.
• From the Design Desk, choose Acquire from the File menu.
This starts the software that came with your camera or scanner.
8.
Acquire the image according to the directions that came with your scanner or
digital camera. This will be different for each scanner or digital camera.
One of two results take place:
• If you scanned the graphic from the Design Desk, the graphic is placed on the
Design Desk.
• If you scanned the graphic from the Art Gallery, the Export As dialog box
displays.
9.
In the Export As dialog box, you can save the scanned graphic in Your Own Art
category on the My Art & Photos tab of the Art Gallery or in the Art folder on the
hard disk of your computer.
5.
To delete the graphic file on your computer as well as from the Art Gallery, select
the Delete graphic file from disk checkbox.
Exporting a Graphic
You can export a graphic from the Art Gallery to the hard disk of your computer
or to a separate disk so that you can share it with others or copy it to another
computer.
1.
2.
Search for the graphic that you want to export, and then select it from the Preview
browser.
3.
4.
In the Export dialog box, select the location to where you want to export the
selected graphic.
5.
Click Save.
Note: You can rename the exported graphic file by typing a new name into the File
name box.
Note: You may change the file format and the category to which the scan is saved in
this dialog box.
The file is exported to the indicated location. You are then returned to the Art
Gallery.
10. When finished selecting options in the Export As dialog box, click Save.
Using the Sentiment Gallery
Selecting the Image Source
1.
select Select Image Source.
• From the Design Desk, choose Select Image Source from the File menu.
2.
In the Select Source dialog box, choose the type of scanner or camera that you
want to use.
3.
Click OK.
Deleting a Graphic from the Art Gallery
that you can add to your project.
Adding a Sentiment
that you can add to your project. Each sentiment has two parts: a phrase for the
front of the project and a phrase for the inside of the project. If your project has
only one page, both parts of the sentiment will appear on that page. After you
select the appropriate sentiment, each phrase automatically displays in a text
box in your project.
1.
1.
2.
3.
Select the graphic from the Preview browser by clicking it.
4.
Press Delete.
336
On the Design Desk, choose Sentiment from the Insert menu.
The Sentiment Gallery displays.
You can only delete graphics from the My Art & Photos tab of the Art Gallery.
2.
Select an option from the Select Sentiment Collection drop-down list.
Two of the many sentiments display in the Preview browser on the right.
3.
In the Choose Sentiment Category list box, click the plus (+) symbol next to the
category that contains the sentiments you want, and then select an option.
The sentiments in that category display in the Preview browser.
4.
Select an option from the Select Tone for Sentiment drop-down list.
337
5.
If you want to further narrow your search, type search words into the Enter
Search Words box, and then click Go. (For example, you can type the word
Birthday.)
6.
If you typed in search words, you can also select from one of the following
options:
Creating a New Address Book
1.
Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Address Book, you may see a
Welcome screen with the option to select New, Open, or How Do I. You can click
one of those options or click Cancel to return to the Address Book.
• Any — Search for sentiments that contain any of the search words you typed.
The sentiments that contain the keywords display in the Preview browser.
To place one of the sentiments in your project, scroll through the Preview browser
to display it. Either click it and then click Select, or double-click the sentiment in
the Preview browser.
If this is the first time you are accessing the Address Book, the Event Reminder
may also display on startup. Click Close to close it.
The Options Wizard may also display. You can use it to set up your Address Book
options.
The sentiment displays in text boxes in your project. You can modify the sentiment
text like any other text.
Note: If your project has only one page, then both parts of the sentiment display
on the same page.
Modifying a Sentiment
2.
In the Address Book, choose New from the File menu.
3.
In the New Address Book dialog box, type a name for your address book in the
field, and then click OK.
You can modify a sentiment that you added from the Sentiment Gallery just as
you would any text box.
1.
On the Design Desk, double-click a text box that contains a sentiment.
2.
The new Address Book displays with the name for it in the title bar. You can now
enter address information into this address book.
Adding Address Information
1.
• To modify text, click and drag over the text that you want to modify to select it,
and then type the new text.
The Options Wizard may also display. You can use it to set up your Address Book
options.
Using the Address Book
2.
338
To add new contact information, choose Add from the Address menu, and then
type or select from appropriate boxes in the Add Address window.
Tip: Although you do not need to enter information into all the fields, it is a good
idea to include information in the First Name and Last Name fields.
Note: You create and modify an Address Book using software called the
Ultimate Mail Manager. For more information on using the Address Book,
choose The Ultimate Mail Manager Help from the Help menu in the
Address Book.
on
the Object toolbar, and then choose Edit Address Book from the submenu.
Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Address Book, then the Event
Reminder may also display on startup. Click Close to close it.
Use the Address Book to print personalized holiday cards for all your relatives,
invitations for friends, labels for customers, or certificates for students. Once you
have created an Address Book, you can quickly and easily draw information from
it to add to a project in The Print Shop®.
,
The Address Book displays. If you have not already created an address book,
The Print Shop® starts with a blank address book.
• All — Search for sentiments that contain all of the search words you typed.
7.
and then choose Edit Address Book from the submenu.
3.
To enter more contacts, click New in the Add Address window and enter the
contact information.
4.
The new contacts are listed in the Address Book.
339
Modifying Address Information
1.
On the Design Desk, click the Addresses/Events button
and then choose Edit Address Book from the submenu.
2.
Select a contact from the list in your Address Book, and then choose Edit from
the Address menu.
3.
In the Edit Address window, edit the information as needed.
4.
,
Note: For more information, choose Ultimate Mail Manager Help from the Help
menu in the Address Book.
Opening an Existing Address Book
1.
on the
2.
If the address book displayed is not the one you want, choose Open from the
File menu.
3.
In the Open dialog box, select the address book you want from the list box, and
then click Open.
Using the Event Reminder
With the Event Reminder, you can keep track of important dates, appointments,
and special occasions, such as birthdays, meetings, and favorite holidays. The
Event Reminder is part of the Ultimate Mail Manager and is tightly integrated
with your Address Book.
1.
To access the Event Reminder from the Design Desk, click the Address/Events
button
submenu.
2.
, and then choose Event Reminder from the
Using the Small Business Center
The Print Shop® offers the Small Business Center as a resource tool for the
small business community. You can use How-tos and Forms & Checklists to
answer specific issues facing you as a business owner.
1.
• From the Project Picker, click Small Business Center on the main toolbar.
• On the Design Desk, select Small Business Center from the Tools menu.
The Small Business Center displays.
2.
Click to select a category from the Choose a Category Area.
3.
Select one of the displayed topics in the Choose a Topic Area.
4.
The selected topic displays in the Viewing Area.
Using the Custom Paper Wizard
Note: When the Address Book is open, you can choose Settings from the View
menu, and then click Show Event Reminder on Windows Start Up to have the
Event Reminder display immediately each time you start up Windows.
The Custom Paper Wizard allows you to add new or unsupported paper stock
into The Print Shop® for printing labels, envelopes, half-fold greeting cards,
note cards, business cards, and postcards. The information requested by the
Custom Paper Wizard will vary depending on the type of paper stock that you
are adding.
To add or modify events, click Open Address Book.
If the Event Reminder does not display, then choose Event Reminder from the
View menu.
The Event Reminder displays.
340
To learn how to add or modify a reminder, and do much more, click Help.
Help for the Event Reminder displays.
The Event Reminder displays, showing recent events.
The Ultimate Mail Manager window opens. Depending on your settings, the full
Event Reminder displays on top.
3.
4.
You can add a new paper stock either while you are creating a project or when
you are preparing to print the project from the Design Desk.
Note: Custom Paper Wizard is not available in some versions of The Print Shop®.
The Print Shop® supports many custom paper stock types, but not all.
341
Creating a Custom Paper Stock
Modifying a Custom Paper Stock
You can add new or unsupported paper stock to the available list of options in
The Print Shop® for certain project types by using the Custom Paper Wizard. The
project types supported include labels, envelopes, half-fold greeting cards, note
cards, business cards, and postcards.
You can modify the dimensions of the custom paper stock you added.
1.
The Edit Custom Paper dialog box displays, listing all the custom paper stock
that you have created.
Note: The options that appear in the Custom Paper Wizard vary depending on the
project type for which you are creating new paper stock.
1.
From the Design Desk, choose Custom Paper Wizard from the Tools menu,
and then select New Custom Paper from the pop-up menu.
2.
If the welcome window displays, click Next.
3.
In the Select the type of stock you wish to add list box, select the appropriate
project type, and then click Next.
Note: This screen does NOT display if the Custom Paper Wizard was accessed from
within the Project Picker while creating a new project.
4.
In the next screen, select the type of paper stock you want to add (from the list
box) and other options available on the screen, if applicable.
5.
Click Next.
6.
In the next screen, click Create from Compatible Stock to select a paper
stock on which to base the one you are creating, and then click OK.
7.
Type the number of characters for the Print Size and Margin boxes.
8.
Type a name for the stock in the Enter name box.
9.
Select the appropriate checkboxes for those options.
3.
12. When Finish displays, make your final selections on that screen, and then click
Finish .
The paper stock you created will now appear on the available list of paper
stock options when you are creating a new project or when you are about to
print a project.
342
Type or select options on this screen and on the remaining screens, clicking Next
after each set of selections
Tip: An explanation for certain boxes displays at the bottom of the screen when
that field is selected.
4.
When Finish displays, make your final selections on that screen, and then click
Finish.
The paper stock is modified according to your selections. It will now appear on the
available list of paper stock options when you are creating a new project or when
you are about to print a project.
Deleting a Custom Paper Stock
You can delete a custom paper stock you added to the list of paper stock
available for certain project types.
1.
10. Click Next.
Your selections display in a Preview window.
11. Type or select options on the remaining screens, clicking Next after each set of
selections.
Tip: An explanation for certain fields displays at the bottom of the screen when
that box is selected.
Select the custom paper stock that you want to modify, and then click OK.
The Custom Paper Wizard displays with the specifications for the selected paper
stock.
The Custom Paper Wizard displays.
2.
On the Design Desk, choose Custom Paper Wizard from the Tools menu, and
then select Edit Custom Paper from the pop-up menu.
On the Design Desk, choose Custom Paper Wizard from the Tools menu,
and then select Delete Custom Paper from the pop-up menu.
The Edit Custom Paper dialog box displays, listing all the custom paper stock that
you have created.
2.
Select the custom paper stock that you want to delete.
Tip: To delete more than one paper stock at a time, press and hold down Ctrl
while you click each paper stock.
3.
Click Delete Stock.
The paper stocks you selected are deleted and will no longer appear in the list of
paper stock options when you are creating a new project or about to print a
project.
343
Using Broderbund on the Internet
Modifying Sysytem Settings
Broderbund.com extends the functionality and resources of The Print Shop® to
the Internet. This online creative center provides you with a wide variety of free
resources and special offers that will inspire your imagination.
You can modify the default system settings in The Print Shop® to create your
own preferred working environment.
Note: The first time you access Broderbund.com, you will need to register. Follow the
online instructions to do so.
Visiting Broderbund.com
You can access online resources and additional features at Broderbund on the
Internet.
Setting the Default Fonts
Whenever you add text to a project, The Print Shop® uses a default font. The
default font is also used in place of any fonts that are missing when you open a
project. You can change this default font.
1.
On the Design Desk, choose Options from the File menu, and then select
General Options.
Note: You must have an Internet connection available.
2.
In the Options dialog box, click the General tab.
1.
3.
Select a font from the Default Font drop-down list to set as the default font.
4.
Select a secondary default font from the Secondary Font drop-down list.
5.
Click OK.
• In the Project Picker, click the Get More button
.
Note: Changing the default font will not affect any project that is currently open.
• On the Design Desk, click the Get More button on the Object toolbar.
Selecting an unusual default font may affect the readability of text in the preview
display.
The default Web browser opens to The Print Shop® Web page.
Showing or Hiding Missing Font Messages
Finding Out What’s New
You can stay tuned to what’s new with The Print Shop® by checking its Web site
for special announcements and up-to-date information.
1.
On the Design Desk, either click
on the Standard toolbar or choose Wha
If you open a project that contains missing fonts, a message displays that details
which fonts are missing and the default font that will be substituted. You can turn
on or off the display of missing font messages.
1.
New? from the Help menu.
2.
General Options.
2.
Click Check Now.
3.
The default Web browser opens to the Web page where you can view the latest
information about The Print Shop®.
Select or deselect Show a Message when Fonts are Missing in a Document
checkbox.
4.
Click OK.
Note: Missing fonts are always substituted with the font selected in Default Font
on the General tab.
344
345
Setting the Date Format
Restoring Hints
Whenever you enter a date into text in a project, The Print Shop® uses a default format,
which you can change.
The Print Shop® keeps track of the helpful hints you have already seen. You can restore
the helpful hints so they will appear as they did when you first started The Print Shop®.
1.
General Options.
1.
From the Design Desk, choose Options from the File menu, and then select
General Options.
2.
2.
In the General Options dialog box, click the Help tab.
3.
Select a date format from the Date Format drop-down list as the default format.
3.
In the Helpful Hints area, click Reset All Hints.
4.
Click OK.
4.
Click OK.
Setting the Unit Format
Resizing Images for Cellular Phones
Whenever you use the ruler or other measurement such as printer settings, The Print
Shop® uses a default unit of measurement, which you can change.
Edit your photo ahead of time, keeping in mind that the viewing area of the cell phone is
much smaller than a computer monitor. To upload pictures to your cellular phone, first
contact your cellular provider as each provider works differently. When you are ready to
send your photo to your cellular phone, follow the steps below:
1.
General Options.
2.
In the Options dialog box, click the Units tab.
3.
Choose the English Units or Metric Units as the default unit format.
4.
Click OK.
Showing or Hiding Hints
1.
Open The Print Shop®® 21 and open a project.
2.
Add the desired image to the project.
3.
Right-click the image and click Edit Using Advanced Photo Editor. An
Advanced Photo Editor window will appear.
4.
Click Image from the top menu bar then click Resize. The resize options will
appear in the Common Tasks pane.
From the Design Desk, choose Options from the File menu, and then select
General Options.
2.
In the General Options dialog box, click the Help tab.
3.
In the Helpful Hints area, select or deselect the appropriate checkboxes. The help
tips are as follows:
• Show Helpful Hints — These are hints that appear in boxes from time to
time with useful information about creating projects.
• Show Tool Tips — These are the pop-up windows that identify a tool when
you position the pointer over it.
• Show Text Box Hints — This is instructional text that appears over a text
box.
4.
1.
Click OK.
Complete one of the following procedures to resize the image to preserve the
current aspect ratio:
• Click to place a check in the box to the left of Preserve Aspect Ratio.
• Click to select the radio button to the right of Actual/Print Size in: and select
the desired measurement unit.
5.
Decrease the width or height as desired by clicking the up or down arrows
as needed.
Note: When maintaining the aspect ratio, adjusting the width or height will
automatically adjust the other measurement as needed.
Complete one of the following procedures to resize the image to manually adjust
the width and height individually:
• Click to remove the check in the box to the left of Preserve Aspect Ratio.
• Click to select the radio button to the right of Actual/Print Size in: and select
the desired measurement unit.
• Decrease the width or height as desired by clicking the up or down arrows
as needed.
346
347
The Print Shop User’s Manual
6.
Click the down arrow to the right of Resolution and select the desired resolution
from the drop-down list that appears.
7.
Click the down arrow to the right of Filter and select the desired resampling filter.
8.
To apply the selected changes to the image and return to The Print Shop® 21,
click Done located at the bottom of the Common Tasks pane. If Done is not
visible, use the scroll bar on the right side of the Common Tasks pane to scroll to
the bottom. If the changes are not desired click Cancel to revert to the image’s
original settings.
Resizing tips
•
Maintain image quality by reducing image by 33%, 50% or 66% to avoid distorting
the aspect ratio
•
Avoid resizing the image repeatedly. Each resizing places image pixels using a
slightly different orientation. As a result, multiple resizes can change the overall
color and appearance of the image.
•
Avoid increasing the size of the image. Increasing the image size makes the
image’s pixels more apparent, causing a grainy effect. The default Web browser
opens to the Web page where you can view the latest information about The
Print Shop®.
348

user`s manual - Encore Support

Transcription

Similar documents

Monster Jobs - by Carpe Data

takeover - Ekstra Bladet

Quickutz Silhouette Tutorial #1 Setup and creating basic letters

View our Events Brochure

Schedule - Masson Glennie

modern. intriguing. seductive. VENUE RENTAL

trade-show-graphic-design-tips

Resume - Daniel Nemerofsky

File

2010 11th Educational Seminar a huge success!